Section A - Table of Contents
Section A Table of Contents
Section B Management Summary
Section C Meeting the Specification
Technical Requirements (Q1-Q10)
Data Security Requirements (Q1-Q7)
Service Capability Requirements (Q1-Q16)
Service Delivery Requirements (Q1-Q10)
National Implementation Delivery Requirements (Q1-Q5)
Media Market Services (Q1-Q10)
Recruitment Services (Q1-Q11)
Section D Response to terms and conditions of contract
Section E Declaration
Section F Price schedules
Lot 1
Lot 2
Lot 3
Section B - Tribal, the partner of choice - Management Summary
Tribal's distinctive offering combines professional; commercial and public service expertise that we believe makes us the ideal partner for the DCSF to engage with in the development and management of the national ATS system for schools recruitment.
We work in partnership with our clients to help shape policy and improve the quality and value for money of public services. Whether we are raising standards in schools and colleges, regenerating communities or improving hospitals, our focus is on delivering outcomes that enrich lives. Tribal's people reflect the values of our public service clients and our distinctive approach is one of working in partnership with our clients to make a positive difference to the communities they serve.
Our staff that number in excess of 2000 work with over 2500 public sector organisations and our regular clients include schools, colleges, universities, local authorities and work-based learning providers.
We have an unrivalled skills profile that is ideal for this contract which includes assessors and recruiters, marketing, advertising and PR professionals, internet and software developers, educators, trainers, project managers and national sales teams.
We are a flexible, confident and young organisation and while the range of expertise may be wide, every one of our people have things in common: they are recognised as being at the top of their profession in terms of technical, intellectual and managerial skills and they are dedicated to supporting the public sector vision and ethos through aligned values that are:
passionate about improvement
stronger together
inspiring people
unleashing talent
prepared to be different
We work in partnership with the education sector to raise learning and skills standards to make a positive and lasting difference to the lives of people across the country. Our wide range of services, combined with our experience and ability to innovate, are transforming the education and skills sector today.
Tribal is the largest provider of inspection services for the Office for Standards in Education (Ofsted) and information, advice and guidance to the Offender Learning and Skills Service (OLASS) as well as being one of the main providers of services to the Quality Improvement Agency (QIA).
We also supply consultancy and support to the Learning and Skills Council and work with the Training and Development Agency (TDA) and Lifelong Learning UK. We have built a strong relationship with the TDA through our work on teacher development and mathematics.
We also work with organisations including the Department for Children, Schools and Families and the Training and Development Agency as well as children's services departments across the UK and the voluntary sector to develop and implement policy.
We work with schools to improve the performance of pupils, teachers and the school itself. Our leading Pupils' Champions! Programme is geared towards raising standards by helping pupils to improve their attitude, behaviour and personal skills.
Our new school improvement toolkit takes the core principles of Pupils Champions to the next level so the school can develop processes and practices to improve learning. We also work with an increasing number of schools to support the personal development of their teachers - this is all about raising standards.
Working with Ofsted, our inspection services contribute to the improvement and standard of schooling in more than a third of schools in England.
Tribal have a reputation for building successful ATS and job portal systems for the public sector, and already provide recruitment advertising media services and executive search and selection for schools; host a dedicated job board careersforeducationleaders.com; and a wide range of training and services for the professional development of teachers including distance learning as well as courses and conferences; so the school ATS project would become integrated into a joined up portfolio for those working in the sector.
Our recruitment experts are dedicated to delivering resourcing solutions that help schools attract, develop and retain the very best people. Our Careers for Head teachers web portal was the UK's first recruitment site dedicated solely to senior level recruitment in the schools sector. With over 150 UK Authorities contracted with us for the provision of recruitment services we have an immediate route to market and immediately upon winning the contract will be able to advise and guide LA's towards the new system. These authorities include the likes of:
CORNWALL COUNTY COUNCIL |
WILTSHIRE COUNTY COUNCIL |
STAFFORDSHIRE COUNTY COUNCIL |
WANDSWORTH BOROUGH COUNCIL |
WAKEFIELD MDC |
COVENTRY CITY COUNCIL |
KIRKLEES COUNCIL |
HERTFORDSHIRE COUNTY COUNCIL |
LONDON BOROUGH OF SOUTHWARK |
LONDON BOROUGH OF HACKNEY |
CAMBRIDGESHIRE COUNTY COUCIL |
BUCKINGHAMSHIRE COUNTY COUNCIL |
CITY OF LONDON |
SHROPSHIRE COUNTY COUNCIL |
LONDON BOROUGH OF BARNET |
KENT COUNTY COUNCIL |
NEWCASTLE CITY COUNCIL |
We now manage in total more than £400 million of capital projects in education and have a proven track record of delivering projects and bespoke commercial solutions to schools, on time and budget. This proven project management experience means that the DCSF can be wholly confident that we will deliver. And for an organisation such as Tribal; anything less than excellence in our lead sector is simply not an option.
On behalf of all in Tribal, we trust you find our bid appealing and we look forward to having the opportunity of presenting further on this project.
Keith Pilling
Board Director and Contract Sponsor
Section C
Technical Requirements
Q1 - Please describe how your proposed solution would be able to manage the hierarchical structure for the different customer groups (The DCSF, Local Authorities, Clusters of Schools and/ or Individual Schools)?
Tribal's application will provide a hierarchical structure for different user groups who, will, in-turn, have different access rights to candidate information. Tribal's system and our configuration of it will provide differing customer groups with varied structure and access levels to meet their individual needs. The level of access (i.e. what users will be able to view on screen) will need to be agreed during the configuration stage of the build process.
We envisage the user types to be as follows (but not limited to):
Contract Authorised Super Users
This type of user will have full control of the entire application
They will be able to perform any action within the system.
DCSF Users
A DCSF User can only be created by a Super User, or by existing DCSF user within the system
DCSF Users will only have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, LA and school level.
Local Authority (LA) Super Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, or by an existing LA Super User within the system
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, LA and school level.
LA HR Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, an existing LA Super User assigned to the LA of the school, or by an existing LA HR User for the same LA
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from an LA,and school level.
School Super Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, or by existing School Super Users for the same school
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for their school.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data for their school (Note: If the school is part of a cluster then they will be able to report on other schools within the cluster).
School HR Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, School Super Users for the same school, or by existing School HR Users from the same school
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from an individual school level.
School Standard Users (Recruiter/Chair)
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, or School Super Users, existing School HR Users and existing School Standard Users from the same school.
They can only see jobs within their school that they have been assigned to.
They can only be assigned to jobs within their school.
They will only be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, regional, LA and school level (if this level of access isn't required it can easily be configured).
School Panel Members (Governors etc)
This type of user can only be created by a Super Userexisting LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, or School Super Users existing School HR Users or existing School Standard Users forromhe same school.
They can only be able to see jobs within their school that they have been assigned to.
They can only be assigned to jobs within their school.
They will be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
Media Agency User (Lot 2 provider)
This type of user can only be created by a Super User.
They can only manage jobs for a school that they have been assigned to.
Recruitment Service User (Lot 3 provider)
This type of user can only be created by a Super User.
They can only manage jobs for a school that they have been assigned to.
They will be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
They will take the position of the chair/recruiter during the workflow process once assigned.
They will have access to online assessment results.
They will have access to reporting for the jobs that they are assigned to.
The process of creating customer group users within Tribal's application
DCSF Users
DCFS users can be created within the system by assigning a DCSF user type to the user being created. They can only be created by a Super User or another DCSF User. The following information will need to be entered:
User Type (Dropdown of ser ypes) - List of serypes
First Name
Surname
Username (Email Address)
Password
Password Confirmation
Local Authorities
A section will be available for Super Users to create Local Authorities (LA). A Super Admin User shall be able to enter the following for an LA:
LA Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact
Contact Telephone
Contact Email
LA Logo
Enabled
LA Users
An LA can create admin users of two types: LA Super Users and LA HR Users. A Super User will first need to create the first LA Super User, and then this LA Super User will be able to create all other LA Users. A user being created will require the following:
Local Authority (Dropdown of LAs) - this is only available to Super Users.
User Type (Dropdown of User Types) - list of School User Types
First Name
Surname
Username (Email Address)
Password
Password Confirmation
Schools
A section will be available for schools to be created. As a school can only be created under an LA, it will be associated with the LA. A school can only be linked to one LA. The following information will need to be entered for a school:
School Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact
Contact Telephone
Contact Email
School Logo
Enabled
School Users
A school can create admin users of three types:School Super Users, School HR Users and School Standard Users. A user being created will require the following:
School (Dropdown of LAs) - this is only available to LA Super Users/Super Users.
User Type (Dropdown of User Types) - list of School User Types
First Name
Surname
Username (Email Address)
Password
Password Confirmation
Area Clusters
A cluster can be created within the system. A cluster is made up of a list of clusters, and each schools must be assigned to a cluster to be included within it..
Only a Super User or an LA Super User can create a cluster, and assign schools to a cluster. A cluster will only require the following information:
LA Local Authority (Dropdown of LAs) - this is only available to Super Users.
Title
Once the cluster is created, schools can then be assigned to it.
Schools (a multiple select control to select schools to assign to the cluster) The list of schools will only be taken from the LA that is selected for the cluster. A school can only be assigned to one cluster, so any schools assigned to another cluster will not be shown.
Technical Requirements
Q2. Please describe how your proposed solution would manage the access and restrictions to data for the different user customer groups?
Tribal's application will provide a hierarchical structure for different user groups who will, in -turn, have different access rights to the system. Tribal's system and our configuration of it will provide differing customer groups with varied structure and access levels to meet their individual needs.
The level of access (i.e. what users will be able to view on screen) will need to be agreed during the configuration stage of the build process.
At its core, the system only allows administration access via user identification and password.

Passwords are not visible during entry
The initial password validation is controlled by the operating system.
The password format can be specified by the implementation team (as a minimum we'd recommend six alphanumeric characters and case sensitivity).
Password data is encrypted within the system at all times
Users entering an incorrect password more than a preset number of times (which is three) will be locked out with access permission being re-instated following rules defined by administrative users (the default is preset time).
If administrators have to reset a password for a user then the user will be forced by the system to change it immediately upon entry to the system.
To conclude, the system has a comprehensive end-to-end security structure which enables the administrator to specify the type and level of access available to the user. The system supports Roles Based Access Control to help structure unlimited levels of users and user groups, as well as controlling access at user/user group, field or page level.
We envisage the user types to be as follows (but not limited to):
System User Types
Contract Authorised Super Users
This type of user will have full control of the entire application
They will be able to perform any action within the system.
DCSF Users
A DCSF user can only be created by a Super User or an existing DCSF user within the system
DCSF users will only have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, LA and school level.
Local Authority (LA) Super Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User or and existing LA Super User within the system
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, LA and school level.
LA HR Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school or existing LA HR Users for the same LA
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a LA and school level
School Super Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school or existing School Super Users for the same school
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for their school.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data for their school (Note: if the school is part of a cluster, they will be able to report on other schools within the cluster).
School HR Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, or by School Super Users and existing School HR Users from the same school.
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data for their individual school.
School Standard Users (Recruiter/Chair)
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, or School Super Users, , existing School HR Users and existing School Standard Users from the same school.
They can only see jobs within their school that they have been assigned to.
They can only be assigned to jobs within their school.
They will only be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, regional, LA, and school level (if this level of access isn't required it can easily be configured).
School Panel Members (Governors etc)
Theis type of user can only be created by a Super User, existing LA Super Users assigned to the LA of the school, or School Super Users, existing School HR Users and existing School Standard Users from the same school.
They can only be able to see jobs within their school that they have been assigned to.
They can only be assigned to jobs within their school.
They will be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
Media Agency User (Lot 2 provider)
This type of user can only be created by a Super User.
They can only manage jobs for a school that they have been assigned to.
Recruitment Service User (Lot 3 provider)
This type of user can only be created by a Super User.
They can only manage jobs for a school that they have been assigned to.
They will be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
They will take the position of the chair/recruiter during the workflow process once assigned.
They will have access to online assessment results.
They will have access to reporting for the jobs that they are assigned to.
Technical Requirements
Q3 - Please describe how your proposed solution would be able to manage the different types of users within each customer grouping e.g. Super users, Admin users and standard users etc.
Tribal's ATS will be able to easily manage the different types of users required for each customer grouping. Final definition of the user type names and the level of access i.e. what they will be able to view on screen and action within the workflow will need to be agreed during the configuration stage of the build process.
Tribal's application will provide hierarchical structure for different user groups who in-turn will have different access rights to the system. The configuration of the Tribal system will allow differing customer groups to have varied structure and access levels to meet their differing needs
The system will enable the following user types to be managed within each customer grouping (but this is not limited to):
Contract Authorised Super Users
This type of user will have full control of the entire application
They will be able to perform any action within the system.
DCSF Users
A DCSF user can only be created by a Super User, or by an existing DCSF user within the system
DCSF users will only have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, LA, and school level.
Local Authority (LA) Super Users
This type of user can only be created by a Super User, or by existing LA Super User within the system
This type of user will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, LA, and school level.
LA HR Users
These type of users can only be created by a Super User, by an existing LA Super User that is assigned to the LA of the school, or by an existing LA HR User for the same LA
These types of users will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a LA, and school level
School Super Users
These types of users can only be created by a Super User, by existing LA Super Users that are assigned to the LA of the school, or by existing School Super Users for the same school
These types of users will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for their school.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data for their school (Note: If school is part of a cluster then they will be able to report on other schools within the cluster)
School HR Users
These type of users can only be created by a Super User, by existing LA Super Users that are assigned to the LA of the school, by School Super Users for the same school, or by existing School HR Users from the same school
These type of users will have access to all areas of the system, but will only see data for schools within their locality
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from an individual school level.
School Standard Users (Recruiter/Chair)
These type of users can only be created by a Super User, by existing LA Super Users that are assigned to the LA of the school, by School Super Users for the same school, by existing School HR Users from the same school, or by existing School Standard Users for the same school
They will only be able to see jobs within their school that they have been assigned too.
They can only be assigned to jobs within their school
They will only be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
They will have access to the reporting tools within the system, and will be able to report on data from a national, Regional, LA, and school level (if this level of access isn't required it can easily be configured).
School Panel Members (Governors etc)
These types of users can only be created by a Super User, by existing LA Super Users that are assigned to the LA of the school, by School Super Users for the same school, by existing School HR Users from the same school, or by existing School Standard Users for the same school
They will only be able to see jobs within their school that they have been assigned too.
They can only be assigned to jobs within their school
They will be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
The task of this user is within workflow, specifically short-listing and interviews.
Media Agency User (Lot 2 provider)
These types of users can only be created by a Super User.
They can only manage jobs for a school that they have been assigned too.
Recruitment Service User (Lot 3 provider)
These types of users can only be created by a Super User.
They can only manage jobs for a school that they have been assigned too.
They will be able to see all applications submitted for jobs that they are assigned to.
They will take the place as the chair/recruiter during the workflow process once assigned.
They will have access to online assessment results.
They will have access to reporting for the jobs that they are assigned too.
Technical Requirements
Q4 - Providers must be able to demonstrate that they can support and manage the potential increase in demand. Please describe how you would propose to manage the potential increase for the different customer groups and list all assumptions.
Anticipating Take-Up
During the configuration process we would expect to be working with the DCSF and other national bodies to help ensure that we can predict early adopter volumes and make certain that all aspects of service are allowed for. We have, for example, for the purposes of our bid and planning assumed a higher than predicted take-up rate. In addition, because Tribal is already working with all English Local Authorities and has contracts to provide many of them with recruitment services, we would therefore from the date of contract award be carrying out proactive evaluation assessments to define and secure likely take-up rates in order that both our capacity and resources can be pre-empted.
Tribal's commitment to the DCSF, LA's and Schools is that any school will be live on the system within 24 hours of submitting the online registration form.
The core areas of increased demand we have anticipated and catered for within our response are as follows:
Hardware & Software
The hardware and software proposed for this bid is resilient enough to manage in excess of 150,000 applications per annum (according to the ITT this is what we could potentially expect over the three-year process). This type of volume is not uncommon to clients using our product.
Our hosting scalability is unlimited and is able to be upgraded with immediate effect. However, as we continually monitor server usage we are able to predict upturns in capacity well in advance. As a basic policy we always leave in excess of 50% spare capacity so that all our ATS systems continually function at optimum levels.
Set up & Support
During the configuration process we would expect to be working with the DCSF and other national bodies to help ensure that we can predict early adopter volumes and that all aspects of service are allowed for. For the purposes of our bid, we have for example assumed a higher than predicted take-up rate.
The majority of customer group activity will be channelled through our lean, agile and well established Service Desk based in Sheffield. Along with supporting all ATS systems this Service Desk also manages national web projects .The standardised processes we would adopt for this project will allow us to keep risk to a minimum and ensure we provide all customer groups with the highest levels of service, quality and customer focus. Processes will be tailored dependent on the customer group.
Tribal's solution can be deployed with efficiency so customer groups can use our off-the-shelf solution in a matter of hours, following training.
See below for an example user story process of an establishment joining the ATS.
All new registrations will be completed online.
Phone/Email Support will then given to assist users entering information if supplied instructions are not enough, although the aim is to make the registration process as automated as possible.
TSD (Tribal Service Desk) Administrators to approve new registrations based on criteria laid down by DCSF - (e.g. CRB/Ofsted Database Checks).
See below for an example of some of the detail which will be captured during the above process:
|
||
A. Potential DCSF Process Definition |
|
|
Process Objectives: To capture basic contact information about a new educational establishment. |
||
Output(s): New client: recorded Basic contact information captured |
||
Measures of Success: Volume of records Response for each on-line working to be returned within agreed response time limits |
||
Key activities |
Responsibility |
|
Starts with: Generating interest |
Tribal |
|
Ends with: Registering a new educational establishment |
Tribal |
|
Includes: Obtaining data protection approval Obtaining data sharing agreement Where the business is Ofsted registered, checking Ofsted registration number against systems records provided by Ofsted Validating mandatory data on RP i.e. name of educational establishment or LA, address details, name and job title of person completing this record, nature of the business/organisation at this educational establishment; number of pupils, number of full time equivalents. Part of a cluster? Yes/No Establishing Super user Entering establishment Logo Wants to register onto the next New Starter training programme? |
Tribal Tribal Tribal
Tribal
Tribal Tribal Tribal Establishment |
|
Frequency: For each new establishment |
||
Policy / Rules: Registration will only be completed through the web Tribal will not accept submission without acknowledgment of data protection. Tribal will not accept submission without a valid email address. |
||
Training
Tribal is one of the largest providers of continuous professional development to the public sector. We are experts in online learning materials and blended learning, and have solid experience of working with both local authorities and the wider public sector. For example, Tribal has been awarded a contract to become a training provider for the Early Years Professional Status in three English regions. Tribal's trainers will help you get the most out of our software resources.
Tribal has over 2500 employees, with databases of thousandsof registered trainers that can be accessed at short notice. We also regularly deliver training to the education sector for schools across the UK. We are already an accredited training organisation for PRINCE2™ and Managing Successful Programmes.
Our consultants have proven expertise in designing, developing and delivering training solutions.
Through years of hands-on experience and an understanding of government issues, we are able to bring training to life and make it directly relevant to the day-to-day needs of our course participants.
Our training is different because we:
believe in learning through doing - our training is highly interactive and very practical
provide 1:1 coaching before, during and after the training events and our team is available throughout the year to respond to questions
field subject matter experts with extensive hands-on experience designing and implementing ATS solutions.
Sales & Implementation Management
Tribal has a 250 strong national mobile workforce specialising in recruitment, based out of one of our regional hub offices in London (x 2), Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester, Cambridge, Norwich, Bristol, Nottingham, Sheffield). All of our people are able and committed to providing knowledge and expertise on the ATS solution. We place 1000's of adverts weekly and will have no problem supporting large volumes of schools/LA enquiries.
We also run our own Process Outsourcing Centre which regularly handles large scale projects from the public sector.
Technical Requirements
Q5. Please provide details of your business contingency plan arrangements in the event of the need for disaster recovery.
Daily Data Backup
Our offsite backup solution is designed to run within an overnight backup window between 12am and 4am, without interruption to service. The data is sent via separate Network Interface Card (NIC) on the server, over a dedicated managed backup network in the Data Centre to the ADIC LT04 Tape Library. Once the backup is complete the tapes are removed from the library and stored in a separate suite in the data centre, in a fire proof safe until picked up.
Tapes will then be collected daily by Iron Mountain from the production site and transported to their storage facilities in Reading using their own secure transportation services. This service has a rigorous chain-of-custody control for tapes when in transit. Tapes are stored and protected in environmentally optimised vaults, with access available 24x7. The tape storage site in Reading is BS4783 complainant. Offsite vendor representatives do not have direct access to individual media containing customer data at any point or any time during the transport container's offsite period.
The back-up strategy is weekly full back-up, and daily differentials back-up, on a 2 week rotation.
Data Recovery Models
In addition to overnight backups, the SQL database is able to be set to FULL recovery model. This will allow a full restore of data up to any time period during the day. This type of restore allows for a fast restore of data, if data loss or data corruption occurred during the day, and the client does not wish to restore from a backup from the previous night.
Disaster Recovery - Failure of Hosting Platform
In a worst case scenario event where a server's RAID set experiences a catastrophic failure where all data on the server is lost or corrupted, there is a predefined set of procedures to get the system back online as soon as possible.
Steps to restore the system include the following:
Identify the Failure:
Monitoring tools ensure that the servers and infrastructure are responding. In the event of a catastrophic RAID failure, the server would fail to respond to Ping and other monitoring alerts. This will be flagged to the 24x7 monitoring team to investigate. In the instance of a full “server down”, this alert is also replicated directly to the Data Centre team so immediate action can be taken. The team will then prioritise the investigation of the alert and develop a course of action to resolve the issue.
Replace the Hardware:
Once the issue has been isolated to a failed RAID array, the hardware SLAs guarantee that the hardware will be replaced within 1 hour, regardless of whether this means replacing multiple hard drives or rebuilding an entirely new server.
Re-instate the Operating System
In order for the Managed Backup system to connect to the server and begin restoring data the Operating System needs to be re-established. This is done via the automated network deployment systems to quickly configure the server to the original state in which it was provided to when installed. Typically this process takes 90-120 minutes depending on the amount of additional packages on the server (for example MSSQL).
Restore Data
Once the server is back to its original state, it is then ready for restore of the data from the most recent available backup. The restore process is initiated from the Managed Backup team who are available 24x7x365, and the SLA in place states to commence restore requests within 2 hours. In reality the restore requests can be started very quickly where the backup media is available on site, but for worst case scenario planning and tapes have been stored off-site at Iron Mountain, the would be returned to the data centre within 4 hours.
Restoring data from the backup system over the network can be done at a rate of 4-5GB/hour; the length of this step is entirely dependent on the amount of data needing to be restored.
Handover
Once the data has been restored, the development team will be notified to login to the system to ensure that everything is in order and begin to work with our support teams to resolve any outstanding issues relating to the Operating System or Application Infrastructure.
Disaster Recovery - Data Centre Unavailable
Should a disaster occur to the Data Centre hosting the live servers that completely removes the ability of that data centre to function, a Disaster Recovery (DR) site is available at Tribal's shared hosting infrastructure located in the 24x7 manned Easynet data centre based in London. The service will be remotely managed by Tribal from our Sheffield and London Offices.
Tribal's service management team working with Easynet, Tribal's co-location partner for this DR site, supply and provide the management of air conditioning, cooling, 24x7 secure/CCTV access, rack (including KVM, LCD Monitor and PDU's) and floor space, resilient power feeds, multi fibre connection via resilient paths connected to tier 1 backbone, carbon footprint (low power consumption equipment and virtualisation of server the farm) and are continually reviewing, monitoring and improving the data centre SLA between Easynet and Tribal.
Tribal has many years of experience providing hosting solutions on a national level, from the Easynet Data Centre in London. The Tribal IT and Technical Services team currently manages the hosting for Schools for Care (SfC) and National Science Learning Centre (NSLC) national web sites support a combined potential user population of over 300 thousand users. Experiences gained from these projects have been used to develop the Tribal shared hosting infrastructure located in the Easynet data centre.
The DR site is setup in a similar architecture to the live server, with settings, and operating system the same. Recovery to the Disaster Recovery site will occur within 72 hours, and the data will be recovered from the last successful log ship. The Disaster Recovery service includes one annual DR test. Log shipping will be automated over an IP Secure VPN between Live Server and DR Server. Shipping of logs will occur every 4 hours based on asynchronous replication. If client requires replication more often, this is achievable and can be costed.
Once the DR site is in use following failure of Live system, the full redundancy of hardware can be achieved within 10 days.
DR Hosting Platform
- 2 x Virtual Machines includes 30Gb of Storage each running Windows Std Edition, 2Gb Memory
- 1 x Dedicated Database Server (Dual processor quad core) 50Gb Storage FC RAID 1 Storage running Windows Std Edt, 4Gb Memory
These items will sit behind:
- Pair of ASA 5520 Firewalls
- Pair CSS 11503 Load Balancing Switches
- Cisco Power Core Network
- VMware Cluster
- EMC SAN Fibre Channel and iSCSI
- Backup to tape (encrypted) stored offsite
Tribal Offices
Tribal has 10 different hub offices across the UK. If an office that hosts staff engaged on the DCSF shared recruitment contract is struck by a disaster, another office can be utilised to house the displaced staff, or engage their duties. The infrastructure hosting the office servers is on an MPLS network; this means access to general office systems and servers is available through permission logins by staff in any location.
Technical Requirements
Q6. Please provide details of how your organisation would plan for IT system continuity?
System continuity plans cover all eventualities that affect on-site uptime, including:
Disasters affecting the whole Data Centre
Data Centre power failure
Network connection failure
Specific hardware item failure on hosting platform
Site downtime due to application error
Corruption of data, or data loss
Increased load due to increase in user activity
The following areas identify the specific plans and processes in place:
Server Structure
The structure of the servers provides for an architecture with no single point of hardware failure, and automatic failover to backup device if any item of hardware fails.
There are two load-balanced web servers and two clustered database servers, with SAN and SATA storage on the back end with high availability, dual firewalls / load balancers and additional switches and connections. All delivery components are fully redundant, and able to withstand single or multiple failures of hardware. To ensure a high level of performance the load balancer dynamically assigns new incoming connections to the web server with the least connections currently, meaning that the load is shared between the two servers. The advantage of this setup is that it allows for rapid deployment of additional webservers, databases, and/or SAN space as required for additional loads.

Scaling up the Hosting Platform
As usage increases with increased take-up of the Shared Recruitment Services offering, the demand on the servers increases. This usage and load is monitored constantly, and projections of load and possible required changes are planned based on monthly reviews of the monitoring reports. The hosting platform can be scaled up with additional webservers, database servers, SAN and SATA SAN, Backup and Bandwidth as required to meet the demands of user activity. An example of this scaling up of the hosting platform can be seen below.

Superstructure (Data Centres, Network, Servers, Software)
The facilities include a Tier 1 Data Centre, Cisco Powered Network™, Dell Hardware, leading backbone providers, 6.3 Gb/s of connectivity and 100% uptime network guarantee.
Daily Data Backup
A powerful suite of technologies and methods is employed to deliver a highly automated and robust backup. This suite of technologies is run by highly certified experts to ensure the data, designs and applications are protected. The back-up strategy is weekly full back-up and daily differentials back-up, on a 2 week rotation. Backups would be stored off-site at Iron Mountain data storage facility.
Recovery Models
In addition to overnight backups, the SQL database can be set to FULL recovery model. This will allow a full restore of data up to any time period during the day. This type of restore allows for a fast restore of data if data loss or data corruption occurs during the day and the client does not wish to restore from a backup from the previous night.
Deep Monitoring
To deliver more responsive and robust monitoring solutions for performance monitoring and Benchmarking, sophisticated monitoring tools are used that include :
Platinum - a 24/7 monitoring service checking the availability of servers
HP Insight Manager
Mercury SiteScope - for URL and content monitoring
IP Patrol - for URL and site uptime monitoring.
Microsoft Operations Manager (MOM)
The monitoring devices alert manned Service Desks immediately for any issues affecting uptime that may include:
Hardware failures
Software irregularities
Website or application non response, or irregularity
Database irregularities
The alerts include internal monitoring, and outside-in monitoring devices (contracted external services that operate outside the hosting LAN. These alerts are then checked to ensure the alert is a real issue, and then escalated to an engineer for resolution.
Power Systems
The Data Centre gets power from commercial utility underground conduits with a 10 minute battery backup in the event of failure. Additionally, there are multiple diesel generators with full-load capability, so if there was a significant power outage the Data Centre would still be able to function for another two days.
Routing
The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP4) is utilised for best case routing. Each packet is evaluated and sent over the best route possible.
Bandwidth Utilisation
The Data Centre's UK Network is currently approximately 20% capacity at peak times, which allows the system to accommodate even the largest spikes in traffic. As network utilisation reaches 30% Rackspace will automatically add more network capacity to ensure that we do not experience network degradation.
Bandwith Providers
A multi-provider strategy is employed to ensure that there is a fully redundant architecture, so should one of the providers fail, packets leaving the network are automatically redirected through another route via a different provider. Current network providers include Sprint, Verizon, Level 3, AboveNet, Tiscali, Cable and Wireless, Colt and LINX (The London Internet Exchange).
Technical Requirements
Q7 - Please confirm if your solution is able to be accessed using all the browsers listed in section 2.4 of `The Specification of Requirements' using either a PC or a Mac (where appropriate) without the need for any additional software.
Yes. The front-end of the system will support the following web browsers:
Browser |
Version |
Windows Internet Explorer |
6.0 |
Windows Internet Explorer |
7.0 |
Windows Mozilla Firefox |
2.0 |
Windows Mozilla Firefox |
3.0 |
Opera |
7.0-9.62 |
Safari |
1.2-3.1 |
Chrome |
0.2-0.4 |
Our track record is always to comply fully with new software releases. The front-end of the system should support the following web browsers but cannot be guaranteed. Some of these versions are still in beta, and beta versions cannot be supported as they are not officially released and the software may change drastically between a beta and a live version:
Browser |
Version |
Windows Internet Explorer |
8.0 |
Chrome |
0.4+ |
Note: the Netscape browser software is no longer supported and the recommendations by the developers of the browser is to use Firefox.
Administration areas will be available in the following browsers:
Browser |
Version |
Windows Internet Explorer |
6.0 |
Windows Internet Explorer |
7.0 |
Technical Requirements
Q8 How would you manage the potential integration with the media market solution (lot 2) within the ATS?
Our ATS systems are always designed on the basis that media agencies are able to interface with permission into our software to join up processes where needed. In order to manage an effective integration with the winner of Lot 2, Tribal will:
Build an effective working partnership with key players
Carry out onsite visits and review processes
Draft manuals and provide training
Provide ongoing support through the helpdesk
Assign a dedicated Tribal Account Manager with media experience to them
Carry out regular reviews and gather feedback.
However, we have also assumed (from the recruitment process map) that with this ATS system schools will have a choice to order media direct or through the Lot 2 provider. The unique advantage of this is that the take-up of the ATS should be higher as schools will have the choice of provider.
The system will also, of course, maintain full management information on the approach adopted by the schools so as to be able to detail the scope of service provided by the Lot 2 provider as well as media volumes.
How we will integrate with the Lot 2 provider
The system-enabled processes are detailed as below:
Having been through stages 1-4 of the generic recruitment process, schools will be in a position to make a decision as to their preferred external route to fill their vacancy. Typically, they would only look to undertake this once they have exhausted the ATS's talent pool search capabilities (filling from either internal applicants or directly from the talent database).
It is important to note that the school retains the right to deal with the media directly and does therefore not need to engage the recruitment advertising agency provider. The system will guide them and provide clear instructional text so that they are clear as to the steps and choices available to them.
In terms of the process, the technology can allow for online job board postings to be automatically fed through to job boards of their choice and/or will be able to automate the communication and workflow process with the recruitment advertising (and assessment service) agency providers. This means that the ATS system despatches emails and `triggers' that automatically go to the chosen providers for Lot 2 (and 3) based upon simple on-screen decisions made by the school.
The solution will offer and make available a comprehensive searchable job board's database which can be maintained by a system Super User. We can agree with the DCSF a list to appear on the system in the first instance. This will enable comprehensive search ability via Generalist and Niche job sites.
If, however, they want to deal with offline print media directly without the support of a recruitment advertising agency, this by nature will have to be done from outside the system. The solution will, however, offer and make available a comprehensive searchable media database which can be maintained by a system Super User. This will allow powerful search options via National, Local and Specialist Trade Press.
Although not fully detailed within the generic recruitment process map, we would recommend the following workflow within the ATS for making a final decision on which external recruitment route to take:
The school makes a decision whether they wish to deal directly or work with an external partner.
If they decide to deal directly with the media they will be given the options of:
Using job boards and print
Job boards only
Print only
They will then make their selections and input any additional information (e.g. PO numbers) and the chosen media will be notified of the order via an automated email trigger which contains all of the supporting documentation, invoicing information, logos etc.
The dialogue between the school and the media will then take place outside the system.
If the school decides to work with an external partner they will be given the following choices:
Recruitment Advertising and Assessment Selection Services
Recruitment Advertising Only
Assessment and Selection Services Only
They will then make their selections and input any additional information (e.g. PO numbers) and the chosen media will be notified of the order via an automated email trigger which contains all of the supporting documentation, invoicing information, logos etc.
As an example, if recruitment advertising services are selected, the chosen agency representative that is assigned the order will be able to view and download the vacancy request and see all of the vacancy information. The main action of an agency user will be to issue a proposal/media schedule/ad guidelines/creative advert examples/quote. This will be done by the agency user uploading the proposal as a file (e.g. PDF)
An agency user will be able to perform two actions on a vacancy item:
Add comments and send back to the school administrator that created the item.
This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the school administrator to inform them that the agency has added comments, requesting additional information.
The school administrator will then be able to read the comments and respond back to the agency. A comments field will be available for the school administrator to enter additional information and send to the agency. This will trigger an email to the agency user.
This process can be repeated as many times as required. The system will store and display all comments in a history log.
Upload a proposal document and send to the school administrator that created the item.
This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the school administrator to inform them that the agency has uploaded a proposal document for approval.
The school administrator will be able to download the proposal and see any comments added by the agency user. If the administrator feels further work is required then theywill be able to send back to the agency user for clarification or for changes to be made. The school administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Note: The above process will be carried out for each agency (advertising and/or recruitment) that was selected by the school administrator at the start of the process.
Once the proposal(s) have been received and the school administrator is happy with the documents provided, they will need to provide authorisation that they want to proceed..
The school administrator will need to enter a PO and this will trigger an email to the agency user(s) as confirmation to proceed with placing the order.
As and when the advertisements that are to appear within the media (whether it's online job boards, national or local press) the final agreed proof will also be uploaded onto the system so that the school is able to see the advert that has been placed in the media at any time in the future via the ATS.
Technical Requirements
Q9. How would you manage the potential integration of the assessment solution (lot 3) within the ATS?
Our ATS systems are always designed on the basis that recruitment agencies are able to interface with permission into our software to join up processes where needed. In order to manage an effective integration with the winner of Lot 3, Tribal will:
Build an effective working partnership with key players
Carry out onsite visits and review processes
Draft manuals and provide training
Provide ongoing support through the helpdesk
Assign a dedicated Tribal Account Manager with assessment experience to them
Carry out regular reviews and gather feedback.
The system will also, of course, maintain full management information on the approach adopted by the schools so as to be able to detail the scope of service provided by the Lot 3 provider as well as assessment volumes.
How we will integrate with the Lot 3 provider
Tribal has a pedigree and unrivalled reputation for the provision of assessment design and support for the public sector as a whole. Our experience ranges from the provision of selection and assessment and job matching services for the executive and senior interim management marketplace through to assessment centre design and volume shortlisting and application sifting expertise. Tribal's staff have been providing support to local authorities, schools, academies, governing bodies and head teachers nationally for the last seven years. Together with this experience we have a wealth of understanding surrounding the schools sector and of job roles at all levels within primary, secondary, special needs and academies. We are contracted to deliver on behalf of the DCFS support to Keys to Success schools for the Greater Manchester Challenge programme.
This breadth of work ensures that Tribal's education domain expertise is constantly refreshed and that we have an understanding of the latest government strategies. This enables us to support clients with strategic planning for the implementation of these strategies.
Our mainstream education portfolio is extremely complex and covers the following areas of activity:
School improvement
Support for national challenge schools on the Greater Manchester Challenge programme and support schools and Local Authorities across the Country
Leadership development opportunities for school governors and senior managers
Interim management in schools, colleges and local authorities
School inspection (we are the largest RISP with two regions contracted to OfSTED)
Academies (currently 10 projects contracted with the Academies Delivery Unit and seven successfully completed;
Schools, colleges and LA based professional development
Early Years and Children's Centres.
Tribal colleagues are in contact with large numbers of schools and Local Authority colleagues on a regular basis and have built ongoing relationships through their work. We will use this wider team as a network of customer-facing colleagues to ensure that initial, perhaps tentative enquiries can be encouraged and directed towards specialist teams.
We also have an in-depth understanding of online assessment provision and have long-standing relationships with the world's largest providers of online assessment tools. Tribal's in-house assessment teams have a wealth of experience in delivering assessment solutions as well as integrating online assessment tests and tools into recruitment processes and automated recruitment systems. As a result of this combined experience we believe we are ideally placed to advise and implement the best joined- up solution for the DCSF package.
Tribal understands and appreciates that this needs to be considered equally from a candidate's perspective as well as the school's, so that the assessment solution fits and works effectively within the systems workflow processes. Taking these `one at a time', here is a summary of how the processes will work:
Candidate's perspective
The candidate will have already been through pre-screening and applied online through the ATS.
The next communication from the ATS to the applicant will be a regret email or letter to inform them that they are being progressed to interview stage.
It will be this letter or email progressing the applicant to the next stage that will be fundamentally influenced in content as a result of the school choosing to employ assessment support or not.
This letter, for example, may contain instructions surrounding a two stage interview process, a single stage interview process, an assessment centre event or details and instructions around varying online psychometric tests. The nature of which of these options it may be is determined through the consultation with the school at the time the recruitment process commences. Indeed, it may be agreed that communications from the candidate are channelled to the supporting consultant rather than the school in the first instance. A full suite of template letters will be created and agreed upon during the configuration stage of the ATS build, to be incorporated within the generic recruitment process depending on what decisions are made.
With regards to the incorporation of any online psychometric tests, the candidate will receive an auto email generated from the ATS providing them with username entry details and destination URL to the test being used. So if this is the SHL OPQ32 or 16PF tests they will be directed through to the appropriate place to complete them within the secure SHL website. As and when they complete the test, they are informed online that the test process is complete and they are thanked for their time. Unbeknown to them as and when they complete the test, their results are forwarded back to the recruitment originator.
Whether interviews or an assessment centre are employed, full details surrounding the following are provided to the applicant and they are asked to confirm their attendance at their preferred/agreed time online via the ATS. Information sent includes:
Covering letter with full details of the event
Map
Any instructions for prior preparation for on-the-day presentations
Details of any required identification/information
Any forms for completion (e.g. medical)
Unbeknown to the candidate, the system will be updated on the outcomes from the assessment events involved. Subject to these outcomes, the next communications received by the applicant will either be regret following assessment (which will allow for feedback to be ascertained by the applicant through a phone call outside the system) or the receipt of a conditional offer letter. Following acceptance and successful passing of all employment checks which are noted onto the system, the ATS will then send confirmation of an unconditional job offer which should contain a start date and other details.
From the School's Perspective
Once a school has exhausted routes 1, 2 and 3 of the generic recruitment process, it will be given a choice as to whether to include assessment solutions within its external recruitment strategy. Clear guidance around the options available on this will be provided by the ATS. To summarise the options available are:
Candidate Search, Attraction and Assessment
Candidate Search and Attraction
Candidate Search and Assessment
Candidate Attraction and Assessment
Candidate Assessment
Candidate Search
Candidate Attraction
Candidate Search
The process is as follows:
The school will be requested to pick which services it requires from the Lot 3 provider.
Once selected, the external partner will be sent an email trigger informing them that their services are required.
A dialogue will then need to take place between the school and the external partner as to what services are required and their associated costs. This will take place outside the ATS.
On agreement, the external partner can be associated with the job.
Candidate Attraction
The process is as follows:
The school will be requested to pick which services it requires from the Lot 3 provider.
Once selected, the external partner will be sent an email trigger informing them that their services are required.
A dialogue will then need to take place between the school and the external partner as to what services are required and their associated costs. This will take place outside the ATS.
On agreement, the external partner can be associated with the job.
Candidate Assessment
The process is as follows:
The school will be requested to pick which services it requires from the Lot 3 provider.
Once selected, the external partner will be sent an email trigger informing them that their services are required.
A dialogue will then need to take place between the school and the external partner as to what services are required and their associated costs. This will take place outside the ATS.
On agreement, the external partner can be associated with the job.
The relevant test will be assigned to the ATS. It is worth noting that this can only be set by admin users that have the appropriate user type.
Further detail around the actual process of assessment can be viewed below:
Job Settings
Select Tests
The tests available to the system will be listed and the admin user will need to select at least one test for candidates to complete.
Select Order Users
This control will list all admin users that have the permission levels of 2, 3 or 4.
These users will only have permission to send requests for assessments to take place
See Results Users
This control will list all admin users that have the permission levels of 3 or 4.
These users will only have permission to see results of assessments
Assessment Log
All assessments made from the ATS will be stored in a log. The log will have three sub sections:
Assessments Requested
This will list all assessments that have been requested (these will not include assessments that have had results returned, or assessments that have been flagged as errors)
Assessment Results Returned
This will list all assessments that have had results returned
Assessment Errors
This will list assessments that have tried to be sent but not been successful
A button will be available for the assessment request to be re-sent
As well as the recruitment service provider ATS Super Users will also have access to this log.
If jobs have been set to use online assessment then the proposed method for recruitment systems to forward candidates for online assessment can be in one of two ways:
Workflow
If online assessments are selected for the job then the actual process around sending and interpreting online assessment results will take place at a specific point within the applicant workflow. The two specific stages which will be included will allow each candidate to be sent for online assessment and for the interpreting of results. The two stages will be:
Send for Assessment
Interpret Results
The Send for Assessment stage will precede the Interpret Results stage.
RPS - Recruitment Package System
ACS - Assessment Centre System
The following details the functionality related with integrating with the proposed Online Assessment Centre. Please note this information is not concrete and is subject to change, including the cost. The specification for this is not yet finalised.
Once the Online Assessment Centre specification document is complete, it will be the overriding document.
User Permissions
New user permissions will be available to be set on admin user accounts within the RPS. An account can be set with an assessment level. The assessment level will determine what action the user can perform in terms of assessments. By default an admin user can perform no action in terms of assessments. An admin account will need to be set with a level to be able to perform an action in terms of assessments.
The following levels will be available:
Level 1
Admin Contact
Cannot request tests
Cannot see results
Performs no logical function within the RPS
Level 2
Order level A tests
Order level B tests
Cannot see results
Level 3
Order level A tests
Order level B tests
Can see level A results
Can see level B results
Can interpret level A results - Performs no logical function within the RPS
Cannot interpret level B results - Performs no logical function within the
RPS
Level 4
Order level A tests
Order level B tests
Can see level A results
Can see level B results
Can interpret level A results - Performs no logical function within the RPS
Can interpret level B results - Performs no logical function within the RPS
Job Settings
A new setting will be added to the job edit page. This new setting will determine if online assessments can be used for candidates that apply. This can only be set by admin users that have a level 2, level 3 or level 4 permission.
Once a job has been set to use assessments then the following actions will need to occur:
Select Tests
The tests available to the system will be listed and the admin user will need to select at least one test for candidates to complete.
Select Order Users
This control will list all admin users that have the permission levels of 2, 3 or 4.
These users will only have permission to send requests for assessments to take place
See Results Users
This control will list all admin users that have the permission levels of 3 or 4.
These users will only have permission to see results of assessments
Assessment Log
All assessments made from the RPS will be stored in a log. The log will have three sub sections:
Assessments Requested
This will list all assessments that have been requested (these will not include assessments that have had results returned, or assessments that have been flagged as errors)
Assessment Results Returned
This will list all assessments that have had results returned
Assessment Errors
Will list assessments that have tried to be sent but not been successful
A button will be available for the assessment request to be re-sent
RPS Super Users will have access to this log.
If jobs have been set to use online assessment then the proposed method for recruitment systems to forward candidates for online assessment can be in one of two ways:
Workflow (Assessment Stages)
This will be a module available within the variable workflow.
If the system employs workflow, then two stages will need to be added that will allow each candidate to be sent for online assessment and for the interpreting of results. The two stages will be:
Send for Assessment
Interpret Results
The Send for Assessment stage will need to precede the Interpret Results stage.
Send for Assessment Stage
Only users that have been selected as the Order Users on the vacancy can perform this action
Will list all candidates at this stage.
Each candidate will have a button to send the candidate for assessments
This will create assessment requests and move the candidate to the next stage
If more than one test is applied to the job then an assessment will be created for each test
Each candidate will have a button to bypass the sending of assessments
This will move the candidate to the next stage without creating any assessments
If more than one test is applied to the job then this button will bypass all tests
Interpret Results
Only users that have been selected as the See Results Users on the vacancy can perform this action
Will list all candidates at this stage
A link per candidate will display a form that will list each test applied to the job
Each test will have a link or links to view the results of the test
These results will be opened in a new window
For each test the user will have a comments field and a dropdown to score the candidate on that test
If a test has not been completed (Results not returned) then this message will be displayed
Links to results of a test will only be available to users that have the level to view the results for that type of test. (i.e. Type A and B tests)
The scoring of tests is only done once, so if the job has more than one See Results user then this process is not repeated for each user. Only one comment and score can be set per test.
Once comments and scores have been set on a candidate then the candidate can be moved to the next stage
If a test has not been completed then this will need to be entered in the comments field for the test.
Technical Requirements
Q10 - Is there anything that has been listed in `Technical Requirements' that you would not be able to provide?
No. We confirm that there is nothing listed within `Technical Requirements' that we would not be able to provide.
Data Security Requirements
Q1. Please outline and confirm your plans for a secure IT infrastructure to manage our data security requirements?
Certification
Tribal is currently working toward ISO 27001 certification, with expected completed in May 2009, and compliance on ISO27002.
Access Control
To mitigate the potential for data security issues, we limit access to data and systems so that our employees and contracted parties can only access those areas which are necessary for the performance of their duties.
Physical Access to Servers
The Data Centre employs multiple levels of security to ensure that physical access to server hardware (routers, switches and servers) is strictly limited to Database Centre Engineers only. The security measures include:
No Public Access
24/7 Video Surveillance
24/7 On-Site Security Personnel
Biometric Security
Pass Cards.
Physical Access to office locations
The barriers to access areas that house Development and Support teams include
proximity access cards
manned reception desk.
Logical Access to Application
Access to the System Application is via approval process. The Project Manager will oversee any initial provision of access logins to the Application, until the system goes live, then this responsibility will pass to the Client. Access to the data is limited according to the access rights set for each specific user login or user type.
Logical Access to Database
Access to the application is via approval process, and is granted for Analyst, Developer and Database Engineers only. This is provided by secure VPN, or within firewall only.
Hardware Platform segmentation
The hosting platform infrastructure is separated into:
a Demilitarized Zone for webservers where users access the application
a Private Segment for the Fibre SAN network and Database Cluster for storage of data.
Access to the Private Segment is limited by the firewall, so users can only access the data they require through the Application and their login. Access directly to the Private Segment needs to be authorised by the Tribal Senior Account Manager, and this is through secure VPN access only.
Data Security Requirements
Q2. What policies and practices will you adopt to ensure that there is an absolute minimal risk of any data breaches occurring within your organisation or any third parties who you may rely on to support the service?
Detail regarding Tribal policies on data security can be found in the “Tribal IT and Information Security Policy” at the end of this document.
Data Security
Tribal ensures that all staff required to access the Personal Data stored on the system are informed of the confidential nature of the Personal Data.
Tribal provide training for staff and contractors employed or engaged in the provision of the Services in compliance with the Security Policy and Security Plan. Staff contracts require staff to adopt Company policies.
Tribal mandates that under no circumstance should staff publish, disclose or divulge any of the Personal Data to any third party unless directed in writing to do so by the Client.
Tribal will obtain prior written consent from the Client if there is a requirement to transfer the Personal Data to any Sub-contractors or Affiliates for the provision of the Services;
Portable storage devices are required to be encrypted to a standard of at least FIPS 140-2 or equivalent (eg PGP products).
Data Management
Any requirements to store, copy, disclose, or use Client Data, will be requested in from the Client, except as necessary for the performance of obligations under the Agreement.
Within eRecruitment systems, the data held in the database is owned by the Client. At any time the Client can obtain access to this data via their supplied user logins to the eRecruitment system.
Preserving the integrity of Data, and preventing the corruption or loss of Client Data, is of utmost importance to Tribal. The following include the methods for ensuring integrity and prevention of corruption or data loss:
Secure back-ups of Data are undertaken on a daily basis, and up-to-date back-ups are stored off-site. Restoration of the data onto the eRecruitment system can be performed following approval of the Client
If at any time Tribal staff suspect or have reason to believe that the Data has or may become corrupted, lost or sufficiently degraded in any way for any reason, then the Client will be notified immediately and informed of the remedial action recommended
Data is hosted on hardware that resides within the European Economic Area. Currently all server hosting is maintained within the UK
Occasionally data may need to be transferred from one system or file to another. Transfer of digital personal data that occurs outside of the secure eRecruitment system, will be done via secure transfer only eg: Secure FTP or Encrypted Attachments, and only following approval from the client.
Vetting of staff
Vetting of staff ensure Tribal take reasonable steps to ensure the reliability of any staff who have access to the Personal Data.
Vetting of staff (permanent, contract and temporary) includes screening checks for:
Minimum of 2 verified references
Proactive checking of accuracy and completeness of CVs
Positive confirmation of academic and professional qualifications
Positive ID check (sight of passport, identify card)
Psychometric profiling and technical assessments (for specific positions).
Confidentiality agreements are used as part of the employment agreement.
New staff are provided induction training, and this includes (amongst other items) IT, security, backup and handling of personal data policies and procedures. Regular updates on Information Security is provided through meetings and training sessions.
Access Control
To mitigate the potential for data security issues, we limit access to data and systems so that our employees and contracted parties can only access those areas which are necessary for the performance of their duties.
eRecruitment system - Roles and Responsibilities:
Role |
Responsibilities |
Physical Access to Servers |
Logical Access to Application |
Logical Access to Database (via VPN) |
Project Manager |
Implementation, change control, and ongoing management of system and relationship with client. |
No |
Yes |
No |
Service Desk Personnel |
Receipt, management, and escalation of incidents. |
No |
Yes |
No |
Analyst |
Technical oversight of Application Code, management of actions of Development team, and main contact between Project Manager and Development team. |
No |
Yes |
Yes |
Developer |
Writes, maintains, and modifies application code for the systems, in accordance with guidance from Analyst. |
No |
Yes |
Yes |
Quality Assurance |
Manages the Quality Assurance process for new code, and changes to application code. |
No |
Yes |
No |
Database Engineer |
Manages the operating platform and database that supports the Application. |
No |
No |
Yes |
Data Centre Operations Engineer |
Manages the hardware assets that host the operating platform, database and application. |
Yes |
No |
No |
Physical Access to Servers
The Data Centre employs multiple levels of security to ensure that physical access to server hardware (routers, switches and servers) is strictly limited to Database Centre Engineers only. The security measures include:
No Public Access
24/7 Video Surveillance
24/7 On-Site Security Personnel
Biometric Security
Pass Cards.
Physical Access to office locations
The barriers to access areas that house Development and Support teams include:
proximity access cards
manned reception desk.
Logical Access to Application
Access to the System Application is via approval process. The Project Manager will oversee any initial provision of access logins to the Application, until the system goes live, then this responsibility will pass to the Client.
Logical Access to Database
Access to the application is via approval process, and is granted for Analyst, Developer, and Database Engineers only. This is provided by secure VPN, or within firewall only.
Access to Data and Systems
Access rights are only given to staff / contractors who needs the information for them to perform their work. This “need-to-know” principle is fundamental to good security.
Line managers ensure that all new staff are given the appropriate access to data and systems for their role, and that staff have the appropriate clearances for their role (e.g. an enhanced CRB check if needed).
Managers also ensure, when staff leave their team, leave the organisation, or are absent for a prolonged period of time (e.g. on maternity leave or a career break), that:
Network accounts and access arrangements are withdrawn
Documents and equipment are securely returned.
Passwords
Password protection is an essential part of eRecruitment system security. Staff are required to follow the Password policy when setting the password and not to reveal it to anyone (ie 8 characters with a mixture of upper & lower case letters, and numbers). Sharing of password or user accounts is not allowed under any circumstances.
In eRecruitment systems, passwords are required to comply with the password policy. The passwords for access to the admin areas of the eRecruitment systems, is not able to be viewed by other administrators logged into the system.
(Supporting Document)
Tribal IT and Information Security Policy
Introduction
Background
This policy document relates to the use and monitoring of all Tribal Group IT infrastructure and communication systems (IT assets). It is intended to promote a legal, safe and secure working environment for all Tribal employees and associates.
This document replaces all existing end user IT policies in circulation within Tribal businesses.
This document will be subject to version control and regular review.
Tribal Group plc is referred to as `the Company' in this policy.
Provision of IT Services
The IT services provided to Tribal employees and associates may vary according to business stream and role. For example, some associates may be permitted to access only `webmail' and Sharepoint. If in doubt, please contact the IT Helpdesk.
The provision of IT support in some business streams may be outsourced to a third-party. However, all Tribal employees and associates are expected to comply with this IT End User Policy.
Responsibilities
Legal Responsibilities
Computing resources may only be used for legal purposes. Examples of illegal use include, but are not limited to, the following:
Attempting to alter or damage computer equipment, software configurations, or files belonging to the Company, other users, or external networks
Attempting unauthorised entry to the Company network or external networks
Intentional or negligent propagation of computer viruses
Violation of copyright or communications laws
Violation of software license agreements
Transmission of communication which would be considered defamatory
Transmission of information which would be considered confidential relating to the Company's business or that of its customers to any third-party
Accessing or attempting to access material which is illegal or inappropriate, including pornographic images
Ethical Responsibilities:
Computing resources must be used in accordance with the ethical standards of the Company. Examples of unethical use (some of which may also have legal consequences) include, but are not limited to, the following:
Violation of computer system security
Unauthorised use of computer accounts, access codes, or network identification numbers assigned to others
Use of computer communications facilities in ways that tie-up, interfere with, or impede computer use of others
Violation of external networks regulations and policies
Violation of another user's privacy
Unauthorised Use
The Company supplied Internet and email services are available for communication on matters directly concerned with the business. Although reasonable personal use is acceptable this should be restricted to times of the day when work demands are light or during lunch. At no time may personal use take priority over business use.
Third-parties will only be permitted access to the network for legitimate purposes (e.g. provision of remote support) and all requests for such access must be submitted via the IT Help Desk.
Under no circumstances may the Company's electronic communications systems be used for sending, accessing, receiving or storing any material (text or pictures) in breach of copyright, of a potentially offensive, discriminatory, harassing, threatening, obscene, political, illegal or defamatory nature, for the purposes of business (other than the Company's business), for chain letters, for spreading gossip or information which is untrue or malicious, or for any purpose that is illegal or against the Company's policies or contrary to the Company's interests.
You must not under any circumstances use Company equipment or networks for the following;
Online gambling (including National Lottery or similar online gaming).
Accessing pornography of any description.
Downloading or distribution of copyright material or software.
Unauthorised passing on of Company confidential information of any description to external or inappropriate internal sources.
Passing on of client information to inappropriate sources.
Non-work related MSN and `chatting'.
Non-work related `blogging'
Playing computer games in work-time.
Monitoring Internet Access
The Company will monitor and record access to internet web sites by staff and associates using automated monitoring tools. Deliberate attempts to access web sites which contain explicit, illegal or other inappropriate materials will be deemed as unauthorised and will lead to consequent disciplinary action. The Company reserves the right to block access to sites which are considered inappropriate, or for which there is evidence of significant misuse (e.g. social networking, online auction or sports news sites). Automated blocks based on the recommendations of the Internet Watch Foundation (IWF) will also be applied and the lists updated frequently by the monitoring tools.
From time-to-time the Company may limit or block the use of certain classes of software application (e.g. internet telephony or streaming radio) in order to maintain levels of network service.
Data collected by automated monitoring tools will be retained for no longer than 12 months and will not be disclosed to any third-parties except as required by law. Users of the Company's Internet services understand and accept that their use of the Internet is being monitored and that data relating to the sites they have visited will be retained within a central database, access to which will be strictly controlled. Details of specific Internet activity will only be divulged to third parties as part of an ongoing and appropriately authorised investigation, at the request of HR.
You should be aware that merely deleting information may not remove it from the system and deleted material may still be reviewed by the Company and/or disclosed to third parties.
Email (Acceptable Use) Policy
General Principles
Use of email by Company employees is permitted and encouraged where such use is suitable for business purposes and supports the goals and objectives of the Company and its business units. Email is to be used in a manner that is consistent with the Company's standards of business conduct and as part of the normal execution of an employee's job responsibilities.
Tribal Group email accounts are provided for all employees and associates. All business communications must be carried out using the Company's email system and not through personal email accounts. Only in very exceptional circumstances will email accounts in the Tribal email system be configured to forward email to personal email accounts.
Company email accounts are to be used for Company business. Limited personal use is considered acceptable providing it complies with this policy and that it does not interfere with an employee's ability to perform his/her normal duties.
The Company will directly access staff email accounts in the pursuit of an appropriately authorised legal or disciplinary investigation.
Use of email may be subject to monitoring for security and/or network management reasons. Users may also be subject to limitations on their use of such resources.
Email is not a secure transmission medium. Contents of emails may be intercepted and read by third parties. For this reason, confidential or particularly sensitive information must not be sent by email unless in an appropriately password protected document.
The distribution of any information through the Company's network is subject to the scrutiny of the Company. The Company reserves the right to determine the suitability of this information.
All email messages are treated as potential corporate messages of the organisation and may be archived for future retrieval.
• The Company reserves the right to redirect the email of staff that have left for legitimate business purposes. Users are responsible for ensuring personal emails are stopped.
The Company reserves the right to access the email of absent staff in order to ensure the smooth running of the business. Any e-mails that are clearly personal will not be opened unless there is a valid and defined reason for doing so.
Unacceptable Use or behaviour:
The following is list of examples of behaviour which are normally regarded as unacceptable. This list is not exhaustive.
Users may not:
Solicit emails that are unrelated to business activities or for personal gain
Send or receive any material that is obscene or defamatory or which is intended to or could have the impact of annoying, harassing or intimidating another person
Represent personal opinions as those of the Company
Upload, download or otherwise transmit commercial software or any copyrighted materials belonging to parties outside of the Company, or the Company itself, without the express permission of the relevant party or otherwise than as authorised to do so in the course of your work
Reveal or publicise confidential or proprietary information which includes, but is not limited to financial information, databases and the information contained therein, computer network access codes, customer information and business relationships
Send unsolicited bulk email (SPAM) from Tribal's email servers except as authorised to do so in the course of your work
Send email through any external email system using a tribalgroup.co.uk reply-to address (address spoofing)
Waste time on non-Company business
Users should:
Keep emails brief and use meaningful subject lines
Re-read messages before sending to check for clarity and to make sure that they contain nothing which will embarrass the organisation or make it liable
Understand how to use -and don't mismanage -CC and BCC: only CC in people that really need to receive the email. In particular the regular CC in of line managers should be avoided
Email links to documents stored on Sharepoint or network drives wherever possible instead of sending documents as attachments
Use file compression techniques for large documents or send them using an alternative method
Archive effectively -use folders and delete any messages you no longer need
Don't overuse the "URGENT" flag as it will lose its value
Never reply to spam
E-mail must not be used for sending messages that are sensitive, emotional or contain potentially offensive content.
Take care in drafting emails, taking into account any form of discrimination, harassment, Company representation, defamation or Data Protection issues.
Remember that Emails are a form of corporate communication and therefore should be drafted with the same care as letters.
Be careful when replying to emails previously sent to a group.
Ensure your terminal is locked or logged out when leaving your desk; a malicious user could send messages in your name.
Avoid 'Mail Storms' -long discussions sent to a distribution list -consider verbal communication or use a bulletin board.
Monitoring
The Company accepts that the use of email is an extremely valuable business tool. However misuse of such a facility can have a detrimental effect on other users and potentially the Company's public profile. As a result;
The Company maintains the right to access user email accounts as part of an appropriately authorised investigation
The specific content of any transactions will not be monitored unless there is a suspicion of improper use
The Company further retains the right to monitor and record the flow of all incoming and outgoing email for its legitimate purposes.
The Company will regularly review the size of user mailboxes and may request that individuals archive content to ensure availability and performance of the email service for all users.
Data collected by automated monitoring tools will not be disclosed to any third-parties except as required by law. Users of the Company's email services understand and accept that their use of email is being monitored and that data relating to email will be retained within a central database, access to which will be strictly controlled. Details of specific email activity will only be divulged to third parties as part of an ongoing and appropriately authorised investigation, at the request of HR.
You should be aware that merely deleting information may not remove it from the system and deleted material may still be reviewed by the Company and/or disclosed to third parties.
Legal use of software
Tribal Group partners with the Federation Against Software Theft (FAST) and takes it's legal responsibilities to ensure that all software is appropriately licensed very seriously.
You may not download any software from the Internet onto your Company computer. All software must be purchased by the IT department on your behalf and the original media must be catalogued and retained by them. The IT department reserves the right to uninstall any software which contravenes any element of the IT acceptable use and security policy, or which has not been appropriately obtained and licensed.
All Tribal computers are subject to regular automated software audits to ensure compliance with this policy.
If you believe you require software to perform your duties which is not on your computer, please contact the IT Help Desk in the first instance who will be able to tell you whether this software is authorised and can, with your line manager's approval, make it available to you.
Use of IT equipment
A standard catalogue of IT equipment is maintained by the IT Help Desk. This offers the best value for money and all requests for IT equipment will be fulfilled from the catalogue unless a business unit director approves an alternative purchase.
It is the responsibility of each staff member using Company assets (IT equipment, mobile phones, etc), to ensure those assets' proper use and security, whether at home, at a client's premises, or in transit. Such assets are provided for the sole use of Tribal employees and may not be used by family members or other third parties. As with mobile phones, laptops may not be taken on holiday unless there is a business need and only with prior agreement from your relevant Company Director. Should this authorisation be given then the laptop / mobile if lost or stolen will be replaced at company cost.
To comply with our insurance requirements, when Company assets are left unattended in a vehicle, they must be stored in the boot. Company assets may not be left overnight in a vehicle. Laptop computers must not be left unsecured in any office overnight.
Mobile telephones and 3G Mobile Data
Mobile telephones and 3G modems, where provided, are intended for business use. Moderate personal use is permitted, but itemised telephone bills are regularly analysed and Tribal reserves the right to charge individuals for excessive personal use.
Mobile phones must be PIN-protected to reduce the risk of unauthorised use.
Where mobile email devices are supplied, these must have a PIN set to lock the device after 5 minutes of inactivity to protect the user's email privacy.
Mobile email devices and 3G modems have a monthly data limit (currently 100MB for email devices and 5GB for 3G modems). Individual usage will be monitored, and excessive use may result in temporary suspension of service.
You should be conscious of the significantly higher cost of making or receiving calls and/or accessing email or the Internet over cellular networks when overseas. Mobile email devices default to manual synchronisation when `roaming' and this setting MUST not be changed.
Information Security
Our information and the IT systems that support it are important business assets. The availability, integrity and confidentiality of information are essential if we are to maintain our competitive edge and respected Company image.
All information and data relating to Tribal business or the business of any Tribal customer is the property of the Company. Unauthorised duplication, transmission or disclosure is prohibited.
Tribal employees and associates must observe the following security measures:
Ensure that you have Antivirus Software and that it is kept up to date. Tribal-supplied AV software is configured to update whenever the PC is connected to the Internet.
Do not open e-mails from an unknown source
Do not open attachments you are not expecting
Ensure you understand the nature of any sensitive data you may have to work with and that you protect such data at all times from loss or unauthorised disclosure (see below)
Use effective passwords (see below)
Do not disclose your password to anyone other than a Tribal IT support analyst, and then only if this is necessary for the resolution of a problem. If you have disclosed your password, change it at the next convenient opportunity.
Ensure that your latest windows updates have been applied from the Windows Update site. Your PC should be set to automatically check for and apply updates daily. If you need assistance configuring Windows Update, please contact the IT Helpdesk.
Either set a password-protected screen saver or ensure that you lock your PC using the <Windows><L> key combination whenever you leave your computer, even briefly.
Power off your equipment at the end of the working day or before travelling with a laptop
Protecting sensitive personal or commercial data
The Cabinet Office has issued guidelines to all Government departments and contractors for the minimum protection of sensitive personal data which is held on `removable media' including laptop computers, handheld computers, USB memory devices and CD or DVD media. Tribal's guidelines extend further to include sensitive commercial data relating to Tribal's businesses and those of our customers.
A working definition of sensitive personal data, as defined by CESG, is:
• one or more pieces of information which can be used to identify an individual, combined with information about that individual which, if disclosed, is likely to cause harm or distress, or
• Any source of information about 1,000 or more identifiable individuals, other than information sourced from the public domain
A working definition of sensitive commercial data is:
Information whose disclosure or loss would be likely to:
Cause loss of reputation for an individual citizen or organisation
Result in undermined confidence in the service provider generally
Cause prolonged distress for an individual citizen, or short-term distress for many citizens
The principles are as follows:
Sensitive client information should be processed on the client IT infrastructure where possible.
If you are required to work with sensitive data on behalf of a client, where possible use their IT equipment on the client site and avoid transferring that data to a Tribal laptop. Where Tribal infrastructure has to be used avoid putting sensitive data onto removable media.
The best option is to access data from a computer on a protected site (i.e. in a Tribal office).
Second best is secure remote access to protected data sets, so that data can be reviewed or amended without being permanently stored on the remote computer. This might be data stored on a Sharepoint site accessed over a secure network connection (e.g. VPN). In this case the data may be `opened' from and `saved' to the Sharepoint site, but must not be copied or downloaded to the computer at any stage.
Third best is secured transfer of information to a remote computer at another Tribal office on which it will be permanently stored. In this case, the file transfer must be made using an encrypted transport mechanism (e.g. VPN, Secure FTP or SSL protected connection).
Where Removable Media cannot be avoided, use must be minimised and information protected to at least an approved commercial standard.
Make sure that the client's security policies permit the data to be taken outside client premises.
Check with the client the local rules and regulations with regard to data storage and data protection. Where possible ask the client or client IT department to prepare the portable media according to their security standards.
Examples of removable media include laptops, smartphones, removable discs, CDs/DVDs and USB memory sticks (not an exhaustive list).
The information transferred to removable media should be the minimum necessary to achieve the business purpose, both in terms of the numbers of people covered by the information and the scope of the information held about them; and all removable media containing protected personal data must be encrypted to a standard of at least FIPS 140-2 or equivalent, in addition to being protected by a strong authentication mechanism such as a password. It is not sufficient to password-protect Word or Excel documents using the tools supplied in Microsoft Office. Approved encryption software (PGP Desktop) is available for Tribal employees for installation on Tribal IT equipment. Managing Directors employing Associates are responsible for ensuring that the Associates' IT equipment meets these requirements, and are to enforce the policy that Associates are required to confirm such in writing at regular intervals not exceeding 6 months.
Sensitive data must under no circumstances be sent by email unless it has been encrypted using an approved product and a strong encryption password. The password must never be sent by email to the recipient.
All material that has been used for protected data must be subject to controlled disposal.
Paper records containing protected data must be destroyed by incineration or shredding
Electronic media that have been used to contain protected data must either be put beyond use through secure destruction or securely erased for re-use. Deleted data which has not been securely overwritten can be recovered using freely available tools in a matter of minutes.
Additional data security requirements
The requirement outlined above represent the minimum standards expected of all Tribal employees working with sensitive data. Access to some classes of data (for example information relating to offenders or vulnerable young people) may require additional measures (for example CRB checks) which will be communicated and monitored by individual business units.
Employees and associates must also observe any security policies or procedures required by Tribal clients.
Standard password characteristics
Passwords must:
Be memorable
Have at least 8 characters
Contain a mixture of upper and lower case and digits
Not be disclosed or written down by the password owner (subject to disciplinary action in the case of employed staff or contract termination in the case of contracted associates)
Not be included in scripts
Not be easily guessed - no children's, pet's or partner's names, or birthdays etc
Be changed regularly and at least every 3 months
These standards will be enforced for all users of Tribal Group IT services.
Personal data backup
Both staff and contracted associates are responsible for making sure that data stored on equipment issued to them is backed up regularly. Remote and home workers do not normally have access to centrally backed-up file servers and so must take additional responsibility for ensuring regular backups of data on laptop hard disk drives. IT will make available facilities and support to allow this to happen.
Office-based staff, and those remote workers who regularly visit a Tribal office, will be supplied, on request, with a private data area on the network into which they can save files. This area will be backed up automatically. Important documents must always be stored on devices that are subject to a regular backup regime.
Temporary staff
Temporary employees will be provided with restricted access sufficient to perform their duties. All temporary login accounts will have an expiry date which will need to be reset via the IT Help Desk should their period of employment be extended.
Home Workers
The Company will supply standard equipment from the IT catalogue to staff recognised by HR as `home workers'. In addition, subject to the approval of a business stream director, the Company will contribute to the costs of broadband and telephone services through normal expense submission. Local expense limits apply and staff should seek clarification of these from their line manager.
Employees will be responsible for arranging the installation of broadband and telephone services. The Company does not provide IT support for home broadband connections.
Leavers
All staff leaving the Company are obliged to return to IT all equipment and software issued by the Company so that the equipment may be catalogued and prepared for reuse. Equipment must not be passed on to any other employee.
Loss or damage to IT equipment
In the event that any item of IT equipment is lost, stolen or damaged, you must inform the IT Helpdesk at the earliest opportunity. Theft of any item must also be reported to the Police and you should obtain a Crime Reference Number which you must give to the Helpdesk.
Consequences of Non Compliance with this Policy
All instances and acts which are in breach of this policy will be taken seriously, will be investigated thoroughly and fairly in line with the Company's disciplinary procedure and may lead to disciplinary action up to and including dismissal.
Data Security Requirements
Q3 - What measures will your solution provide that will enable the DCSF to minimise the risk of data security breaches within the customer groups?
Each user is provided a login with user rights attached, that login can only view the data associated with that customer group.
Our application uses a structured hierarchical business layer object model. Since nearly every request and update of data in the system goes through this object model, we can embed logic near the bottom of the business logic to ensure that the same logic is used throughout the system.
This means that we only have to implement the restriction logic once for a system wide restriction of access based on the current users rights, which will prevent users from viewing data outside of their assigned scope. In addition, we have a QA process that will ensure this system is working properly before delivery.
Data Security Requirements
Q4 - What is your policy should any data breaches occur where your organisation is either directly or indirectly responsible?
An information incident occurs when data (whether on paper or electronic) is lost, stolen or released to those who are not authorised to see it.
Examples of this might include:
Loss of an company laptop or mobile email device
Unauthorised access to sensitive data in one of Tribal's eRecruitment systems
Unauthorised disclosure of Client candidate data, or access details to an eRecruitment system
Sending an e-mail to one or more incorrect addressees.
All staff have the responsibility for immediately reporting details of any information incidents, or potential information incidents. For eRecruitment systems this will be reported to the Tribal Service Desk.
The incident reporter should also inform their line manager of the information incident.
Any reasonable immediate actions that can minimise the impact should be completed by the individual, but these should only be undertaken with suitable line management approval.
The Service Desk will record any information incidents and will involve the relevant areas of the business to ensure that anyone affected by the breach is informed, and that measures are put in place to ensure similar incidents do not re-occur.
The information incident will be escalated to the Information Risk owner for that Business Unit, and then onto the Senior Information Risk Owner in Tribal.
The Service Desk team will be responsible for maintaining a central log of information incidents and will inform the relevant bodies of any incidents which are “notifiable” by the Cabinet Office.
Losses of data, or information breaches must be reported to the Client who in turn will report these incidents to the Information Commissioner. If Tribal is proven to be in breach of the conditions of the Data Protection Act, enforcement notices, fines and even prosecution can result.
Data Security Requirements
Q5 - How can you provide assurance that your organisation keeps itself aware of the latest trends and development in data security?
For systems improvement Tribal adopts the PDCA (Plan Do, Check, Act) model.
Plan - Establish Information Security policy, objectives, processes and procedures relevant to managing risk and improving information security to deliver results in accordance with an organization's overall policies and objectives.
Do (implement and operate) - Implement and operate the policy, controls, processes and procedures.
Check (monitor and review) - Assess and, where applicable, measure process performance against policy, objectives and practical experience and report the results to management for review.
Act (maintain and improve) - Take corrective and preventive actions, based on the results of the internal SMS audit and management review or other relevant information, to achieve continual improvement of the policy and procedures.
Tribal have recently engaged in the certification process for ISO 27001, and 27002 for eRecruitment systems projects.
Checks on the security of the eRecruitment systems and hosting platform include Penetration Testing (blackbox testing) and Application Testing (greybox testing), and external audit, and are undertaken by certified independent organisations. These checks occur on new systems developed, as well as current systems, and processes.
The feedback from these regular tests provide detail of the latest security risks, and ways they can be prevented through code development, practices and processes of the systems. This is a significant educational process, as the feedback is filtered through our development and project teams to ensure that the latest security measures are being utilised in the development and management of systems that Tribal build.
Tribal is constantly tendering and developing new systems for clients. This process alone requires that best practice standards are adopted to ensure the ability to win tenders to meet the requirements of our clients.
Data Security Requirements
Q6 - Please provide details of [how] you would address our Risk Management Requirements?
The following process is adopted for Risk Assessment:
identify their assets and those responsible for them
understand the vulnerability and likelihood of attack from various threats
value them in terms of the impact from loss or failure of confidentiality, integrity and availability
assign a proportionate level of protection to mitigate, and / or recover from, the potential loss or failure of those assets
This is seen as a continuous cycle of assessing and re-evaluating risk.
Self-assessment, central reporting, audit and review combine together to provide for a robust level of assurance, as well as assisting in developing and refining policy.
Tribal has appointed a Senior Information Risk Owner within the Company For each Business we have assigned an Information Risk Owner, and for each information asset have assigned an Information Asset Risk Owner.
A formal chain of alert for any information risk within Tribal has been formed. Risk alerts escalate to the Information Asset Risk Owner, to the Business Information Risk owner, to the Senior Information Risk Owner.
Initial Technical Risk Assessment will be conducted at start of the project, using HMG IA Standard No.1, then, due to the information being classed as Personal Data, will be followed by a Risk Assessment every quarter. The decisions will be recorded in the Risk Management and Accreditation Documentation Set (RMADS), using HMG IA Standard No.2.
Data Security Requirements
Q7 - Please provide a security plan to ensure that all of our data security requirements are managed in a compliant manner that is consistent with Data Protection Legislation, ISO 27001 and ISO 27002, HMG Security Standards (Level 2 for data record sets and Level 3 for aggregated data)?
Tribal is currently working toward ISO27001 certification and ISO 27002 compliance. A CESG Listed Advisor will be engaged to consult on achievement of this compliance.
Service Capability Requirements
Q1. Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Steps (Role Specification, Applicant Submission, Candidate Selection)
We are able to comply fully with the generic school recruitment process for all steps outlined. Further details can be viewed below.
Creating the Vacancy - Role Specification template Library
The system will enable a standard school user to log in securely to the ATS to create a new role specification.

The system will enable a standard school user (line manager/recruiter) to define a new role and pick from a template list as well as attach any other supporting information e.g. job description and person specification for the vacancy.
A library of role specifications can be created within the system (we believe that this is already work in progress for the implementation team). In addition to the national templates each local authority can create their own specification templates that will then will be available to all schools within the LA. The following will need to be entered for a job description:
LA Local Authority (dropdown of LAs) - this is only available to Super Users
Job Roles (select the role or roles that the description applies to)
Title
Description (WYSIWYG Control)
In order to make the process as user-friendly as possible to the customer group at the point of creating a vacancy, a control will be available to select a role specification from the library and associate it to the vacancy.
In terms of access levels, Super Users can create items in the library and assign to any/all LAs. An LA can only create items that will be available to their authority and all schools within it.
We envisage that there will be further questions/fields that will need to be completed by the standard school user in order to progress the vacancy (e.g. purchase order number etc). We expect these to be defined during the specification phase of the project. During implementation we will work with and advise you on best practice processes using e-recruitment systems. Tribal is able to share with the project team example `requisition workflows' so as to expedite this aspect of the build process.

Certain fields within this stage of the process can be defined as being mandatory and include validation in order to capture the correct information.
The user will be able to save and return to their requisition order an unlimited number of times prior to submitting it for authorisation.
On submission, the `standard school user' that has been defined as the `authoriser' user type for the role will receive an automated email trigger from the ATS alerting them that an action is required within the process.
A link will be available within the email which will take the authoriser to the log-in area of the admin area.
The authoriser will be required to log-in to the admin area in order to authorise the request to recruit. Once the user has logged in they will be taken directly to the information which requires their action/attention.
Applicant Submission
Pre-screening
Tribal's system can be set with client defined pre-qualification questions (pre-screening/killer questions with the ability to make them non-killer if required as highlighted in your question). Each question can have two or more answers (typically yes/no), one of which is specified to be the correct one. If a candidate provides an incorrect response then they are thanked for their interest, but are unable to proceed with the application. Up to five questions can be assigned to a post.
In addition to pre-screening questions, the system will enable you to add the short-listing criteria (essential and desirable questions from the person specification. These are questionswhich will embed themselves into the application form for the post being advertised.
The administrator is able to upload and assign an unlimited number of questions on a job-by-job basis. These questions and their responses will be used by the recruiter and the panel within the short-listing stage of workflow.
Applying online
When a candidate is viewing the information for a job vacancy, they will be able to follow the link to apply online.
Before being able to apply, candidates will be required to create a candidate account accessed via a username and password. At the point of registration the system will provide facilities to generate address details automatically from postcodes. This will be done by integrating with http://www.postcodeanywhere.co.uk. The DCSF will need to factor in the cost for `look ups' to this service. 125,000 look ups cost £2500.

The candidate will be able to create their own unique username and password. Should a candidate forget their password the system provides the facility to send them an automated password reminder by email.
Once they are logged in, they will be able to go through the application form page by page by using the breadcrumb for navigation.
Candidates are able to save partially completed application forms and then return to themlater to add further details at any stage throughout the completion process (as long as the job is still live). There is no limit to the number of times they can do this.
The user will also be able to add supporting attachments to the application form if required. In each container within the application form there is a 250,000 character limit.
The system will additionally provide facilities for the applicant to complete an equal opportunities form and medical questionnaire.
Once submitted, these sections will be kept confidential and therefore not available to the selection panel.
On the final page of the form the next button will be replaced by a “save and preview” button. This will show the complete application in the exact format to be shown to the contact for the position. It will feature a button at the end allowing the user to submit the application. A button will also be available for the candidate to take a print-friendly, hard copy version of their form.
Once the application has been submitted, the data will be published to a HTML document. This will be made available in the admin area and can also be sent as attachment to the applicant for printing.
An applicant may only edit an application form prior to its submission. Once submitted, the form is no longer editable.
Candidates will receive an acknowledgement email of receipt of online application forms submitted (only if their email is a valid one). We will also provide a print-friendly screen which users can print off as 'proof of receipt'. In both cases a reference number (application id) will be provided so that users can quote it if they have a query (this will be searchable within the site's admin area).
The applications themselves will be saved within the database and made available to the recruiter for whose job they applied.
Should the user wish to apply for another position, the information (their profile) contained/saved from their last submitted application will be available. The system will offer the facility to allow the applicant to overwrite the pre-populated information. Users will also be able to view all previous applications submitted/partially completed and use the information contained within for subsequent applications.
Adding Offline Applications
School and LA HR administrators will also have the ability to enter the details of `requests' for application packs electronically.
By doing so, the site will also generate a standardised `job pack' letter and pre-populate an application form with the job title and reference if required.
If returned, the system enables application forms to be added as a .doc or .RFT and attached to the application record. The attachment is viewable by all users who are authorised to see online applications. The recruiter will need to have the ability to scan hard copy application forms to either .doc or .PDF (which is our preference). The process of adding an application form attachment takes approximately 2-3 minutes and does require some manual intervention by either an HR administrator or an external response handling unit. Applications submitted via email can be added to the system; however the process cannot be fully automated and therefore will require some manual invention such as creating an applicant to assign the application too, entering personal details, information on where the applicant saw the post advertised and finally equal opportunities information.
Shortlisting through the ATS
The system can record the names, email addresses and ethnicity data of the Standard School Users (includes the recruiting chair and panel). This information will need to be added at the point of creating the user within the system. The user name for log-in purposes will be their email address. It will be possible for a School or LA to create an unlimited number of Standard School Users.
For short-listing to take place a number of essential and desirable criteria will need to be specified for a particular job - we envisage that this will form part of the role specification selected at the very start of the process. The system provides a facility to create, store and update a bank of these key competencies. If you have a competency framework in place already, this can be loaded into the system upfront. As you can see from the following screen grab, these questions can be embedded into the online application form for applicants to complete. At the shortlisting stage Standard School Users will have a clear view of the role specification questions and applicants' answers.
Standard School Users and Recruitment Services users will be able to score applicants separately against these criteria. The system will allow an unlimited number of users with the correct user permission type to score applicants separately, and will, on completion of all scoring activity, amalgamate scores and produce a statistical report to inform discussion on final short listing. With previous systems, once panel members have scored the hiring manager is also asked to score. Once they have scored, collective decisions can be made in bulk as to whether to accept or reject applicants.
It is important to note that we also offer a `collective scoring' method in case panel members decide to make a group decision. This has been factored into the final price.
The system allows recruiting managers to score applicants using M (Met) ,P (Partially Met) , F( Fully Met). The system will provide a method of ranking candidates to display those candidates who score most `M', `P' or `F'ratings.
In addition, the system can display the time difference (in working days) between the closing date and the date candidates are scored, as well as providing automatic escalation to the manager/administrator if candidates not scored within a specified number of working days. This will need to be specified and agreed in more detail prior to development starting.
The system also allows short listed candidates to be `tagged' for invitation to interview, and simultaneously issues a bulk rejection letter to unsuccessful candidates if required.
At the shortlisting stage the administration user will see a list of applicants for the post. The view of the applicants is configurable, for instance in the next screen shot the user is unable to view personal details (name etc) or equal opportunities related information. They only see the `Candidate ID'. Please note that information is also available on whether the applicant is internal/external, has a disability, the number of applications submitted in the past etc
Once scoring is completed the system generates a collective shortlisting grid which records all scores for all applicants from all users who have short-listed. The School Standard User and the School Super User are the only users that are able to view this chart (this can be configured to allow School HR users).
Assessment Activity
The system will enable each client to choose whether they wish to incorporate an assessment activity for the post. It will not be compulsory to choose online assessment as a tool for every vacancy but instead allow the employer to select this assessment approach on a vacancy-by-vacancy basis.
Use of the online assessment tool will be available to schools to incorporate within a job process - either at the stage of uploading the vacancy details in the first instance, or latterly in the event that upon seeing response volumes it is decided that use of a test is needed. The system will show a dropdown list of test providers, with a subsequent dropdown list of test options suitable to the test provider that they have selected. Alongside the dropdown lists will be linkages to the tool's web pages for further information about the tests and providers as well as FAQs about other content, etc.
As a candidate reaches the online assessment stage of the recruitment process for the vacancy they have applied to, they will be sent an automated email containing a user id and password and a link to the test itself. Upon pressing the link they will be securely taken to the test provider's website, and upon entry of the user id & password they will be able to commence the test at a time convenient to them.
Once completed, the employer will be automatically sent the test results that will be `data fed' into the ATS. This in turn auto generates an email to the suitable recipient to enter into the system to view test results. The ATS will enable the authorised user to make a pass/decline decision as appropriate.
Test results will be contained on a database that is linked to the applicant details and application, so that in the future as needed, the system user will be able to access all applicant details in one location on the system.
If the test selected comes with a report for the applicant themselves, this will also be automatically sent to the applicant.
If it comes with a report for the School Standard User, this will also be automatically sent for their attention.
Each individual school will be responsible for paying the associated fees with using the tests.
Applicant notifications
Once key decisions have been made the system will automatically generate notifications to unsuccessful and successful applicants, as well as receiving email notifications. The system provides applicants with the ability to log in to the portal to check their status within the system.
Candidate Selection
The Tribal systems workflow for the Candidate Selection Stage will match that of the one in the ITT. At the very beginning of the process it will allow the administration user (whether School or Recruitment Service - Lot 3) to arrange preliminary interviews and develop specific interview questions. From a technical perspective the ATS will include aspects such as:
Workflow SMS
SMSs will be sent to candidates at pre-determined points within workflow. These points will be built at the point of development and will be in various points within workflow modules.
Examples of when SMS messages would be sent to a candidate would be when they are shortlisted, invited for interview, their references are being checked, or offered the position.
The DCSF should budget for the cost of sending individual text messages over the duration of this contract, as this is not included within our final pricing matrix.
Creating Vacancy Interview Slots
For each vacancy within the system a series of interview slots can be created. Each interview slot created shall have the following information:
Date
Time Slot e.g. 11-12
Location (Text)
Interview slots can only be created for a vacancy once it has closed and has passed into the workflow process. Within the interview stage of the workflow a link will be available that will take the School administrator/Recruitment Services User to the vacancy slots section of a vacancy. Interview slots can be created by the admin user.
Workflow Invite to Interview Stage
At the invite to interview stage of the workflow, the administrator can select the candidates to ask to interview and also which candidates will be able to select an interview slot that they would like to attend. A button will be available that will send an email using a default email template, and an attachment will be included that will be generated from a standard document template.
Workflow Interview Slot Stage
Within this stage the admin user will be able to select an interview slot for each candidate, or select the action that the candidate has declined the interview.
Those candidates that were marked to select their own interview slot will be able to log-in into their My Account Zone and select an interview slot for the vacancy from a list that has been created for the vacancy. The candidate will also be able to add a note if they have any special requirements for the interview. A decline action will also be available if candidates want to decline the interview.
The admin user will be able to select a slot for a candidate even if they are able to select their own slot from their My Account Zone. This will prevent the process being delayed if the candidate has not logged in to select a slot.
Interview Questions
The system will allow the admin user to enter scores against the interview questions assigned. Typically this methodology is as follows: 1 (Meets little or none of the evidence); 2 (Meets some of the evidence); 3 (Meets most of the evidence); 4 (Meets all of the evidence). On completion of all scoring activity the system will again amalgamate scores and produce a statistical report to inform discussion on preferred/unsuccessful applicants.
Offer stage
The system allows appointed candidates to be `tagged' for offer of appointment, and will simultaneously issue a bulk rejection letter to unsuccessful candidates. The system will auto-generate an offer letter from the provided template list.
Talent Pooling Appoint able Applicants
Where a school has marked good applicants for future consideration for alternative posts they can be retained in a `talent pool' for a period of six months. A standard letter will be issued to candidates informing them of this. Where an applicant does not wish to have details retained in this way, their personal data will be deleted within 12 months of their submitted application. We envisage this process will need further discussion and configuration during the project build.
Online Referencing and Checks
The referees section within the applications forms will need to have a checkbox control for candidates to mark each referee as agreeing to receive an email in regards to referencing.
Within the workflow there should be a referee module for the system to generate documents in relation to contact referees.
At this stage the administrator within the workflow will be able to see the referees that have been entered by each candidate. This will display such information as name, title, addresses, email address, and telephone number are examples. An administrator will be able to override this information if required.
Normally this stage will generate documents that can be printed and posted to each referee.
This online referencing module will allow emails to be sent directly to a referee and for the referee to use an online interface to provide the required information.
A referee can only be sent this email if the candidate has indicated that the referee is happy to receive an email with regard to a reference being sought.
Each candidate within this stage of the workflow will have a button to send the email to each referee. The button will not be available for a referee that has been provided and did not accept for the email method to be used.
This button will send and email to the referee with any documents that were generated. The email will contain default text.
The email will also contain a link that will include a token for the referee to click and be taken to a reference form. The token within the link will be validated against the token stored with the referee.
This reference form will contain a series of questions for the referee to answer. This form will be standard and will be used for all online referencing. The questions within it will need to be provided prior to the development process.
When a referee has completed the form, an email will be sent to the administration user that sent the request within the workflow process. The candidate within the workflow stage will show that a referee has completed the online form. A link will be available for an administration user to be able to view the information provided by the referee and print it.
A flag will identify each candidate within this stage of the workflow that has had one or more referees contacted via this method, where responses from the referee or referees have not been received. The candidate will not be able to be progressed further in the workflow process until this is received. A button will be available for an administrator to override this if the referee is not responding. This action will cancel the request, so if the referee does click the link within the email after this point, they will be taken to a page that will inform them that the reference request has expired.
CRB e-bulk integration
Although not yet available, we are currently working on a plug-in module to integrate with CRB's e-bulk system. The DCSF should be aware that although this module should be available for deployment around the time the proposed system is ready to go live, it is not included within our final tender submission price. The plug-in, however, will be able to fit in retrospectively to your version of the ATS, should this be of interest. The price is available on application.
Assigning clearance checks
On the Job Edit page the administrator will be able to assign which clearance stages are required for the post being advertised.
It is important to note that at the clearances stage the School Standard User will be able to log-in to view progress without actually being able to modify/amend anything (read only access).
The clearances page needs to be laid out in the following way
Clearance stage |
Date sent for |
Date cleared |
Outcome |
The options for outcome are:
Awaiting response
Passed
Failed
Needing clarification
At the base of this page the admin user will be able to save progress. Each time an update is made the Standard School User should receive an email trigger for notification.
Once all decisions have been made the administrator will be able either to go to the next stage or close workflow if the candidate fails. There will be the option to close workflow if a candidate withdraws from the process.
Enter Starter information
Once clearances have been completed the system will send the Standard School User an email asking them to input Starter information.
This will include the following:
Starting Salary etc.
Once entered, the Standard School User will submit this to the administrator. There needs to be the option to close workflow if a candidate withdraws from the process.
Conditional offer letter
The administrator will receive an email trigger when the Standard School User submits information around the new starter. The information entered at the latter stage will generate the conditional offer letter.
Service Capability Requirements
Q2. Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Step: Internal Search
The ATS will allow vacancies to be flagged as internal only, thereby only allowing authorised users to view and apply for them.
When a vacancy is added to the system it can be flagged as an internal vacancy. This limits the users that can view and apply for it.. This is set in the Add Vacancy form, and can also be altered for a particular vacancy using the admin panel.
When a user registers, they can tick a checkbox marking themselves as an internal user. When this is done the user will be presented with two dropdowns. The first will be for the user to select a local authority: the user will need to select the LA that they work for, or if they are a school employee then the LA that the school comes under. The second dropdown will be to select a school that they work for - if they just work for the LA then they will not need to select a school.
A user marking themselves as internal will need to be authorised by an administrator before the data is set in the user's registration information (to be agreed during configuration). This process happens by the sending of an automatic email to a default administration email. If the user selects a school then the email will be sent to a default email for the school, or if they only select an LA then itwill be sent to a default email for the LA. The email will contain a link that must be clicked to approve the user as internal . Once this is done, the flag is set in the user's registration information and they are enabled to view and apply for internal vacancies. This flag can also be set on an existing user by an administrator of the system, so existing registered users can be set to view internal vacancies after they have registered as a non-internal user. The administrator will need to select an LA, and if a school employee then a school as well. When a user logs in who has the internal flag set, they are permitted to view vacancies which are flagged as internal.
An internal user for a particular school will only see internal vacancies for their school.
An internal user for just an LA and not a particular school will only see internal vacancies for all schools within their LA.
Service Capability Requirements
Q3. Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Step: Talent Pool Search
Within the ATS there are two distinct types of talent pool.
The 1st is where a front-end site user posts a talent profile from within their personalised account zone.
In addition, each profile shall include the following discretionary data entry fields:
Profile Status (On/Off)
Skills (Text Area)
Qualifications (Text Area)
Experience (Text Area)
EU National (Yes/No)
Entitled to work in UK (Yes/No)
Job type (Multiple Select)
Local Authority (Multiple Select)
School Types (Multiple Select)
Salary Minimum (Dropdown)
Salary Maximum (Dropdown)
CV (File Upload)
If Profile Status is on (which the candidate decides), then their information will be available to view for admin users from within the system's back office.
LA Users will be able to search through the talent pool, but will only be able to see members of the talent pool that have associated themselves to the LA of the LA User.
Tribal's solution supports a combination of “structured database field”, “free-text” and conceptual searches which are detailed below:
Database Searching
Tribal's database searching capability enables recruiters to find candidates with specific characteristics. These may be based on scores that have been generated whilst assessing candidates or indeed any other fielded data associated with the candidate record. Typical fielded searches may include the following categories of fields:
Currently working for
Education
Preferred Job Function
Location
School Users will be able to search through the talent pool but will only be able to see members of the talent pool that have associated themselves to the LA of the School User.
The relevant skills, qualifications and experience fields described above should allow free text to be entered for each.
Admin users will be able to select whether they want to send email or text alerts to talent pool subscribers informing of them of new vacancies. This will automatically happen if a front-end user subscribes to receive job alert notifications via email and SMS.
The second level of talent pool is for where chairs of interview panels have marked good applicants for future consideration for alternative or similar posts. These applicants can be retained in an `appoint able talent pool' for a period of either six or 12 months. At the point of submitting an application the ATS will ask the applicant whether they are happy to be included with the `appoint able pool.' If yes, a standard letter will be issued to candidates informing them of this (via email). Where an applicant does not wish to have details retained in this way, their personal data will be deleted within 12 months of their submitted application.
The system will send email or text alerts to talent pool subscribers informing of them of new vacancies.
If an applicant begins a new application, the system will automatically send them reminder emails at certain points within the recruitment process (for example, informing them that the job closes in XX days' time).
Both of these talent pools can be work flowed so as to fit in with the generic schools recruitment process. This means that searches of the front-end facing and appointable pools need to be made before moving onto 4.0 - the Recruitment Strategy.
Service Capability Requirements
Q4. Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Step: Recruitment Strategy
The system fully complies with the generic recruitment process step for `Recruitment Strategy'.
In the first instance the user will need to agree that they have budgetary sign-off to continue with the process.
If not, the process will finish at this point. If yes, the user will be asked whether they wish to include pre-screening criteria. If they select yes to this they will be taken through to the following ATS module.
Vacancy Pre-screening Questions
Each vacancy that is added to the system can have a series of filtering questions created. A vacancy can be created within the system without any filtering questions, in which case the user will proceed to the online application form. If there are any questions, these will be presented to the user prior to them going on to the application form.
The administrator will add questions by entering a question and a number of options, and will need to select which option is the correct answer. Each option will also need a score entered. which will be used to calculate a total score. If a score is not entered for an option then it will default to 0. In addition, each question can be set as a showstopper, so if the user answered a question incorrectly they will not be able to start an online application. Each question created for the vacancy can be stored to a library, which will only be available to the school that the vacancy is for.
Question example:
Question: Do you hold a valid driving licence?
Showstopper: Yes
Option 1: Yes
Correct Option
Option 2: No
When a user applies for a vacancy before they start the application form, they will first need to answer all the filtering questions.
Each question will have a series of radio buttons, each of which will will be a question option. The user will need to select one answer per question. Once all questions have been completed, the user will pass through to the application form. A user will only not pass to complete the application form if they answer one or more questions incorrectly that were set as showstoppers. If this is the case, they will be presented with a screen informing them that they were unsuccessful and will not proceed through the application process.
The administrator will be able to see immediately if the user has passed the filtering questions.
Vacancy Pre-screening Questions Library
Super Users will be able to create filter questions in a library and these will be available to all other users within the system when vacancies are being created.
Only Super Users can create items in the library.
The process is the same for creating questions in the library as in the Vacancy Filter Questions section.
The Super User can add questions by entering a question and a number of options. The Super User will need to select which option is the correct answer. Each option will also need a score enteriedwhich will be used to calculate a total score. If a score is not entered for an option it will default to 0. In addition, each question can be set as a showstopper, so if the user answers a question incorrectly they will not be able to start an online application.
One addition to questions created in the library is that they must be categorised by a Job Type. The Super User will select one or more Job Types from a select control. Job Types are defined within the categorisation section.
When a vacancy is being created within the system, the administrator can create their own questions as per the Vacancy Filter Questions section, and/or select questions from the library. Questions that will be available from the library will only be those that have been set with the same Job Role as the vacancy.
Vacancy Pre-screening Questions Scoring
For each application submitted, a score will be provided based on the filter questions answered by the candidate. Each option selected for a question by a candidate will have a score. A total score will be compiled by the sum of all the option scores selected.
A vacancy can be set with a score level for the candidate to succeed. If this score is equalled or exceeded then the application submitted will be available in the system. If the candidate does not meet the score then their application will not be available to the administrator.
If a vacancy is not set with a score level then no applications will be failed.
The vacancy will display information for the number of candidates that have passed, number of candidates that failed to meet the score level, number of candidates that answered showstopper questions incorrectly (and therefore did not submit an application), and an average score for the vacancy.
Reviewing Media Effectiveness
Whether the user has either added pre-screening criteria or not, the next stage in the workflow process will enable the user to view national media effectiveness for the type of job they are intending on advertising. Once viewed, they will be able to make a decision as to which external route they would like to take (e.g. Job Board, Printed Media or Media Agency Review).
Service Capability Requirements
Q5 - Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Step: Media Market Selection.
The Tribal solution complies fully with the generic recruitment process around Media Partner Selection.
As per the specified workflow, the process enables the user to select their preferred routes to market.
These are either:
To utilise a media agency
To go directly to the print media
To go directly to a job board
The process of selecting a method will be as per the generic recruitment process map.
Utilising the Media Agency
Only one media agency (the one that is awarded Lot 2 of this contract) will be able to utilise the ATS fully. The agency can only be configured by Super Users. At the point of set-up the agency will require the following information:
Agency Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact First Name
Main Contact Surname
Main Contact Number
Main Contact Fax
Main Contact Email
Pricing URL
Pricing Document (File Upload)
The agency will have one super agency user that will need to be set within the system. The agency super user will need to enter the following information:
User name (Email)
Password
Media Agency Users
Part of the Media Partner Selection process will require actions to be carried out by staff of the agency. Agency users will need to be created within the system to allow them to login and process required actions. An agency user will require the following:
First Name
Surname
Username (Email Address)
Password
Enabled
Direct Print/Press (offline)
The workflow of media type of “Print” will require Direct Press bodies to be selected (e.g. Gloucestershire Echo) that should be communicated with as part of the system.
Direct press will need to be created within the system. This can only be created by Super Users, and will require the following information:
Direct Press Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact First Name
Main Contact Surname
Main Contact Number
Main Contact Fax
Main Contact Email
Pricing URL
Pricing Document (File Upload)
Enabled
A list of direct press will be presented to a school user when going through the Media Partner Selection process if a school decides to use this approach.
Direct Press Classification
If a school decides to adopt this route of advertising, a search facility will be made available to allow the administrator to hone in on the most appropriate print options. A direct press body can be selected with a list of classifications. that could be, for example, national press, local press andspecialist press. In time, ratings will be available for the various print options based upon the experiences of previous advertisers.
A direct press can have any number of classifications.
The classification list will be managed by system Super Users only, and they will just need to enter a title for each item.
When an administrator is selecting direct press they will be able to filter the list by selecting a classification.
Direct Press User
A direct press body will need to have a user to be able to access the system to carry out the appropriate actions as per the generic recruitment process map. A direct press body will only have one user and this is entered with the direct press information detailed above. The following information will need to be entered:
Username (Email)
Password
Job Boards
The workflow of media type “Job Board” will require job boards to be selected by a school user for the vacancy to be sent to.
A job board can have any number of classifications.
The classification list will be managed by system Super Users only, and they will just need to enter a title for each item.
When an administrator is selecting job boards they will be able to filter the list by selecting a classification.
In time, ratings will be available for the various print options based upon experiences of previous advertisers.
Media Partner Selection Process
The administrator will need to select the approach they want to use. If no media types are selected then the Media Partner Selection Process will be bypassed.
An administrator will be able to select Media Agency or Direct Press, but not both. Job boards can be selected irrelevant if media agency or direct press is chosen..
Media Agency
If the Media Agency option is selected, the first step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to the agency. This could be, for example, vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button, and an email will be sent to the Super User of the agency. The email will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the agency Super User to the item within the system. They will need to log-in with their user name and password set in the system.
Please Note: An agency Super User will be able to log-in separately and see all vacancy requests that have been sent to the agency.
Media Agency Super User Actions
The action of the agency Super User will be to select an agency user to assign or channel the vacancy to carry out the necessary work. Once the agency user is selected and confirmed, this will trigger an email to the user selected. The email will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the agency user to the item within the system. They will need to log-in with their user name and password set in the system.
Please Note: An agency user will be able to login separately and see all vacancy requests that have been assigned to them.
Media Agency User Actions
When viewing a vacancy request, an agency user will see the vacancy information. Their main action will be to work with the copy and logos provided to issue a proposal or quote to advertise in the requested publication etc. This will be done by the agency user uploading the proposal as a file.
An agency user will be able to perform two actions on a vacancy item:
Firstly, they will be able to add comments and send them back to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has added comments requesting additional information.
The administrator will then be able to read the comments and respond back to the media agency. A comments field will be available for the administrator to enter additional information and send to the agency. This will trigger an email to the agency user.
This process can be repeated as many times as required. The system will store and display all comments in a history log
Secondly, they'll be able to upload a proposal document and send it to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has uploaded a proposal document for approval
The administrator will be able to download the proposal and see any comments added by the agency user. If the administrator feels further work is required then they will be able to send comments back to the agency user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Administrator User Actions
Once the proposal has been received and the administrator is happy with the documents provided, they will need to select that they are happy to proceed with the agency.
The administrator will need to enter a PO, and this will trigger an email to the agency user as confirmation.
Advertisement Approval workflow
The next step would be for the agency user to generate an advert proof for the administrator to approve. The agency user will upload the proof and submit back the administrator. This will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator, who will then need to approve the advert copy. If the administrator feels further work is required then they can send comments back to the agency user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Once the advert copy is approved by the administrator this will trigger an email to the direct press user to notify them of the approval.
Note: An agency Super User will be able to carry out the actions of any agency user.
Print (Direct)
If the Print option is selected, the administrator will be able to search to find a list of relevant Print media to contact directly.
The administrator will need to select the direct press that they want to work with.
Once the direct press or direct presses are selected, the next step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to each direct press body selected. This could include, for example, vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button, and an email will be sent to the email set against the one direct press user. This email will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the direct press user to the item within the system. They will need to log-in with the user name and password set in the system.
Please Note: A direct press user will be able to log-in and see all vacancy requests that have been sent to their direct press body.
Direct Press User Actions
A direct press user when viewing a vacancy request will see the vacancy information. The main action of the user will be to issue a proposal. This will be done by the user uploading the proposal as a file.
A direct press user will be able to perform two actions on a vacancy item:
Firstly, they will be able to add comments and send back to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has added comments, requesting additional information.
The administrator will then be able to read the comments and respond back to the direct press. A comments field will be available for the administrator to enter additional information and send to the direct press body. This will trigger an email to the direct press user.
This process can be repeated as many times as required. The system will store and display all comments in a history log.
Secondly, they will be able to upload a proposal document and send it to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the direct press has uploaded a proposal document for approval.
The administrator will be able to download the proposal and see any comments added by the direct press user. If the administrator feels further work is required then they will be able to send comments back to the direct press user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Note: The above process will be carried out for each direct press body that was selected by the administrator.
Administrator User Actions
Once the proposals of each direct press selected have been received and the administrator is happy with the documents provided, the administrator will need to select the direct press or direct presses that they want to proceed with.
The administrator will need to enter a PO for each direct press, and this will trigger an email to the related direct press user as confirmation.
Advertisement Approval
The next step would be for the direct press user to generate a advert proof for the administrator to approve. The direct press user will upload the advert proof and submit back the administrator. This will trigger and email that will be sent to the administrator. The administrator will then need to approve the advert copy. If the administrator feels further work is required then the administrator will be able to send back to the direct press user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Once the advert copy is approved by the administrator this will trigger an email to the direct press user to notify them of the approval.
Job Boards
If the Job Board option is selected, then the administrator will be presented with a list of job boards that are available. A search function will also be available enabling the administrator to search for job boards by their classification (e.g. Generalist or Niche).
The administrator will need to select the job boards to which they want the vacancy to be sent.. Once a job board or job boards are selected, the next step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to each job board selected. The information could, for example, include vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button, and an email will be sent to each selected job board. The email will be sent to the address set for each job board. The “From” address of the email will be set with the user name of the administrator performing the action. This will allow for the job board to reply directly to the administrator is required upon receiving the email. This process will not be tracked in the system.
Job Board Apply Now URLS
For each job board that a vacancy is sent to, the system will generate a unique URL that will be sent with the vacancy. This URL will be for job boards to use as the “Apply Now” link. This will take users from the job board that they have clicked the link on, to the ATS system where the user can complete the application form. The user will need to login/register to complete this application form.
Click and Application Tracking
The reason why a unique URL is generated for each job board per vacancy is to track the source of each application submitted, if the candidate came from a job board.
If a user comes from clicking the “Apply Now” link on a job board, then the user will be redirected to the ATS system, which will then log the hit. The system will store the job board that the user came from and the vacancy they are interested in. The user will be taken straight to the application form for the vacancy. When the user is redirected to the application form, they will need to log in to complete the application form. If they are not a registered user they will need to register on the site. Once they have successfully registered they will be taken back to the application form to complete it. This will only work for the same session. If the user begins the application form, then the system will log the user's application to the job board they came from. Therefore if the user completes and submits the application, the system will be able to track this.
This will allow the system to provide the following information on a per vacancy basis:
Vacancy A
Job Board Application Hits Application Submissions
A 5 3
B 2 0
C 8 8
Job Board Updates
Once a vacancy has gone live, if an administrator needs to adjust any vacancy information then they can do so. If they want to notify the job boards, the administrator will need to click a button to send an email to each job board. The email will contain the new vacancy information, and its subject should inform the recipient that this is a vacancy update request and not a new posting. The “From” address will be set with the administrator's username (email address). This will allow for the job board to communicate directly with the administrator that performed the action. This process will not be logged by the system.
Job Board Ratings
When an administrator is selecting job boards, they will be able to see an overview of statistics for each job board. The information displayed per job board will be:
Average Clicks
The average number of users coming from the job board. This will be the total number of clicks divide by the number of jobs sent to the job board.
Job Role Average Clicks
The average number of users coming from the job board for jobs with the same Job role as the one being created. This will be the total number of clicks divided by the number of jobs sent to the job board for the vacancy being created.
Submissions Percentage
A percentage of the number of completed submissions of applications completed by users redirected from the job board
Job Role Submissions Percentage
A percentage of the number of completed submissions of applications from users redirected from the job board with the same role as the one being created.
Media Partner Selection Surveys
At the end of the life of a vacancy, the school user associated to the vacancy will need to complete a survey. This will capture data to report on value for money and customer satisfaction.
When application workflow has been closed, the school user will be sent an email with a link to complete a survey. An email will be sent for each direct press that was selected for the vacancy or the agency in the Media Partner Selection process. Each of the following questions will askthe user to select a rating out of 5 (5 being the best score). The following questions will be available:
Cost per requisition
Time to fill
Effectiveness
Value for money
Professionalism
Responsiveness
Note: The above is only an example list. The system will allow for ten questions, whichwill need to be provided at development.
A comments field will be available for comments to be added.
The survey is then linked to the agency or the direct press body.
Within the Media Partner Selection process, an administrator will be able to see a rating for the agency or a direct press body. The overall score will be an average of the scores allocated to the questions above.
The administrator will also be able to see an average score for each question above.
In addition, the administrator will be able to see an overall score based on the job role of the vacancy. So if the vacancy is a head teacher role, the score will be based on vacancies that have the same job role that has been carried out by the agency or the direct press body.
Service Capability Requirements
Q6. Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Step: Candidate Search.
The Tribal system fully complies with the generic recruitment process for Candidate Search and Attraction.
Job Searching
Searching for jobs will not be available from the global section of the site. Only searches can be performed from an LA section or a School section.
On a local authority main page, a link will be available to search all jobs within the LA only (See wireframe 1). i.e. All jobs associated to schools within the LA.
On a school main page, a link will be available to search all jobs within the school only (See wireframe 2).
The detailed search function will allow site members to search for vacancies based on specific information by entering any or all of the following:
Keywords
School (Dropdown) - Only available on a LA Search Page
Job Type (Multiple Select)
Minimum Salary (Dropdown)
Maximum Salary (Dropdown)
Each of the three dropdown controls within the search form will contain an `All' option.
Once a site member has entered their criteria for searching, the search may be performed.
Based on the entered search criteria, the system will search through current vacancies in the system, and retrieve those that match the criteria.
If the search is performed from a local authority section then the current vacancies will be ones for all schools within the LA. If it is carried out from a School section then the current vacancies will be ones from the school.
All the options for the detailed search criteria are independent of each. Results returned shall comply with all the criteria specified by the site member when the search is carried out.
The `keywords' option will allow site members and non-members to search for jobs, which only include specific keywords as chosen by the site member.
The keyword search tool searches for job title, main body text and short description as a minimum.
The system also allows site members and non-members to go back and alter the search terms of a search they are currently performing on the site.
Job Search Results
The system displays the following general information together with the list of results:
The total number of results returned
If there are no matches to the criteria, then the system returns a message that there are no results. It also presents an option to return to the search criteria.
The following information will be displayed for each result as a minimum:
Job Title
Vacancy Reference
Job Type
Salary Text
Short Description
The Short Description field is a 200-character limited textual field describing the vacancy. It provides a hook to encourage the user to click through to view further details.
The search listing can show additional vacancy information if required. The possible vacancy information that can be displayed is listed in Appendix A.
A vacancy within the listing will be displayed with one link to view the vacancy and another to apply for the vacancy.
Please note the following wireframe is for an LA search results page. The search results for a school will be the same except for the school logo, which will replace the LA logo at the top of the results.
Job Details (the full advert)
When a vacancy is clicked within the search results, a vacancy detail page will be displayed that presents more information to the user about the vacancy.
As a minimum, the following information on a given vacancy should be displayed:
Job Title
Vacancy Reference
Salary Text
Detailed Description (full advert copy)
Closing date
Any attachments for the vacancy will display in a section on the right hand side of the page (e.g.. Job Description and Person Specification).
Service Capability Requirements
Q7. Please describe the extent that you are able to comply with the generic school recruitment process for the following Process Step: Feedback
The Tribal system complies fully with the generic recruitment process around gathering feedback. This is detailed below.
Media Partner Selection Surveys
At the end of the life of a vacancy, the school user associated with it must complete a survey. This will capture data to report on value for money and customer satisfaction.
When application workflow has been closed, the school user will be sent an email with a link to complete a survey. An email will be sent for each agency that was selected for the vacancy in the Media Partner Selection process. Each of the following questions will ask the user to select a rating out of 5 (5 being the best score). The following questions will be available:
Cost per requisition
Time to fill
Effectiveness
Value for money
Professionalism
Responsiveness
Note: The above is only an example list. The system will allow for ten questions, which will need to be provided at development.
A comments field will be available for comments to be added.
The survey is then linked to the agency and the media type that the agency was used for (Media Print/Print).
Within the Media Partner Selection process, an administrator will be able to see a rating for each agency. The overall score will be an average of the scores given to the questions above.
The administrator will also be able to see an average score for each question above.
In addition, the administrator will be able to view an overall score based on the job rolle in question.. So if the vacancy is for a head teacher role, then the score will be based on vacancies that have the same job role that have been carried out by the agency.
Note: If an agency has been set as being able to offer media print and print services, the agency will have a different overall score for each.
Web Site Survey Tool
A survey created by a Super User will be able to classify a survey as follows:
Site Survey
This will show as a link in the main menu of the site. This really applies to a site-wide survey, and LAs and schools will not be able to use it
LA Survey
The Super User will need to select the LAs to which the the survey applies. The survey will only be available to all the LAs selected.
School Survey
For the survey to be available to schools, the relevant schools must must first be selected.. If no schools are selected it will only be available as an LA survey.
The Super User will need to select the schools within the select LAs that the the survey includes. The survey will only be available to all the schools selected.
A survey created by a LA user will be able to classify a survey as follows:
LA Survey
The survey will only be available to the LA of the LA User
School Survey
For the survey to be available to schools, the relevant schools must first be selected. If no schools are selected then it will only be available as an LA survey
The LA User will first need to select the relevant schools within the select LA.. The survey will only be available to all the schools selected.
A survey created by a School user will be able to classify a survey as follows:
School Survey
For the survey to be available to school of the School User
An administrator will be able to create various surveys and create numerous questions for each.
The administrator will be able to create, edit and delete a series of survey questions via the admin area. The administrator will need to enter the following:
Question Title
Question
Question Type (Select from drop-down)
A number of possible options
Position
The system will support the following question types:
Radio
Checkbox
Drop-down
Free Text
A survey question can have a maximum of five options or a minimum of two, except for a free text survey question.
The Admin User will be able to set the order of the questions by setting the position.
Survey Campaigns
For a survey to be available on the site for users to complete, a survey campaign must be created. A campaign will require the following information:
Campaign Title
Start Date
End Date
Enabled
Anonymous Yes/No (If anonymous then respondents to the survey do not need to be registered on the site to complete a survey)
Survey Selector (Control to select a survey to assign to the campaign)
If Campaign is created by a Super User then the following additional information will need to be selected:
LA Selector (Select the LAs for the survey to display on their main page)
School Selector (Select the schools of the selected LAs for the survey to display on their main page)
Note: If no LAs are selected then the campaign will be displayed on the main menu of the site, and is therefore a site wide survey.
If Campaign is created by a LA User then the following additional information will need to be selected:
School Selector (Select the schools of the LA of the LA User for the survey to display on their main page)
Note: If no schools selected then the campaign will be displayed on the menu of the LA site of the LA User
If Campaign is created by a School User then the campaign will only be displayed on the school of the school user's main page.
A Site Member will be able to complete the survey and each user's answers will be stored.
Service Capability Requirements
Q8. How would your solution help the customer groups comply with Equal Opportunities Legislation?
The solution will help customer groups comply with Equal Opportunities legislation in a number of key ways.
The System Configuration
Tribal's ATS system is designed and built to meet to all best practice public sector guidelines that enable equal opportunity for all browsers and job seekers. We have an ethical and legal obligation to create web platforms that are inclusive and accessible. Consequently, we make every effort to ensure that the websites we develop are usable, inclusive and accessible regardless of disability/ability.
To ensure the same level of experience for as many people as possible, we build inter-operable websites using WAI recommendations and standards-compliant design technologies.
Our aim is always to build and design our websites to a very high standard, ensuring the same functionality across various browsers and operating systems. Our sites are clean, elegant, fast-loading, hand-coded business solutions that adhere to WAI AA standard as set out by the World Wide Web Consortium.
In summary, we are committed to complying with appropriate accessibility standards. We will always:
• Use clean code to W3C/WAI standards
• Use elements for what they should be for (i.e. we don't use <p> when <h*> is needed)
• Use re-sizeable text to help the visually impaired
• Introduce a good contrast between foreground and background colours
• Ensure there are no sudden surprises, re-directs or pop-ups unless the user knows what is going to happen
• Alt text for all images, so those with images turned off still know what is there
• Avoid tables for layout, only using them for data
• Use short sentences avoiding jargon
• Code as much as possible using CSS, which reduces loading time
• Give users an indication as to what words constitute a link
• Explain abbreviations and acronyms
• Limit using JavaScript, as some people have this turned off
• Avoid Flash/flashy graphics and animated gifs, which can confuse some people
• Provide a text equivalent for every non-text element on the site
• Ensure that any information conveyed with colour is also available without it
• Ensure all documents on a website are well organised so that they can be read without style sheets
• Make sure that background and foreground colours have enough contrast so that when someone with a colour deficit looks at it (or when the site is viewed on a black and white screen) they can still read it clearly
• Try to provide a site map
• Provide summaries for all the tables if we use a table (which is not often).
This form can be built specific to your requirements and include categorisation such as:
Disability
Ethnic Origin
Gender
Age
Religion
Sexuality etc
All elements of categorisation can be configured by the global Super User.
Application Management Protocol
Once submitted, this section within the application form will be kept confidential and therefore not available to the selection panel assigned to the post. In addition to the equalities information being hidden we can also hide fields such as Title and First Name, Surname etc so the recruitment exercise becomes anonymous for certain user types.
Equal Opportunities Reporting
HR administrators and Super Users user will have the ability to use a tool, via the admin area, which will generate all necessary equal opportunity statistics.
The administrator will have the following options to choose from when running a report:
Applications Submitted
Start Date
End Date
Equal Opportunities Information
Ethnic origin
Gender
Disability
Sexual Orientation
Religion
Age
Advertising Origin (External Media)
Advertising Origin
Workflow stage
Application Status (The workflow stages applicants went through, e.g. Rejected at short-list, Offered etc)
Jobs
Job Type
Salary (Min and Max)
Internal External
The administrator user does not have to select all the options. Once the user is happy with the options and select search, it will return the statistical information.
The administrator will have the option to generate a CSV file with the results of the report.
Equal Opportunities within Application Workflow
Where applicants with a disability meet minimum criteria for the job, the guaranteed interview scheme flag will be activated.
The minimum criteria will need to be determined by managers in conjunction with HR staff at the point of job load onto the system. This will be through setting pre-screening questions.
The Tribal system will highlight applicants meeting these criteria, and warn administrators if they have not been `tagged' for interview.
The system will be set up so that this is the only circumstance where any information provided on equality monitoring forms will be disclosed to Standard School Users and School Panel Members. In all other circumstances, equality monitoring data will be hidden from appointment panels.
Service Capability Requirements
Q9. How would your solution help the different customer groups develop policies and practices that are consistent with it being an excellent Equal Opportunities employer?
The Tribal solution will help customer groups using the solution to develop consistent policies and practices, enabling them to remain as Equal Opportunities employers. For instance:
Information Views
There will be an option either to print or not print the equalities data when application forms are printed out (e.g. for Recruiting Manager review,the equalities data is not shown).
There are also facilities to input the equalities data into the system for all offline applications (email or paper). We understand that this comprehensive information is needed to produce consistent monitoring and control reports.
Management Information
Recruitment management (including equalities) information will be available (as standard)::
1. Nationally
2. By Local Authority
3. By School and Cluster
The information analysed for these reports will be one or more of the following:
1. Age
2. Gender
3. Ethnicity
4. Disability Status
5. Sexual Orientation
6. Religion/belief
7. Vacancy Title
8. Source of advert (a code or a name)
9. Status (or stage) of application.
10. Census data for comparative reporting.
Consistent Accessible Site Design
The system will be built to ensure that both the web-user and admin-user interfaces are intuitive, easy to use and support current Equalities Strategy.
It is important to note we have an ethical and legal obligation to create web platforms that are inclusive and accessible. We make every effort to ensure that the websites we develop are usable, inclusive and accessible regardless of disability/ability.
To ensure the same level of experience for as many people as possible, we build interoperable websites using WAI recommendations and standards-compliant design technologies.
Our aim is always to build and design our websites to a very high standard, ensuring the same functionality across various browsers and operating systems. Our websites are clean, elegant, fast loading, hand-coded business solutions that adhere to WAI AA standard as set out by the World Wide Web Consortium.
We are committed to complying with appropriate accessibility standards, and will always
Use clean code to W3C/WAI standards
Use elements for what they should be for ( i.e. we don't use <p> when <h*> is needed)
Use re-sizable text to help the visually impaired
Introduce a good contrast between foreground & background colours
Avoid sudden surprises, re-directs or pop-ups unless the user knows what is going to happen
Use Alt text for all images, so those with images turned off still know what is there
Avoid tables for layout, and only use them for data
Use short sentences that avoid jargon
Code as much as possible using CSS to reduce loading time
Give users an indication as to what words constitute a link
Explain abbreviations and acronyms
Limit using JavaScript, as some people have this turned off
Avoid Flash/flashy graphics and animated gif's, which can confuse some people
Provide a text equivalent for every non-text element on the site
Ensure that any information conveyed with colour is also available without it
Ensure all documents are well organised so that they can be read without style sheets
Make sure that background and foreground colours have enough contrast so that when someone with a colour deficit looks at it (or the site is viewed with a black and white screen) they can still read it clearly
Try and provide a site map
Provide summaries for all the tables if we use a table (which isn't often).
Consistent Recruitment Processes
The system will employ a generic standardised electronic recruitment process around Applicant Submission, Assessment, and Selection. This means candidates across the country will all go through the same fair process.
Service Capability Requirements
Q10 - How would your solution provide and encourage `development' opportunities for candidates?
Tribal's ATS solution will proactively enable and inform applicants of potential development opportunities. It will do this through a variety of methods, most of which require little to no manual intervention by administrators. For instance:
New Job alert notifications by email (JBE)
The system will allow users to subscribe for jobs by email. Users will subscribe with the following fields:
Salary Minimum
Salary Maximum
Job Roles
Local Authority
School Types
Keywords
Inevitably, when an applicant is looking to make a career move they are looking at jobs that invariably have a higher remuneration rate. This service is thus one of the most effective methods of informing candidates of the latest vacancies which match their reward aspirations.
Registering is free and enables the applicant to receive updates on all the latest jobs directly to their inbox.
In terms of the process, the sending out of job alerts will be fully automated and happen daily. All vacancies will be flagged as being “sent”, so only new vacancies added afterwards will be sent on the next jobs by email.
It is important to note that a JBE will not be sent per school, one email will be sent per site member that has subscribed to the JBE.
Areas within the website can be designated titles such as `The Forum' or `Blog' and allow for career advice and guidance to be provided for all. In addition, we can provide guidance surrounding the recruitment process the skills and experience required for differing role types, etc. either through video or audio content, The scope for us is limited only by what we want to include and it is this content that will predominantly support job seekers in their ongoing development.
Site members will be able to unsubscribe from jobs by email from within the system.
Job alerts by SMS
The ATS will allow users to subscribe to receive regular new job alert notifications by SMS. The search criteria used for the jobs by SMS is the selected criteria added in the Jobs by Email section. A checkbox will be available for the user to check if they want to receive the message.
The frequency of the alert will be the same as that of the email option. Users will receive information only on the number of jobs that match their selected criteria.
Talent Pool
The talent pool is designed for schools to match potential applicants to the jobs they are seeking to fill. To ensure that applicants understand how to get the most from this facility, guidance notes and advice will be provide on the website. Along with this will be links into the guidance mentioned above surrounding career paths and development, to make it as transparent as possible for applicants to discover what skills and expertise are required for roles across the sector.
Send to a friend
When viewing a vacancy on the candidate front-end of the ATS, users will be able to click a button to send the specific vacancy URL to a colleague/associate or friend. In most instances these types of referrals will only take place if the original message sender feels that the person to whom they are sending the message is actually suitable for the role.
Job RSS feeds
With web 2.0 techniques at front of mind, the ATS will enable candidates to set up suitable job RSS feeds. This enables updates of all the latest job opportunities to go straight to their desktop, home page, Social Networking site etc.
E-Bulletin - Useful Development Resources
The system will enable a particular user type (to be decided - it probably doesn't fall into any of the ones quoted within the Technical Capabilities Q1,Q2 and Q3 but we are able to create a new one to meet individual needs) to upload relevant development materials/ resources that can be sent to registered candidates. Candidates will be able to register to receive these alerts through the ATS's My Account zone.
When the admin user is uploading career development news, this will need to be categorised so it goes out to the right audience groups/job roles e.g. Deputy Heads.
At the point of registering for job alerts by email/SMS the candidate will tick a tick box to say they want to receive the development e-bulletin. If they do, they will receive the resources based upon their preferred JBE categories.
Development Training Events by Email (DTE) - Raising awareness of National Professional Development Opportunities
This service is similar to the ATS's jobs by email service. The new user type quoted in the E-Bulletin Section above will be able to manage a list of national career development events. When they are adding these to the system they be categorised by job role and hosting LA region. Candidates will subscribe to the free service as they do for job alerts by email. The process of sending out the DTE will be automated. Candidates will only receive updates based upon their preferred DTE categories.
Future developments
In the future, new modules we are developing for our ATS package could enable registered candidates to ask questions, share information and take part in discussions in the forums. This level of 2.0 functionality does not form part of our final submission price.
Service Capability Requirements
Q11 - How would your solution provide strategic management information to enable the customer groups to proactively manage `staff development'?
Management information pertinent to staff development will be generated from the system in a number of ways as follows:
Data from audit and analysis of applications numbers against role types.
DCSF Super Users
DCSF users can be given full access permission to the ATS to run national searches and report against numbers of applications towards specific vacancies or general vacancy types.
Making this information available to DCSF users should be sufficient to start building a nationalised picture of trends of response volume so that shortfall areas can be defined for training purposes.
The user running the search will be able to export a CSV of the data from the ATS and then run this through Microsoft Excel to generate useful graphs and charts.
LA Super Users
LA Super Users can be given limited access permissions to the ATS to run regional searches within their locality and report against numbers of applications towards specific vacancies or general vacancy types.
Making this information available to LA users should be sufficient to start building a regionalised picture of trends of response volume so that shortfall areas can be defined for training purposes.
The user running the search will be able to export a CSV of the data from the ATS and then run this through Microsoft Excel to generate useful graphs and charts.
School Super Users
School Super Users can be given limited access permissions to the ATS to run a specific search for their School and report against numbers of applications towards specific vacancies or general vacancy types. Making this information available to School Super Users should be sufficient to start building a localised picture of trends of response volume so that shortfall areas can be defined for training purposes.
The user running the search will be able to export a CSV of the data from the ATS and then run this through Microsoft Excel to generate useful graphs and charts.
Data from the audit and analysis of the registered users content entered into the talent pool
The Tribal ATS is able to provide reporting and search functionality to enable customer groups to identify staff development opportunities.
DCSF Super Users
DCSF Super Users can be given full access permissions to the ATS to run national searches and report against all registered users that have a talent pool profile, or have classified themselves as internal, as well as all candidates that have registered to receive either or both Development E-Bulletins or Training Events by email. Filters will include job roles, skills, knowledge, experience, behaviours, training, qualifications, employment status, and LA and salary range.
Making this information available to DCSF users should be sufficient to start building a national picture of staff development opportunities, training needs and potential succession planning.
The user running the search will be able to export a CSV of the data from the ATS and then run this through Microsoft Excel to generate useful graphs and charts.
LA Super Users
LA Super Users can be given limited access permissions to the ATS to run regional searches within their locality and report against registered users that have a talent pool profile or have classified themselves being internal, as well as all candidates that have registered to receive either or both Development E-Bulletins or Training Events by email. Filters will include job roles, skills, knowledge, experience, behaviours, training, qualifications, employment status and salary range.
Making this information available to LA users should be sufficient to start building a localised picture of staff development opportunities, training needs analysis and potential succession planning.
The user running the search will be able to export a CSV of the data from the ATS and then run this through Microsoft Excel to generate useful graphs and charts.
School Super Users
School Super Users can be given limited access permissions to the ATS to run a specific search for their School and report against registered users that have a talent pool profile or have classified themselves being internal, as well as all candidates that have registered to receive either or both Development E-Bulletins or Training Events by email. Filters will include job roles, skills, knowledge, experience, behaviours, training, qualifications, employment status, and salary range.
Making this information available to School Super Users should be sufficient to start building a localised picture of staff development opportunities, training needs analysis and potential succession planning.
The user running the search will be able to export a CSV of the data from the ATS and then run this through Microsoft Excel to generate useful graphs and charts.
Service Capability Requirements
Q12 - How would your solution help the customer groups in their `succession' planning practices?
All organisations, whether in the private or public sectors, need to be able to find people with the right skills to fill key and top leadership jobs. This is especially true within the Education sector with many of its leaders approaching retirement ages.
Much of the current literature on the state of the market for head teachers in the UK points to a severe shortage and a `demographic time bomb' - with a large proportion of head teachers reaching the end of their careers and very little new blood being developed to take their place. This has led the National College for School Leadership to look carefully at the issue of succession planning for leadership in education, and this is now a key theme of their work in helping to prepare UK schools for the future.
The Tribal talent pool module enables applicants to register and be registered against specific job role types to enable potential successors to be identified for a variety of roles. Candidates manage their registration through a dedicated account area.
Within the back office of the system, jobs are clustered by role function and level so that the generic skills responsible for particular roles can be developed.
All of the clients we work with recognise the business case for diversity and are increasingly aware of the need to ensure that the talents of women and ethnic minorities are properly developed. Tribal's talent management solution enables effective data capture, storage and reporting of all equalities monitoring information of those applicants stored within it.
The bi-product of this clustering is fair and equal, well developed pre-screened pools of talented people, each of whom is adaptable and capable of filling a number of roles. Because succession planning is primarily concerned with developing longer-term successors as well as short-term replacements from experience, each pool will be considerably larger than the range of posts it covers.
So our software effectively links available jobs with potential successors. Of course, the databases need to be continuously updated in order to offer any real value. The update and maintenance that is required is to ensure that registered users keep their profiles up-to-date with their skills and experience; and that as and when people find roles and no longer wish to be matched against other vacancies, their profiles are frozen from being searched and matched against. Tribal's ATS system helps by enabling automated email communications to all registrants to be sent at regular intervals to prompt them to maintain this data on behalf of the employers.
A talent pool can be managed and developed in a variety of ways, including:
Allowing candidates to join the pool by completing a talent pool application form listing their skills, qualifications, experience, salary, job type, job term and keyword
Talent application forms can be searched by generic post title, reference code, applicant name, email address, date range, skills, qualifications, experience, salary, job type, job term and keyword
Ability to accept or reject completed talent pool application forms, thereby creating a shortlist of suitable applicants. Auto-reject or accept emails sent to those successful/unsuccessful candidates saves on paper resources and provides a full audit trail
Applicants can be ranked and notes applied
Talent pool information will be stored in the system for six months, at which stage the user will receive an automated email asking for their permission as to whether they wish to continue to be included in the database. This correspondence will be logged in the system
Clients will then have the ability to send a standard email to these users to inform them that a new job is available that is suitable to their skill set. A link will be available for the user to apply. They will be taken to the online application form (which will be pre-filled from the last time they applied) where they can revise their information if required and submit
This approach will then allow for reports to be generated against the registered users within the talent pool that match the criteria required for any given role area. If the resulting report has sufficient matches then the customer group has a fair indication that they will able to manage succession for the role type they are investigating. If it does not, the customer group will have a prior indication of the need either to attract more people to register onto the system or to focus on the development of existing staff.
Each customer group will, of course, have a `permission based' scope to do this as follows:
Schools - will be able to succession plan by identifying those within the talent pool who have expressed a desire to work for that school
School Clusters - will be able to succession plan by identifying those within the talent pool who have expressed a desire to work for that cluster of schools
LA's - will be able to succession plan by identifying those within the talent pool who have expressed a desire to work within the LA area
DCSF - will be able to succession plan by identifying those within the talent pool who have expressed a desire to work anywhere in England
Tribal is able to offer additional support surrounding this process. Here, our support takes the form of reporting and analysis of the database, additional telephone communications with registrants encouraging full information upload, system updates with the latest situations of registered users and logs that show as and when they are encouraged into differing training and development routes.
Service Capability Requirements
Q13. Please provide details on the capability of the solution to extract meaningful management information to the level of detail explained within section of 4 of the MI Strategy paper (schedule 2). In your response please also enclose examples of the type and style of reports available that would meet these reporting requirements.
The system is fully capable of producing meaningful management information to the same level as that outlined in the MI strategy paper.
School Reports
Individual Vacancy Report
The individual vacancy report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per school. A section will be available that will list all the school vacancies. The list can be filtered by Job Role and Go Live Date. For each vacancy on the list, an icon will be available to click and the vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following:
Vacancy Title
Vacancy Reference
Number of Un-submitted Applications
Number of Submitted Applications
Number of applications shortlisted
Summary of advertising origins (this will show the total for each option and the total of shortlisted candidates)
Time to hire (this will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow and the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
If a school is part of a cluster, then a checkbox will be available to include all vacancies from schools in their cluster in the list
Multi Vacancy Report
The multi vacancy report will be available for selected vacancies within the system. This will be available per school. A section will be available that will list all the school vacancies, and this list can be filtered by Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following for each vacancy:
Vacancy Title
Vacancy Reference
Number of Un-submitted Applications
Number of Submitted Applications
Number of applications short listed
Summary of advertising origins (this will show the total for each option and the total for shortlisted candidates)
Time to hire (this will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow and the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
If a school is part of a cluster, then a checkbox will be available to include all vacancies from schools in their cluster in the list.
Equal Ops Monitoring - Individual Vacancy
The individual vacancy report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per school. A section will be available that will list all the school vacancies, which can be filtered by Job Role and Go Live Date. For each vacancy in the list, an icon will be available to click and the vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Age
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
If a school is part of a cluster, a checkbox will be available to include all vacancies from schools in their cluster in the list.
Equal Ops Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report
The multi vacancy report will be available for selected vacancies within the system. This will be available per school. A section will be available that will list all the school vacancies, which can be filtered by Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
If a school is part of a cluster, a checkbox will be available to include all vacancies from schools in their cluster in the list.
Local Authority Report
Individual Vacancy Report
The individual vacancy report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per LA. Vacancies for all schools within the LA will be shown.. A section will be available that will list all the vacancies, which can be filtered by School, Job Role and Go Live Date. For each vacancy in the list, an icon will be available to click and the vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following:
Vacancy Title
Vacancy Reference
Number of Un-submitted Applications
Number of Submitted Applications
Number of applications short listed
Summary of advertising origins (this will show the total for each option and the total
of shortlisted Candidates)
Time to hire (this will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being
created in advert workflow and the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
If a school is selected to be filtered and is part of a cluster, then all vacancies from the schools within the cluster will be included.
Multi Vacancy Report
The multi vacancy report will be available for selected vacancies within the system. . This will be available per LA. Vacancies for all schools within the LA will be shown. A section will be available that will list all vacancies, which can be filtered by School, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following for each vacancy:
Vacancy Title
Vacancy Reference
Number of Un-submitted Applications
Number of Submitted Applications
Number of applications short listed
Summary of advertising origins (Will show the total for each option and the total for shortlisted candidates)
Time to hire (This will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow to the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
If a school is selected to be filtered and is part of a cluster, then all vacancies from the schools within the cluster will be included.
Summary Campaign Report - Multi Vacancy
The report will be available for selected vacancies within the system. This will be available per LA. Vacancies for all schools within the LA will be shown. The list can be filtered by School, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are on the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following:
Total Number of vacancies
Number of Submitted Applications
Number of vacancies gone live during the Go Live Date period entered
Number of appointments
Average Time to hire (This will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow to the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
Vacancy Reference
If a school is selected to be filtered and is part of a cluster, then all vacancies from the schools within the cluster will be included.
School Campaign Report - Multi Vacancy
The report will be available for selected vacancies within the system. This will be available per LA. Vacancies for all schools within the LA will be shown. The list can be filtered by School, Job Role and Go Live Date, and a button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following for each vacancy grouped by school:
{For Each School Vacancy}
Vacancy Title
Vacancy Reference
{Totals of all vacancies for school}
Time to hire (this will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow and the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
Number of appointments
If a school is selected to be filtered and is part of a cluster, then all vacancies from the schools within the cluster will be included.
Equal Ops Monitoring - Individual Vacancy
The individual vacancy report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per LA. Vacancies for all schools within the LA will be shown, and the list can be filtered by School, Job Role and Go Live Date. For each vacancy in the list, an icon will be available to click and the vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
If a school is selected to be filtered and is part of a cluster, then all vacancies from the schools within the cluster will be included.
Equal Ops Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report
The multi vacancy report will be available for selected vacancies within the system. This will be available per LA. Vacancies for all schools within the LA will be shown, and the list can be filtered by School, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
If a school is selected to be filtered and is part of a cluster, then all vacancies from the schools within the cluster will be included.
Regional Report
A list of regions will be listed, and one of them will need to be selected to move to the report tools. All reports generated will be based on the selected region.
Regional Campaign - Multi Vacancy
The report will be available for each vacancy within the region selected. This will be available per LA or a DSCF User. Vacancies for all schools, for all LA within the selected region will be available. The list can be filtered by LA, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following:
Total Number of vacancies live for the go live date entered.
This will be broken down per Job Role
Number of Un-submitted Applications
Number of Submitted Applications
Average Time to hire (this will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow and the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
Equal Ops Monitoring - Individual Vacancy
The individual vacancy report will be available for each vacancy within the region selected. This will be available per LA or a DSCF User. Vacancies for all schools, for all LA within the selected region will be available. The list can be filtered by LA, Job Role and Go Live Date. For each vacancy in the list, an icon will be available to click and the vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
Equal Ops Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report
The multi vacancy report will be available for selected vacancies within the region selected. This will be available per LA or a DSCF User. Vacancies for all schools, for all LA within the selected region will be shown, and. the list can be filtered by LA, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
National Report
National Campaign - Multi Vacancy
The report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per LA or a DSCF User. Vacancies for all schools, for all LA within the system will be shown; and. the list can be filtered by region, LA, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain the following:
Total Number of vacancies live for the Go live date entered.
This will be broken down per Job Role
Number of Un-submitted Applications
Number of Submitted Applications
Average Time to hire (this will be the number of weekdays between date of the advert being created in advert workflow and the date of the vacancy being closed in Workflow)
Equal Ops Monitoring - Individual Vacancy
The report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per LA or a DSCF User. Vacancies for all schools, for all LA within the system will be displayed; and the list can be filtered by region, LA, Job Role and Go Live Date. For each vacancy in the list, an icon will be available to click and the vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
Equal Ops Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report
The report will be available for each vacancy within the system. This will be available per LA or a DSCF User. Vacancies for all schools, for all LA within the system will be displayed, and the list can be filtered by region, LA, Job Role and Go Live Date. A button will be available to generate the report for the vacancies that are in the list. If the list is not filtered then it will be for all vacancies. The vacancy report will open in a new window.
The report will contain a breakdown for each of the following Equal Ops categories the following:
Ethnic origin (The total for each option selected)
Gender (The total for each option selected)
Disability (The total for each option selected)
Sexual Orientation (The total for each option selected)
Religion (The total for each option selected)
Advertising Origin (The total for each option selected)
Service Capability Requirements
Q14. How do you intend, or plan, to manage the relationship with the chosen Recruitment Services provider. In your response you must also address the possibility that we may choose an alternative provider who may not be your intended partner. Any commercial implications must be highlighted.
As an experienced and knowledgeable resourcing and solutions organisation, Tribal has experience of working with a wide range of suppliers in providing a high quality, effective and innovative service.
Based on our position on a wide variety of frameworks we are well versed in managing relationships and motivating success within providers to achieve the key objectives and KPI's. We would set up a series of review meetings which will be diarised throughout the year, with an annual review to assess the effectiveness of the relationship. These meetings will be arranged to discuss key developments within the marketplace, use of the ATS system, and assess the MI generated, orders received online and the overall take-up of the system and services.
In terms of `motivating success' we would suggest developing a toolkit/charter that we would all follow, in terms of developing an open and honest relationship and working in partnership to ensure the success of the contract.
Whilst we do not envisage any commercial implications in using another supplier for Recruitment Services, we would need to undertake detailed service provision meetings to ascertain and detail processes. These would cover how the management of the recruitment campaign will work, as well as what processes and approaches the recruitment service provider would want to incorporate for candidates in order that the requisite workflow processes and `triggers' within the ATS system can be adhered to. The aim will be to make it seamless for candidate, school and recruiter alike. Meetings would focus around defining:
Communications / letter templates
Destinations for `triggers' within the process
Roles and responsibilities of school versus recruitment service provider users.
We would need to keep in regular contact with the chosen recruitment services provider, whether that is Tribal or another supplier, to ensure they are kept abreast of the early adopters coming on board with the system through Phase 1 and our continued sales conversion strategy to attract new users. We would want to involve the recruitment services provider fully in our launch roadshows and keep them up-to-date with our newsletters and mail shots sent out.
Once the contract has been awarded we would suggest a pre-contract launch meeting with each of the Lot providers and key specialists covering the media market and recruitment services lots. This meeting will be to discuss the ATS, present an overview of the system and the processes that users will need to employ when ordering recruitment services online. We would need a wide list of the recruitment services that the provider is able to offer which can then be uploaded onto the system. We would also need to understand any links to Assessment services such as SHL etc to ensure that our system will link to the online site for psychometric testing etc.
As a fully integrated recruitment and resourcing services provider we will be able to provide a wide range of services in attracting and retaining staff. These services include, but are not limited to the following:
Recruitment Process Outsourcing
Developing Job description/person specifications
Candidate management
Sifting against competency frameworks
Interview administration
Assessment centre design & delivery
Clearance administration
Diversity
Diversity `proofing' advertisements and literature
Diversity `proofing' recruitment/HR processes
Strategic advice
Training workshops and seminars from employee to Board level
Diversity audit of organisation
Recruitment consultancy/Search and Selection
Targeted search (head hunting)
Job description and person specification design
CV sifting
Interviewing and selection
Response Handling
Psychometric testing
Assessment centres
Interim Resourcing
HR Consultancy
Pay reviews
Strategic HR policy
Employee Relations
Employment Law
Through our monthly, quarterly and annual reviews we will be constantly looking at new developments within the marketplace and talking to the suppliers about how to implement these into the service delivery. The management information will allow us to analyse the response and the process job seekers then go through - from ordering online through to delivery of the recruitment service. We will be constantly looking at ways to perfect this process and will develop a strong working relationship with all the suppliers and the DCSF in doing so.
Service Capability Requirements
Q15. How do you intend, or plan, to manage the relationship with the chosen Media Services provider. In your response you must also address the possibility that we may choose an alternative provider who may not be your intended partner. Any commercial implications must be highlighted.
As an experienced and knowledgeable resourcing and solutions organisation, Tribal has experience of working with a wide range of suppliers in providing a high quality, effective and innovative service.
Based on our position on a wide variety of frameworks, we are well versed in managing relationships and motivating success within providers to achieve the key objectives and KPI's. We would set up a series of review meetings which will be diarised throughout the year, with an annual review to assess the effectiveness of the relationship. These meetings will be arranged to discuss key developments within the market-place, use of the ATS system, the MI generated, orders received online and the overall take-up of the system and services.
In terms of `motivating success' we would suggest developing a toolkit/charter that we would all follow, in terms of developing an open and honest relationship and working in partnership to ensure the success of the contract.
Whilst we do not envisage any commercial implications in using another supplier for Media Services, we would need to undertake detailed service provision meetings to ascertain and detail processes - both in terms of how the management of the recruitment campaign will work, as well as what processes and approaches the media service provider would want to incorporate for schools in order that the requisite workflow processes and `triggers' within the ATS system can be adhered to, making it seamless for the school. Meetings would focus around defining:
Communications / letter templates
Destinations for `triggers' within the process
Roles and responsibilities of school versus media service provider users
We would need to keep in regular contact with the chosen media services provider, whether that is Tribal or another supplier, to ensure they are kept abreast of the early adopters coming on board with the system through Phase 1 and our continued sales conversion strategy to attract new users. This will be key as the media services provider would need to understand the size of the schools, LA, value of the contract, number of advertisements placed and an idea of any existing media contracts in place. These figures would then support the media negotiations that the media provider will be undertaking. Our recommendations for the media services provider will be to develop a microsite that holds all of the media contract negotiations, special rates and volume deals as well as all of the media deadlines associated with local, national and specialist press titles.
We would want to involve the media services provider fully in our launch roadshows and keep them up-to-date with our newsletters and mail shots we send out.
Once the contract has been awarded, we would suggest a pre-contract launch meeting with each of the Lot providers and key specialists covering the media market and recruitment services lots. This meeting will be to discuss the ATS, present an overview of the system and the processes that users will need to take when ordering recruitment services online. We would need a wide list of the media titles which can then be uploaded onto the system. We would also need to make the media services provider aware of the tracking tool we will be using.
As a fully integrated media services provider we will be able to provide a wide range of services in media buying/planning that include but are not limited to the following:
Off and online experienced media research and buying team
Housestyle/template design and management
Copywriting
From proforma filled in by recruiting managers outlining main points
From job description/person specification
From brief taken by Account Manager by telephone or face to face
Bespoke/creative design
Award winning creative team
Art Directors and designers, all experienced in working with public, not-for-profit and private sector clients
Web advertising
Text listings
Banners/buttons
Rich media
Branding/website traffic driving campaigns
Training
Copywriting workshops
Internet workshops
Diversity workshops
Interactive services
Website audits
Competitor analysis
Behavioural targeting
Podcasts
Copywriting for the web
Workshops and seminars on online advertising
Website design and build
Microsite (campaign site) design and build
Blogs
Web marketing
Online traffic driving campaign strategy
Search Engine Optimisation
Outdoor advertising
Research
Media planning & buying
Radio advertising
Media buying and research
Scriptwriting
Application forms
Application folders and packs
Exhibition stands
Giveaways/marketing literature
Annual report
Prospectuses
Research
Employer branding
Focus groups
Report of results and evaluation
Staff engagement projects
Retention strategy
Detailed competitor and market analysis
Through our monthly, quarterly and annual reviews we will be constantly looking at new developments within the marketplace and talking to the suppliers about how to implement these into the service delivery. The management information will allow us to analyse the response and the process job seekers then go through - from ordering online through to the services provided by the media services supplier. We will be constantly looking at ways to perfect this process and will develop a strong working relationship with all of the suppliers and the DCSF in doing so.
Service Capability Requirements
Q16. Please summarise which parts of your total available service offering for an ATS solution is, and is not, included as part of your proposal?
All the following elements of system functionality are included within our submission.
System Functionality
User Types (as defined in Technical Requirements Q1, Q2 and Q3.) but include user types for:
Super User
DCSF
LA Super User
LA User
School Super User
School User
Standard School User (the recruiter)
School Panel Member
Media Agency Super User
Media Agency User
Recruitment Partner Super User
Recruitment Partner User
Content Management System
The Content Management System (CMS) comprises all the functionality for creating web pages in a hierarchical fashion, search capabilities and managing the pages with a comprehensive user rights model for editing and publishing. There shall be one content management look and feel utilised throughout the portal. This is to provide a consistent user experience for web users. Through the content management system, pages can be created to provide information to web users. Pages will be able to be created for a number of areas.
The front-end of the system will comprise the following areas:
Global
Local Authority
School
Global
The global area will be the main landing page or home page of the entire system. All visitors will land on the home page if they come via the main domain name that the system will be designated with.
A list of pages can be created that will display in the global area, which can be created within a hierarchical structure.
Page links for the global section will load within a main menu navigation that will be available throughout the entire system, wherever a web user navigates. The general practice would be for this to be loaded on the left side of the site.
Global pages can only be created by Super Users within the system
Local Authority
Each LA created in the system will have their own section within the CMS to create pages within a hierarchical structure. This is the same process as global pages.
Only LA Super Users can create pages for their authority. Other LA user types can create pages if they have been set up with access points within the CMS User Model that is detailed further on.
Page links for a LA section will load within a menu navigation that will be available throughout the LA section, wherever a web user navigates. The general practice would be for this to be loaded on the right side of the site.
An LA main page will be accessible by selecting an LA from the dropdown in wireframe 1, or it can be accessed by entering the folder name (See Site Pages section) for the main page after the site domain. For example if the main domain name of the site is www.domain.com then a LA main page can be accessed by entering the folder name for the page www.domain.com/pagefoldername.
Schools
Each School created in the system will have their own section within the CMS to create pages within a hierarchical structure. This is the same process as LA pages.
Only School Super Users can create pages for their school. Other school user types can create pages if they have been set up with access points within the CMS User Model that is detailed further on.
Page links for the school section will load within a menu navigation that will be available throughout the school section, wherever a web user navigates. The general practice would be for this to be loaded on the right side of the site.
A school main page will be accessible by selecting a school from the dropdown on the right in wireframe 2, or it can be accessed by entering the folder name (see Site Pages section) for the main page after the site domain and the LA folder name. For example, if the main domain name of the site is www.domain.com then a school main page can be accessed by entering the folder name for the LA page and then the school page www.domain.com/LApagefoldername/Schoolpagefoldername.
The following sections describe the process for creating CMS pages within the system. This process is the same whether Global, LA or school pages are being created
Site Pages
Each page can have other pages below it. As pages are added, the navigation links will automatically be generated accordingly. Site pages can be added, edited, moved or deleted via the admin facility.
Site page management will be broken into a series of tabs:
“Edit Page” tab:
Title
Navigation Title (text that appears in the navigation)
Folder Name
Meta Description
Meta Keywords
Body (edited by a WYSIWYG editor)
“Preferences” tab:
Created by (Dropdown of users - User that created page pre-selected)
Modified By (Dropdown of users - User that modified page pre-selected)
Published By (Dropdown of users - User that published page pre-selected)
Is Space Holder Only (Checkbox)
Created Time
Modified Time
Show in Page Navigation
Enabled
Page Expiry (Date that the page shall expiry - Leave blank for no expiry)
Launch Date (Date the page shall become live - Leave blank for no expiry)
Internal Page/Public Page/Both
When site is browsed all users will see the public site and only see CMS pages that are set as public or both. Internal pages will only be shown when a internal user has logged in.
Navigation Aspects
When a page is selected, it will be displayed within the page according to the design of the site. Depending on the specific design of the style template used, the navigation and/or the breadcrumb trail will indicate to the user their exact location within the website.
Depending on the template selected, the page may show additional sub level navigation independent of the general navigation toolbars.
Disabling and Archiving Pages
If a site page has an expiry date it will only be displayed until that date, after which it will be automatically archived. When viewing the site map of all pages, you will be able to toggle between viewing archived pages or not.. By selecting to view archived pages you will be able to access them in their original location in the site map.
If you wish to temporarily disable a page from being displayed, you will be able to remove the tick from the Enabled checkbox. The page will still be available via the admin facility, although it will not be displayed on the website.
External Link Site Pages
In some cases it may be necessary to add a site page, but instead of providing content for the page you will be able to provide a URL and specify whether the page shall open in the same or a new window.
Link to External URL (enter location of page)
Open in New Window (checkbox)
The link to this site page will appear in the navigation structure in the similar fashion to normal site pages on the same level. The only difference is that the user will be redirected to a different URL (either in the same or new window depending on the option selected).
Cross Linked Site Pages
In some cases it may be necessary to reference an existing site page from a different area on the website. To do this you will be able to select the site page you wish to cross link to.
Site Page (select from dropdown list)
When the page is viewed, only the content from the referenced site page will be displayed (the breadcrumb trail and navigation will not appear as the referenced site page, but as dependent on where the new site page was added in).
CMS Admin User Model
Users will be assigned to one of two user groups. When editing an admin user a User Access Point tab will be available. Access points provide an area of the site or a page or pages that a user has access to:
Editor
Users will be able to add and edit site pages, though they won't be able to publish pages to the live site.
A page will need to be selected for the user to have editor access for. Once a page is selected they will be able to edit this page and any child pages for the page selected.
Publisher
Users will be able to add, edit, delete and disable site pages. Authors will also be able to publish pages to the live site.
A page will need to be selected for the user to have publisher access for. Once a page is selected they will be able to publish this page and any child pages for the page selected.
The ATS system
3.1. Role Specification Library
A library of Role Specification templates will be created within the system. Each LA can create their own descriptions and then these will be available to all schools within the LA. The following will need to be entered for a job description:
LA Local Authority (Dropdown of LAs) - This is only available to Super Users
Job Roles (Select the role or roles that the description applies to)
Title
Description (WYSIWYG Control)
When a vacancy is being created, a control will be available to select a job description and the description will be placed in the detailed description for the vacancy.
Super Users can create items in the library and assign to any/all LAs. A LA can only create items that will be available to their LA and all schools within their LA.
3.2. Managing Vacancies
The system will allow the administrators to maintain a number of job vacancies. For each vacancy, the administrator will need to enter the vacancy information.
When a vacancy is being created by a Super User or a LA User of any type, the following controls will be available:
• LA Local Authority (Dropdown of LAs) - This is only available to Super Users
• School (Dropdown of LAs) - This is only available to LA Super Users/Super Users.
Vacancies will automatically be removed from the site when the closing date has passed. The vacancies will be held past this date in the database but will not be viewable by site members using the site from the front-end. Once vacancies have closed, they will move from `jobs live' to `jobs archived'. Jobs that have been archived can be reinstated simply by changing the start and closing date.
3.2.1. Job Searching (see Q6. Service Capabilities for further detail)
Searching for jobs will not be available from the global section of the site. Only searches can be performed from an LA section or a School section.
On an LA main page, a link will be available to search all jobs within the LA (i.e. all jobs associated to schools within the LA).
On a school main page, a link will be available to search all jobs within the school only.
The detailed search function shall allow site members to search for vacancies based on specific information by entering any or all of the following:
Keywords
School (Dropdown) - Only available on a LA Search Page
Job Roles (Multiple Select)
Minimum Salary (Dropdown)
Maximum Salary (Dropdown)
Each of the three dropdown controls within the search form will contain an `All' option.
Once a site member has entered their criteria for searching, the search may be performed.
Based on the entered search criteria, the system will search through current vacancies in the system, and retrieve those that match the criteria.
3.2.1.2. Job Search Results (Q6 of Service Capabilities for further information)
3.2.1.3. Job details (as above)
3.2.2. Vacancy Attachments (as above)
3.2.2.1 Vacancy Attachments Library (as above)
3.2.3. Internal Vacancies
This module allows vacancies to be flagged as internal only, thereby only allowing authorised users to view and apply for them.
When a vacancy is added to the system it can be flagged as an internal vacancy. This limits the users that can view and apply for the vacancy. This is set in the add vacancy form, and can also be altered for a particular vacancy using the admin panel.
When a user registers, they can tick a checkbox marking them as an internal user. When this is done the user will be presented with two dropdowns. The first will be for the user to select an LA; the user will need to select the LA that they work for or if they are a school employee then the LA that the school is under. The second dropdown will be to select a school that they work for, if they just work for the LA then they will not need to select a school.
A user marking themselves as internal will need to be authorised by an administrator before it is set in the users registration information. This process happens by the sending of an automatic email to a default administration email. If the user selected a school then the email will be sent to a default email for the school; if they only selected an LA then the email will be sent to a default email for the LA. The email will contain a link that will need to be clicked to approve the user as an internal user. Once this is done, the flag is set in the user's registration information and they are enabled to view internal vacancies. This flag can also be set on an existing user by an administrator of the system, if there is required use of the admin panel, so existing registered users can be set to view internal vacancies after they have registered as a non-internal user. The administrator will need to select an LA, and if a school employee then a school as well. When a user logs in who has the Internal flag set, they are permitted to view vacancies which are flagged as internal.
An internal user for a particular school will only see internal vacancies for their school.
An internal user for just an LA and not a particular school will only see internal vacancies for all schools within their LA.
3.2.4. Categorisation
The system will contain categories for vacancies to be categorised by. The categories are:
School Types
Location
Job Role
Salary Minimum
Salary Maximum
Each of the above categories will hold just the title of the category item. The associated fields for a vacancy within Appendix A are dropdown controls. Each dropdown control will be loaded with the list of category items of its associated category.
The system will contain categories that will be used within the application forms employed by the system. The general practice for application forms is to contain an equal opportunity section that will capture information such as ethnic origin, religion and sexual orientation for example. The categories that will be incorporated into the system will be:
Advertising Origin
Disabilities
Ethnic Origin
Gender
Religion
Sexual Orientation
Marital Status
Each of the above categories will hold just the title of the category item and a reference code.
All the items added to all the categories above will be available throughout the system. A school/LA cannot maintain its own list.
Management of category items will only be available to Super Users of the system.
3.2.5. Duplicate Job
The system will allow an existing job template within the system to be duplicated. The duplicated function will copy all job information into a new job record.
3.3. Vacancy Filtering Questions (Refer to Q4. Service Capability Requirements for further details).
3.3.1. Vacancy Filtering Questions Library - as above
3.3.2. Vacancy Filtering Scoring - as per 3.3.
3.4. Interview Questions - as per 3.3.
3.4.1 Interview Questions Library - as per 3.3.
3.5. External Advertising
The system will provide the administrator with the ability to add, edit and delete a list of external adverts via the admin area.
The following information will be stored for each external advert:
Select Advertising Origin (Dropdown)
Cost
Day advert ran
Select which job it applies too
Online/Offline
Site URL
Media Code
Description
This also includes the ability to have this reported as part of the reporting functionality.
When a candidate is completing an application form the list of options for “where did you hear about this vacancy?” will be just the external advertising set for the job or can be the entire list of advertising origins.
This will need to be decided upon development of the system:
Show all advertising origins
Or
Show only external advertising origins
3.5.1 Advertising Reporting
The system will provide for the following reporting requirements:
Cost of advertising per vacancy
Spend with each advertiser
Advertising spend by vacancy type
Cost of advertising by cost centre
Breakdown of costs by media type (on-line/off-line etc)
3.6. Front end User Registration
Individuals will be able to register within the site by entering the following information:
First Name
Surname
House Name/Number (Address 1)
Street Name (Address 2)
City/Town
Postcode
E-Mail Address (Used as username)
Password
Confirmation Password
HTML Format Emails (Checkbox)
Agreement to T&C's (Checkbox)
Once a form has been submitted, it shall be validated. Validation criteria shall include (but not limited to) checking that all of the necessary fields have been entered. The required fields are:
First Name
Surname
House Name/Number
Street Name
City/Town
Postcode
Email Address
Password and Confirmation
We also check that the e-mail address submitted is unique against other e-mail addresses in the system, and that the password is of an appropriate format to ensure security. In most instances our system clients insist on a password being at least 5 characters including both alpha numeric.
Once the registration form has been validated and checked, the registration data shall be stored in the database. If the form fails validation, then the system shall redisplay the registration form, populating it with valid data and providing appropriate guidance to the end user of an areas requiring correction.
When the registration form is successfully submitted, the system shall generate an activation e-mail message to the new member. The e-mail message shall contain a URL link back to the website which is unique to the new member. The new member will have to click on this link to confirm their identity and activate their member account.
Once an account is activated the site member will have access to their account zone. The account zone will allow them to:
Update their personal details
Enter their Jobs by Email criteria
See a log of the application history
3.6.1. Member Log-in
A site member will first have to log-in with their allocated username and password to access their account zone. Once they have entered their user name and password then this information will be validated against the information in the system.
If the user name and password matches that in the system then the site member will be granted access to their account area.
If the user name and password cannot be found in the database, or does not exactly match an existing entry, then they will be prompted to recheck the entered information before trying again.
Depending on where they are coming from within the site, once the site member has successfully logged in they will either go to the resource they want to navigate to (e.g. if they click the apply online link on a vacancy they will go through to the log-in/register page first, then through to the online form). Only by clicking the `my account' link will the system take the site member to their account zone.
The system will also include a facility for the automated retrieval of passwords. A site member will need to enter the email address they registered with to retrieve their password. On submission of the e-mail address, if it exists within the system then an email will be generated containing the password and sent to the entered email address. They will be informed that an e-mail message has been sent via a message on screen. If it doesn't exist, then they will be informed that this account does not exist and to check the spelling of their e-mail address and try again.
3.7. Account Zone
This section of the document defines the features available to the candidate from their account zone.
3.7.1. Update Account Details
Site members will be able to update their account details that they entered when they registered on the site. The information listed within the Registration section of this document details the fields that are updateable by the site member.
3.7.2. Application history
The application history section will list all applications completed or partly completed by the site member.
Any application that is completed by the site member will be able to be viewed, but not changed.
For any applications that have not been completed, the site member can click the application to continue completing the application.
If the vacancy expires before the application is complete, then the site user will be unable to submit it.
Once a vacancy has closed, all submitted applications will be marked as archived.
Each entry within the application history section will display:
Title of vacancy
Last modified date
Closing date of vacancy (if the vacancy has closed then this will be highlighted)
Applicant Status (where they reached in the workflow)
3.7.3. Job alerts via email (JBE)
The system will allow users to subscribe for jobs by email. Users will subscribe with the following fields:
Salary Minimum
Salary Maximum
Job Roles
Local Authority
School Types
Keywords
When the administrator has finished adding vacancies via the admin area, they will be able to click a button to send out the job adverts by email. All vacancies will be flagged as being “sent”, so only new vacancies added afterwards will be sent on the next jobs by email.
A service will be created to send job alerts at a specified time, either daily or weekly (optional) automatically. A JBE will not be sent per school; one email will be sent per site member that has subscribed to the JBE.
Site members will receive information only on jobs within their selected criteria, and will be able to unsubscribe from jobs by email from within the system.
3.7.4. Job alerts by SMS
The system will allow users to subscribe for jobs by SMS. The search criteria used for the jobs by SMS is the selected criteria added in the Jobs by Email section. A checkbox will be available for the user to check if they want to receive the message.
When the administrator has added a job via the admin area, the administrator will be able to click a button to send out the job by SMS. When the button is clicked, the SMS message to be sent will be displayed for the administrator to review, and the system will automatically check that the character limit for the SMS is not exceeded.
Users will receive information only on the number of jobs that match their selected criteria.
3.7.5. Send this job to a friend
Site members and non-members will have the option to send the vacancy information to a friend by entering their name & email address. A link will be automatically emailed to the remote user.
3.7.6. Talent Pool
The site member will have the ability to associate their profile with one or more specialisations.
In addition, each profile shall include the following discretionary data entry fields:
Profile Status (On/Off)
Skills (Text Area)
Qualifications (Text Area)
Experience (Text Area)
EU National (Yes/No)
Entitled to work in UK (Yes/No)
Job Roles (Multiple Select)
Local Authority (Multiple Select)
School Types (Multiple Select)
Salary Minimum (Dropdown)
Salary Maximum (Dropdown)
CV (File Upload)
If Profile Status is on, then their information will be available in the system talent pool.
LA Users will be able to search through the talent pool but will only be able to see members that have associated themselves to the LA of the LA User.
School Users will be able to search through the talent pool but will only be able to see members that have associated themselves to the LA of the School User.
The relevant skills, qualifications and experience fields described above should allow free text to be entered for each.
3.7.6.1. Talent Pool Periodical Updates
For users that have added their details to the talent pool and have set their details to be available in the talent pool, a periodical update will be sent at regular intervals to be defined upon development.. Confirmation emails will be sent to all users that have not updated their talent pool in the previous period.
For talent pool users the email will ask each user if they would still like to be part of the talent pool. A link will be available that the user can user to remove them from the talent pool. By clicking this link (Login required) their talent pool profile will be switched off, and the user will be taken to a page confirming this. A second link will be available to use if they would like to update their profile details, if so this link will take them to their talent pool profile (Login required).
The talent pool listing will not show any users that have marked their profile as not to be included.
An automated service will be used to send out the emails.
The content of the remove from talent pool page that the user goes to if they want their profile to be removed will be editable in the system.
3.7.6.2. Talent Pool Bespoke Emails
Within a talent pool there will be the facility to send users email notifications.
The admin user will be able to filter the list of users within the talent pool by using the provided advanced search tools. Once the list of desired candidates has been found, a section will be available for the admin user to enter content for the email to be sent. The content will be added via a WYSIWYG control.
A series of controls will be available to create the email to be sent to the list of talent pool users:
Return Email Address (i.e. the email added to the from address of the email)
Email Subject
Message Content (Via A WYSIWYG Editor)
Test Email Address
A button will be available to send the email to the test email address so the administrator can check the email. A button will also be available to send the email to the bulk list of users.
3.8. Appoint able Applicant Pool
For any candidates within the system an administrator will be able to add them to the appointable talent pool, this is for unsuccessful candidates that may be suitable for other types of roles. An administrator will be able to select the following to apply to a candidate:
LA
Job Roles
School Types
Minimum Salary
Maximum Salary
When a job is added to the system and all the categorisation has been selected for the job, a list of appoint able candidates will be shown that match this job criteria.
3.9. Single Online Application Form
Candidates are able to save partially completed application forms and then return to them later to add further details at any stage throughout the completion process (as long as the job is still live). There is no limit to the number of times they can do this.
The user will be able to add supporting attachments to the application form if required. Within each container within the application form there is a 250,000 character limit.
The system will provide facilities for the applicant to complete an equal opportunities form and medical questionnaire.
Once submitted, these sections will be kept confidential and therefore not available to the selection panel.
On the final page of the form the next button will be replaced by a “save and preview” button. This will show the complete application in the exact format to be shown to the contact for the position. It will have a button at the end allowing the user to submit the application. A button will also be available for the candidate to take a print friendly hard copy version of their form.
Once the application has been submitted, the data will be published to a HTML document. This document will be made available in the admin area and can also be sent as attachment to the applicant for printing.
An applicant may only edit an application form prior to its submission. Once submitted, the form is no longer editable.
Candidates will receive an acknowledgement email of receipt of online applications forms submitted (only if their email is a valid one). In addition, we will provide a print-friendly screen which users can print off as 'proof of receipt'. In both cases a reference number (application id) will be provided so that users can quote this number if they have a query (this will be searchable within the site's admin area).
The applications themselves will be saved within the database and made available for the partner for whose job they applied.
Should the user wish to apply for another position, the information (their profile) contained/saved from their last submitted application will be available. The system will offer the facility to allow the applicant to overwrite the pre-populated information. Users will also be able to view all previous applications submitted/partially completed and use the information contained within for subsequent applications.
3.9.1. Application Form Expanding Areas
Certain specialist areas of the application form (employment, qualifications & training courses) will have a specialist feature enabling the site member to add items to a list without limit.
To describe how this works, imagine the “previous employment” area of a form. It typically consists of 3-4 fields on a line, which are repeated for each previous occupation. Whereas on a paper form they will be limited to a set number of lines, with this specialist interactive form the site member will be able to add as many lines as they wish. This will be presented to site members simply via an `Add another' button.
A button at the end will add a line. Another button at the end of each line will remove the entry.
3.9.2. Application Submission
On submission of the completed online application form, the system should check that all of the fields that are required are completed. If they are not, then the submission should not be accepted, and the site member prompted to check the specified fields before submitting again.
If all the required fields are completed, then the system should store the application data in the system.
The application data shall be associated with the relevant application form components so that it can be used to populate future application forms.
3.9.3. Application Reminders
Any site members that have only partly completed an application form will automatically receive emails to remind them to complete the form. One email will be sent out the evening after it is left incomplete, and a second email will go out two days before the closing date.
3.9.4. Adding Offline Applications
The system will provide administration users with the ability to enter in application forms received offline.. Once the application form has been received, an administrator user will enter the information into the system.
Once the administrator user has done this, they will then have the ability to attach the scanned document (the user will have to scan it in) to the application form they have just filled in. This scanned application form will then be treated as an attachment to the application. When an application is printed out, the scanned form will be printed also in the form of an attachment to the application, as with a normal attachment.
The process will work as follows:
1. Locate vacancy to add application to.
2. Use `Add' link within the system.
3. Enter the candidate's information, personal details and equalities information.
4. Then upload an electronic copy of the application form.
Or
Via data entry complete the online application form using the paper-based application form.
Currently there are no OCR facilities within the system.
3.9.5. Application Form Attachments
When a Site Member is completing an online application form, they will be given the option to upload between one and five documents to support their application (this is optional - the final DCSF portal application form may not require this functionality). This facility will be offered by way of a browse button, where the Site Member can select a local file to upload and then upload it to the server. When their application is being viewed within the system, the person viewing the application details will have the opportunity to download and view any attachments associated with the application.
3.9.6. Applicant Record Attachments
An administrator will be able to upload as many attachments as they require, such as interview notes, evidence of permission to work in UK and qualifications to each application record. For each attachment the administrator will need to enter the following:
Title
Description
File (Upload Control)
An administrator will have the ability to attach the scanned document (the user will have to scan it in) to the application record. The application record will list all attachments that have been uploaded.
The process will work as follows:
Locate application record to upload scanned document to.
Use `Add' link that is part of the application attachment section within the application record.
Enter a title and description
Then upload an electronic copy of the file.
Currently there are no OCR facilities within the system.
3.10. Audit Trail
All actions within the administration facility will be logged. Whenever an administrator adds edits or deletes any information related to vacancies or applications in the administration facility a log of the action will be created.
Each log will store the following:
Date/Time Stamp
Action Type
Object Type
User
Modified Fields
Previous Values
New Values
3.10.1. Vacancy Creation Audit Trail
When a vacancy is created within the system, an audit log will be created for this action. The log shall capture the following information:
Route (The route the vacancy was added: Manual, third party import, TCC)
Vacancy Name
Vacancy ID
Vacancy Reference
User ID (User that created vacancy - if imported then no id will be entered)
User Name (User that created vacancy - if imported then the name of the importing system)
Date/Time (Date stamp of date time that the vacancy was created)
Super Users will be able to see all logs, LA Users will only be able to see logs for schools within their LA, and School Users will only see logs for their school.
3.11. System Workflow
The Tribal workflow system is built up of a number of modules. Each is made up of a number of stages. An example of a module would be Shortlisting, which is made up of the following stages:
School Standard User Shortlist
School HR Approve Shortlist
School HR Manage Rejection List
The recruitment system will initially accommodate ten modules as standard, and each module can comprise up to three stages. This will accommodate the generic recruitment process map.
The modules for the recruitment system will be pre-defined and built during the development process. These modules will not be user-editable by the system. If changes are required to a module(s) or new modules are needed, this will require additional development and is not covered within this proposal.
3.11.1. Module Documents
Certain stages within a module can potentially generate a document if this stage has been defined to do so. Each document generated will use its own template to generate the document (e.g. Invite to Interview).
Each document that is required to be generated within any of the workflow modules will require the template to be provided prior to the development process. The template must be an RTF file type.
Each workflow document template will be standard in terms of content.
3.11.2. Workflow View
The workflow will have two different views depending on the type of user that is logged in. If they are a School Standard User then they will not be allowed to see applicant names, email address, or personal details, only applicant ID, type of application (online or scanned), and the action required (process, reject, accept etc).
If they are a School HR User, LA HR User is logged in they will see all details on applicant.
3.11.3. Workflow Audit Trail
The system will provide the administrator with the ability to view the audit trail of any job that is in the workflow process.
The system will allow the user to take the following two approaches:
Click on a user within the workflow for a particular job.
The system will return all the different stages the user has entered
Within each stage the full history of what date an applicant entered the stage, status and has the ability to view the notes and documents generated.
Click on a stage for a particular job
The system will return a list of all the applicants showing the date the applicant entered the stage and their status. They also have the ability to view the notes and documents generated.
3.12. Interviews
3.12.1. Vacancy Interview Slots
For each vacancy within the system a series of interview slots can be created. Each interview slot created shall have the following information:
Date
Time
Location (Text)
Interview slots can only be created for a vacancy once it has closed and has passed into the workflow process. Within the interview stage of the workflow, a link will be available that will take the administrator to the vacancy slots section of a vacancy. Within the admin user shall create the interview slots.
3.12.2. Workflow Invite to Interview Stage
At the invite to interview stage of the workflow, the administrator can select the candidates to invite to interview and also which candidates will be able to select an interview slot. A button will be available that will send an email using a default email template and an attachment will be included that will be generated from a standard document template.
3.12.3. Workflow Interview Slot Stage
Within this stage the admin user will be able to select an interview slot for each candidate, or select the action that the candidate has declined the interview.
Those candidates that were marked to select their own interview slot will be able to log into their My Account Zone and select a slot for the vacancy from a list that has been created for the vacancy. The candidate will also be able to add a note if they have any special requires for the interview. A decline action will also be available if they want to decline the interview.
The admin user will be able to select a slot for a candidate even if they are able to select their own slot from their My Account Zone. This will prevent the process being delayed if the candidate has not logged in to select a slot.
3.13. Workflow Clearance Checks
System Super Users will be able to manage a generic list of clearance checks e.g. Personal Reference, CRB. A clearance check will require a title and a brief description to summarise the clearance check.
3.13.1 Vacancy Clearance Checks
A vacancy that is added to the system will need a list of clearance checks selecting from the generic list.
Once the clearance checks are added and the vacancy is in Workflow, a School HR user will be able to mark the completion of each clearance check. For each clearance check assigned to a vacancy, the School HR user will need to enter the following:
Date Sent For
Date Cleared
Outcome
The outcome responses will be:
Awaiting Response
Passed
Failed
Needing Clarification
A stage within workflow will need to accommodate for clearance checks, but these can be set outside the workflow process. The list of clearance checks set for a vacancy will be available in the vacancy management screen.
When a clearance check has passed, this will trigger an email to the standard school user that is associated to the vacancy to notify them that an action has taken place.
A standard school user will be able to see a summary of the clearance checks from the vacancy management screen, but will not be able to edit any clearance check information (read only access).
3.14. Microsoft Outlook Calendar Notes Integration
When there are meetings scheduled within the workflow (e.g. Interviews), the Standard School User will be able to view a list of calendar notes for the meetings as links. Each link will be to a calendar note. The calendar note will be created with a date, time and subject to match the meeting details. When the user clicks on the note link, they will be presented with the option to open, save or cancel the item (the same as a download link). If they choose to open the item, the standard outlook calendar window will open. The calendar note will contain the date/time and the user will then need to click the standard outlook save option. This item will then be saved to outlook for the user that is currently logged in.
The system will not be able to create a calendar item for anyone other than the current user or dynamically create any attendees. Once stored in Outlook, the user can follow the standard Outlook practices for inviting attendees that would be external to the recruitment system.
This process only works for the current user and their outlook login. It is functionally the same as them downloading the note and then opening it up within their Outlook when logged in.
3.15. Online Referencing within workflow
The referees section within the applications forms will need to have a checkbox control for candidates to mark each referee as agreeing to receive an email in regards to referencing.
Within the workflow there should be a referee module for the system to generate documents in relation to contact referees.
At this stage the administrator within the workflow will be able to see the referees that have been entered by each candidate. This will display such information as name, title, addresses, email address, and telephone number. An administrator will be able to override this information if required.
Normally this stage will generate documents that can be printed and posted to each referee.
This online referencing module will allow emails to be sent directly to a referee and for the referee to use an online interface to provide the required information.
A referee can only be sent this email if the candidate has indicated that the referee is happy to receive an email in regards to a reference being sought.
Each candidate within this stage of the workflow will have a button to send the email to each referee. The button will not be available for a referee that has been provided and did not accept for the email method to be used.
This button will send and email to the referee with any documents that were generated. The email will contain default text.
The email will also contain a link. This will include a token for the referee to click and they will be taken to a reference form. The token within the link will be validated against the token stored with the referee.
This reference form will contain a series of questions for the referee to provide information for. This form will be standard and will be used for all online referencing. The questions within the form will need to be provided prior to the development process.
When a referee has completed the form, an email will be sent to the administration user that sent the request within the workflow process. The candidate within the workflow stage will show that a referee has completed the online form. A link will be available for an administration user to be able to view the information provided by the referee and print.
A flag will identify each candidate within this stage of the workflow that has had one or more referees contacted via this method, and responses from the referee or referees have not been received. The candidate will not be able to be progressed further in the workflow process until this is received. A button will be available for an administrator to override this, if the referee is not responding. This action will cancel the request, so if the referee does click the link within the email after this point, they will be taken to a page that will inform them that the reference request has expired.
3.16. Workflow SMS
SMS messages will be sent to candidates at pre-determined points within workflow. These points will be built at the point of development and will be in various points within workflow modules.
Examples of when an SMS would be sent to a candidate would be when they are shortlisted, invited for interview, their references are being checked, and offered the position.
3.17. Site Survey - see Q7 of Service Capability Requirements for more detail.
3.17.1 Survey Campaigns - as per 3.15.
3.18. Equal Opportunities Statistics - see Q8. and Q9. of Service Capability Requirements for further detail.
3.19. Applying Secure Socket Layer (SSL to the entire site).
3.20. Reporting - see Q13 of Service Capability Requirements for further detail.
3.20.1. School Reports - as per 3.19.
3.20.1. Multi Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.20.2. Equal Opps Monitoring - Individual vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.3. Equal Opps Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.20.2. Local Authority Report - as per 3.19
3.20.2.1. Individual Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.20.2.2. Multi Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.20.2.3. Summary Campaign Report - Multi Vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.2.4. School Campaign Report - Multi Vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.2.5. Equal Opps Monitoring - Individual vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.2.6. Equal Opps Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.20.3. Regional Report - as per 3.19
3.20.3.1. Regional Campaign - Multi Vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.3.2. Equal Opps Monitoring - Individual vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.3.3. Equal Opps Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.20.4. National Report - as per 3.19
3.20.4.1. National Campaign - Multi Vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.4.2. Equal Opps Monitoring - Individual Vacancy - as per 3.19
3.20.4.3. Equal Opps Monitoring - Multi Vacancy Report - as per 3.19
3.21. Online Assessment Integration
The following details the functionality related with integrating with the proposed Online Assessment Centre.
3.21.1. User Permissions
New user permissions will be available to be set on admin user accounts within the ATS. An account can be set with an assessment level. The assessment level will determine what action the user can perform in terms of assessments. There are four levels of user permission.
3.21.2. Job Settings
A new setting will be added to the job edit page. This new setting will determine if online assessments can be used for candidates that apply. This can only be set by admin users that have a level 2, level 3 or level 4 permission.
Once a job has been set to use assessments then the following actions will need to occur:
3.21.3. Select Tests
The tests available to the system will be listed and the admin user will need to select at least one test for candidates to complete.
3.21.4. Select Order Users
This control will list all admin users that have the permission levels of 2, 3 or 4. These users will only have permission to send requests for assessments to take place
3.21.5. See Results Users
This control will list all admin users that have the permission levels of 3 or 4.These users will only have permission to see results of assessments
3.21.6. Assessment Log
All assessments made from the ATS will be stored in a log. The log will have three sub sections:
3.21.6.1. Assessments Requested
This will list all assessments that have been requested (Will not include assessments that have had results returned, or assessments that have been flagged as errors)
3.21.6.2. Assessment Results Returned
This will list all assessments that have had results returned
3.21.6.3. Assessment Errors
Will list assessments that have tried to be sent but not been successful. A button will be available for the assessment request to be re-sent
If jobs have been set to use online assessment then the proposed method for recruitment systems to forward candidates for online assessment can be in one of two ways:
3.21.7. Workflow (Assessment Stage)
This will be a module available within the workflow as per the generic recruitment process.
For all candidates to be sent for online assessment and for the interpreting of results. The two stages will be:
Send for Assessment
Interpret Results
3.21.7.1. Send for Assessment Stage
Only users that have been selected as the Order Users on the vacancy can perform this action. The system will list all candidates at this stage.
Each candidate will have a button to send the candidate for assessments
This will create assessment requests and move the candidate to the next stage within workflow.
If more than one test is applied to the job then an assessment will be created for each test.
Each candidate will have a button to bypass the sending of assessments
This will move the candidate to the next stage without going through any assessment centre process.
If more than one test is applied to the job then this button will bypass all tests
3.21.7.2. Interpret Results
Only users that have been selected as the See Results Users on the vacancy can perform this action
The solution will list all candidates at this stage. A link per candidate will display a form that will list each test applied to the job.
Each test will have a link or links to view the results of the test. When clicked these results will be opened in a new window.
For each test the user will have a comments field and a dropdown to score the candidate on that test
If a test has not been completed (Results not returned) then this message will be displayed
Links to results of a test will only be available to users that have the level to view the results for that type of test (i.e. Type A and B tests)
The scoring of tests is only done once, so if the job has more than one See Results user then this process is not repeated for each user. Only one comment and score can be set per test.
Once comments and scores have been set on a candidate then the candidate can be moved to the next stage
If a test has not been completed then this will need to be entered in the comments field for the test.
3.22. Media Partner Selection Surveys
At the end of the life of a vacancy, the school user associated to the vacancy will need to complete a survey. This will capture data to report on value for money and customer satisfaction.
When application workflow has been closed, the school user will be sent an email with a link to complete a survey. An email will be sent for each agency that was selected for the vacancy in the Media Partner Selection process. Each of the following questions will need the user to select a rating out of 5 (5 being the best score). The following questions will be available (more can be added):
Cost per requisition
Time to fill
Effectiveness
Value for money
Professionalism
Responsiveness
Note: The above is only an example list. The system will allow for ten questions, which will need to be provided at development.
A comments field will be available for comments to be added.
The survey is then linked to the agency and the media type that the agency was used for.
Within the Media Partner Selection process, an administrator will be able to visually see a rating for the Media agency. The overall score will be an average of the scores given to the questions above.
The School or LA administrator will be able to also see an average score for each question above.
In addition, the administrator will be able to see an overall score based on the job role of the vacancy. So if the vacancy is a Head Teacher role, then the score will be based on vacancies that have the same job role that has been carried out by the agency.
Note: If an agency has been set as being able to offer Media print and print services, then the agency will have a different overall score for each.
3.23. Media Partner Selection
This process is to select the method of external communication to promote the vacancy. The options available will be:
To utilise a media agency
To go directly to the print media
To go directly to a job board
The process of selecting a method will be as per the generic recruitment process map.
3.23.1 Media Agency
The workflow of media types of “Media Agency” will require an agency that should be communicated with as part of the system. This will be the agency that is awarded Lot 2 of this contract.
The system will only have one agency. The agency can only be configured by Super Users only and will require the following information:
Agency Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact First Name
Main Contact Surname
Main Contact Number
Main Contact Fax
Main Contact Email
Pricing URL
Pricing Document (File Upload)
The agency will have one Super Agency User that will need to be set within the system. This Super User will need the following information entering:
Username (Email)
Password
3.23.2. Media Agency Users
Part of the Media Partner Selection process will require actions to be carried out by members of the agency. Agency users will need to be created within the system to allow them to login and process required actions. An agency user will require the following:
First Name
Surname
Username (Email Address)
Password
Enabled
3.24. Direct Print/Press (offline)
The workflow of media type of “Print” will require Direct Press bodies to be selected (e.g. Gloucestershire Echo) that should be communicated with as part of the system.
Direct Press will need to be created within the system. Direct Press can only be created by Super Users only. A direct press will require the following information:
Direct Press Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact First Name
Main Contact Surname
Main Contact Number
Main Contact Fax
Main Contact Email
Pricing URL
Pricing Document (File Upload)
Enabled
A list of direct press will be presented to a school user when going through the Media Partner Selection process if a school decides to use this approach.
3.24.1 Direct Press Classification
If a school decides to adopt this route of advertising a search facility will be made available to allow the administrator to hone in on the most appropriate print options. A direct press body can be selected with a list of classifications for the direct press. The classification items will be, for example, national press, local press and specialist press. In time, ratings will be available for the various print options based upon experiences of previous advertisers.
A direct press can have any number of classifications.
The classification list will be managed by system Super Users only, and they will just need to enter a title for each item.
When an administrator is selecting direct press they will be able to filter the list by selecting a classification.
3.24.2. Direct Press User
A direct press body will need to have a user who can access the system to be able to carry out the appropriate actions as per the generic recruitment process map. A direct press body will only have one user, and this is entered with the direct press information detailed above. The following information will need to be entered:
Username (Email Address)
Password
3.25. Job Boards
The workflow of media type “Job Board” will require job boards to be selected by a school user for the vacancy to be sent to.
Job Boards can only be created by Super Users. A job board will require the following information:
Job Board Name/Title
Brief Description of Job Board
Job Board Email
Enabled
3.25.1. Job Board Classification
A job board can be selected with a list of classification items, that could for example be generalist.
A job board can have any number of classifications.
The classification list will be managed by system Super Users only, and they will just need to enter a title for each item.
When an administrator is selecting job boards they will be able to filter the list by selecting a classification.
In time, ratings will be available for the various print options based upon experiences of previous advertisers.
3.26. Media Partner Selection Process
The administrator will need to select the approach they want to use. If no media types are selected then the Media Partner Selection Process will be bypassed.
An administrator will be able to select Media Agency or Direct Press, but not both. Job boards can be selected irrelevant if media agency or direct press is selected.
3.26.1. Media Agency
If the Media Agency option is selected, the first step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to the agency. The information could be, for example, vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button, and an email will be sent to the super user of the agency. The email will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the agency super user to the item within the system. They will need to login with their user name and password set in the system.
Please Note: An agency Super User will be able to login separately and see all vacancy requests that have been sent to the agency.
3.26.2. Media Agency Super User Actions
The action of the agency Super User will be to select an agency user to assign or channel the vacancy to carry out the necessary work. Once the agency user is selected and confirmed, this will trigger an email to the user selected. The email will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the agency user to the item within the system. They will need to login with their user name and password set in the system.
Please Note: An agency user will be able to login separately and see all vacancy requests that have been assigned to them.
3.26.3. Media Agency User Actions
An agency user when viewing a vacancy request will see the vacancy information. The main action of an agency user will be to work with the copy and logos provided in order to issue a proposal or quote to advertise in the requested publication etc. This will be done by the agency user uploading the proposal as a file.
An agency user will be able to perform two actions on a vacancy item:
Firstly, they will be able to add comments and send them back to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has added comments requesting additional information.
The administrator will then be able to read the comments and respond back to the media agency. A comments field will be available for the administrator to enter additional information and send to the agency. This will trigger an email to the agency user.
This process can be repeated as many times as required. The system will store and display all comments in a history log
Secondly, they'll be able to upload a proposal document and send to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has upload a proposal document for approval
The administrator will be able to download the proposal and see any comments added by the agency user. If the administrator feels further work is required they will be able to send back to the agency user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
3.26.4. Administrator User Actions
Once the proposal has been received and the administrator is happy with the documents provided, they will need to select that they are happy to proceed with the agency.
The administrator will need to enter a PO and this will trigger an email to the agency user as confirmation.
3.26.5. Advert Approval workflow
The next step would be for the agency user to generate an advert proof for the administrator to approve. The agency user will upload the advert proof and submit it back the administrator. This will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator, who will then need to approve the advert copy. If the administrator feels further work is required they will be able to send back to the agency user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Once the advert copy is approved by the administrator this will trigger an email to the direct press user to notify them of the approval.
Note: An agency Super User will be able to carry out the actions of any agency user.
3.27. Print
If the Print option is selected, then the administrator will be able to search to find a list of relevant Print media to contact directly.
The administrator will need to select the direct press that they want to work with.
Once the direct press or direct presses are selected, the next step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to each direct press body selected. The information could be, for example, vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button and an email will be sent to the email set against the one direct press user. This will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the direct press user to the item within the system. They will need to login with the username and password set in the system.
Please Note: A Direct Press user will be able to login and see all vacancy requests that have been sent to their direct press body.
3.27.1 Direct Press User Actions
A direct press user will see the vacancy information when viewing a vacancy request. The main action of the user will be to issue a proposal. This will be done by the user uploading the proposal as a file.
A direct press user will be able to perform two actions on a vacancy item:
Firstly, they will be able to add comments and send back to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has added comments, requesting additional information
The administrator will then be able to read the comments and respond back to the direct press. A comments field will be available for the administrator to enter additional information and send to the direct press body. This will trigger an email to the direct press user
This process can be repeated as many times as required. The system will store and display all comments in a history log.
Secondly, they will be able to upload a proposal document and send it to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the direct press has upload a proposal document for approval
The administrator will be able to download the proposal and see any comments added by the direct press user. If they feel further work is required then they will be able to send back to the direct press user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Note: The above process will be carried out for each direct press body that was selected by the administrator.
3.27.2. Administrator User Actions
Once the proposals of each direct press selected have been received and the administrator is happy with the documents provided, they will need to select the direct press or direct presses that they want to proceed with.
The administrator will need to enter a PO for each direct press and this will trigger an email to the related direct press user as confirmation.
3.27.3. Advert Approval
The next step would be for the direct press user to generate an advert proof for the administrator to approve. The direct press user will upload the advert proof and submit back the administrator. This will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator, who will then need to approve the advert copy. If they feel further work is required they will be able to send back to the direct press user for clarification or for changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
Once the advert copy is approved by the administrator this will trigger an email to the direct press user to notify them of the approval.
3.28. Job Boards
If the Job Board option is selected, then the administrator will be presented with a list of job boards that are available. A search function will also be available enabling them to search for job boards by their classification (e.g. Generalist or Niche).
The administrator will need to select the job boards that they want the vacancy to be sent to. Once a job board or job boards are selected, the next step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to each job board selected. The information will be, for example, vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button, and an email will be sent to each selected job board. The email will be sent to the email address set for each job board. The “From” address of the email will be set with the username of the administrator performing the action. This will allow for the job board upon receiving the email to reply directly to the administrator if required. This process will not be tracked in the system.
3.28.1. Job Board Apply Now URLS
For each job board that a vacancy is sent to, the system will generate a unique URL that will be sent with the vacancy. This URL will be for job boards to use as the “Apply Now” link. This will take users from the job board that they have clicked the link on, to the ATS system for the user to complete the application form. The user will need to login/register to complete the application form.
3.28.2. Click and Application Tracking
The reason why a unique URL is generated for each job board per vacancy is to be able to track the source of each application that is submitted, if the candidate came from a job board.
If a user comes from clicking the “Apply Now” link on a job board they will be redirected to the ATS system, which will then log the hit. The system will store the job board that the user came from and the vacancy they are interested in. The user will be taken straight to the application form for the vacancy. When the user is redirected to the application form, they will need to log-in to complete the application form. If they are not a registered user they will need to register on the site. Once they have successfully registered they will be taken back to the application form to complete it. This will only work for the same session. If the user begins the application form, the system will log the user's application to the job board they came from. So if the user completes and submits the application, the system will be able to track it.
This will allow the system to provide the following information on a per vacancy basis:
Vacancy A
Job Board Application Hits Application Submissions
A 5 3
B 2 0
C 8 8
3.28.3. Job Board Updates
Once a vacancy has gone live, if an administrator needs to adjust any vacancy information then they can do so. If they want to notify the job boards, then the administrator will need to click a button to send an email to each job board. The email will contain the new vacancy information; the subject of the email should inform the recipient that this is a vacancy update request and not a new posting. The “From” address will be set with the administrator's username (Email address). This will allow for the job board to communicate directly with the administrator that performed the action. This process will not be logged by the system.
3.28.4. Job Board Ratings
When an administrator selects job boards, they will be able to see an overview of statistics for each.. The information displayed per job board will be:
Average Clicks
The average number of users coming from the job board. This will be the total number of clicks divided by the number of jobs sent to the job board.
Job Role Average Clicks
The average number of users coming from the job board for jobs with the same specification as the one being created. This will be the total number of clicks divided by the number of jobs sent to the board for the vacancy being created
Submissions Percentage
A percentage of the number of completed submissions of applications submitted by users redirected form the job board
Job Role Submissions Percentage
A percentage of the number of completed submissions of applications from users redirected form the job board with the same role as the one being created
Media Partner Selection Surveys
At the end of the life of a vacancy, the school user associated to the vacancy will need to complete a survey. This will capture data reporting on value for money and customer satisfaction.
When application workflow has been closed, the school user will be sent an email with a link to complete a survey. An email will be sent for each direct press that was selected for the vacancy or the agency in the Media Partner Selection process. Each of the following questions will ask the user to select a rating out of 5 (5 being the best score). The following questions will be available:
Cost per requisition
Time to fill
Effectiveness
Value for money
Professionalism
Responsiveness
Note: The above is only an example list. The system will allow for ten questions which will need to be provided at development.
A comments field will be available for comments to be added.
The survey is then linked to the agency or the direct press body.
Within the Media Partner Selection process, an administrator will be able to see a rating for the agency or a direct press body. The overall score will be an average of the scores given to the questions above.
The administrator will also be able to see an average score for each question above.
In addition, the administrator will be able to see an overall score based on the job role of the vacancy. So if the vacancy is a Head Teacher role, the score will be based on vacancies that have the same job role carried out by the agency or the direct press body.
3.29. Recruitment Services
The recruitment services process will be for the administrator (school user) that is processing the vacancy to decide if they want to use the solution offered by the Recruitment Services Agency as per Lot 3 of the contract.
The process of deciding to use the services of the Recruitment Service Agency will be as per the generic recruitment process map.
3.29.1. Recruitment Service Agency
The system will only have one recruitment service agency. The agency can only be configured by Super Users only. The recruitment service agency will require the following information:
Agency Name
Address 1
Address 2
City/Town
Postcode
Main Contact First Name
Main Contact Surname
Main Contact Number
Main Contact Fax
Main Contact Email
The recruitment service agency will have one agency Super User that will need to be set within the system. The agency Super User will need to enter the following information:
Username (Email)
Password
3.29.2. Recruitment Service Agency Users
The services offered by the recruitment service agency will require actions to be carried out by members of the agency. Recruitment service agency users must be created within the system to allow them to log-in and process required actions. A recruitment service agency user will require the following:
First Name
Surname
Username (Email Address)
Password
Enabled
3.29.3. The Process
The administrator will need to select if they want to use the services of the Recruitment Service Agency. If they do not, the Recruitment Services process will be bypassed.
If the services of the Recruitment Service Agency are taken, the first step will display the vacancy information that has been entered previously in the vacancy workflow. This information is what will be sent to the recruitment service agency. The information will comprise, for example, vacancy title, description, job role and hiring date.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button, and an email will be sent to the Super User of the recruitment service agency. This will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the recruitment agency Super User to the item within the system. They will need to login with their user name and password set in the system.
Full contact details for the administrator sending the request will be provided to the recruitment services agency, as we expect a verbal dialogue to take place to determine what level of service is required.
Please Note: An recruitment agency Super User will be able to log-in separately and see all vacancy requests that have been sent to the agency.
3.29.4. Recruitment Service Agency Super User Actions
The action of the recruitment service agency Super User will be to select an recruitment service agency user assigned to the vacancy to carry out the necessary work. Once the agency user is confirmed, this will trigger an email to the user selected. The email will contain the vacancy information, and a link will be included that will take the user to the item within the system. They will need to log-in with their username and password set in the system.
Please Note: A recruitment service agency user will be able to login separately and see all vacancy requests that have been assigned to them.
3.29.5. Agency User Actions
A recruitment service agency user when viewing a vacancy request will see the vacancy information. The main action of an agency user will be to issue a proposal. This will be done by the user uploading the proposal as a file.
An agency user will be able to perform two actions on a vacancy item:
Firstly, they will be able to add comments and send back to the administrator that created the item. This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator to inform them that the agency has added comments requesting additional information
The administrator will then be able to read the comments and be able to respond back to the agency. A comments field will be available for the administrator to enter additional information and send to the agency. This will trigger an email to the agency user
This process can be repeated as many times as required. The system will store and display all comments in a history log
Secondly, they will be able to upload a proposal document and send it to the administrator that created the item This action will trigger an email that will be sent to the administrator informing them that the agency has uploaded a proposal document for approval
The administrator will be able to download the proposal to see any comments added by the agency user. If the administrator feels further work is required then they will be able to send back to the agency user for clarification or changes to be made. The administrator will have a comments field to enter the request.
3.29.6. School Administrator User Actions
Once the proposals of each agency selected have been received and the administrator is happy with the documents provided, they will need to inform the agency that they want to proceed.
The administrator will need to enter a PO and this will trigger an email to the recruitment service agency user as confirmation.
Once this confirmation is set, the recruitment service agency user will be able to fulfil various tasks for the vacancy.
They will be able to login to administration area to do the following:
View all vacancies that they are assigned to
See all applications for the vacancies they are assigned to
Carry out workflow tasks within applicant workflow
Run national reports, but only including vacancies they are assigned to
Service Delivery Requirements
Q1 - Please outline your implementation plan/timetable for the initial scale up and implementation You can assume that the initial implementation team might be approx. six Local Authorities and several schools; although we reserve the right to flex the scale of this user group.
Tribal will assign a dedicated project team to work with DCSF's own implementation team to achieve the objectives detailed in the specification.
Project Management
Our approach to project management follows many principles and models used within Prince methodologies. It encompasses file storage, developing a project plan including defining project goals and objectives, specifying tasks or how goals will be achieved, identifying what resources are needed, and associating budgets and timelines for completion with controls throughout. It also includes implementing the project plan, along with careful controls to stay on the "critical path", that is, to ensure the plan is being managed according to plan and to the expected quality.
Tribal places a great deal of focus towards effective project management. In our experience, unless project teams from both organisations are focused on timescales and delivery milestones for items such as creative design, website content and technical interfaces, delays can occur. We will work with you to ensure this doesn't happen.
In summary:
• We will interface seamlessly with the client's chosen methodology such as PRINCE2.
• The plan is appropriate to the situation
• The project is meticulously planned
• The plan is clearly articulated and crisply executed
• Clients are fully supported
• The project is delivered to time, budget, specification and satisfaction.
The application of quality-driven processes to development and implementation have delivered outstanding results:
• Tribal has a proven track record of successfully implementing ATS solutions
• References are available from ALL clients
• To date, every Tribal implementation has been delivered on time and to budget
Strong project management with regular communication is critical to the whole project running smoothly and nothing being left to chance. A hand-picked development team will work on your system, led by a systems analyst who will collaborate with the project manager from start to finish: from requirements gathering and specification to system development and handover.
At Tribal, our software solutions are flexible and will be configured to meet your specific requirements. The full technical specification of the modules that the DCSF is purchasing will form part of the contract sign off - these can be found in Q16 of the Service Capabilities response. Having this signed off and agreed at the front of the process is key to a smooth implementation.
Your specification requirements are not significantly different to many of the systems we have recently launched or are currently working on. Because our systems are flexible and the overwhelming majority of customisation can be achieved by configuration, implementation is rapid, high quality and value-for-money.
At Tribal we understand that e-recruitment is often a catalyst for re-engineering recruitment processes so we will be flexible and provide support to the implementation team when reviewing current processes, defining best practice and drawing up the final agreed workflows. With our support we'd expect to sign off all workflow processes quickly, establish a common application and agree all workflow letter templates and email trigger content.
Agreeing the overall look and feel of the candidate portal is critical to a smooth and timely implementation. To this end we would dedicate additional resources from our extensive creative studio to work with the implementation team to:
Take a brief
Work up concepts
Modify concepts
Work up into HTML (these would be made available via our design development
Agree and sign off final HTML
Apply to our recruitment package.
We'd expect the implementation team to dedicate resources at the user acceptance stage of the project. This will take place once our internal review, testing and debugging is complete.
We will make the system available on our development server ready for user acceptance testing by the Implementation team.
Two rounds of changes/amends are included within this tender. With our support the Implementation Team will be expected to spend time working through all areas of the solution carrying out all possible scenarios (which we can supply if needed at no cost) to ensure what we have delivered back to you meets your requirements.
Change requests should be made to Tribal using the Request for Change / Control Document shown below.
Tribal will make small tweaks free of charge and quote for any more complicated extensions to the system (that are outside the original specification). Once the changes have been implemented, we will again make the system available on our demonstration server and accept a second and final list of changes.
Change requests should be made to Tribal using the Change Control Document - please see Attachment 1 at the end of this document.
Timetable for delivery
Contract Award 17th of April
20th of April - 22nd of May - Scoping and agreeing solution configuration with Implementation team (application forms, workflow, letter templates, email triggers etc) and develop and agree front end design.
25th of May - 14th of August - System Configuration and Internal QA.
17th of August - 18th of September - User Acceptance Testing
Ready to go live from the 21st of September
Quality Management
We have a dedicated quality management team that continually reviews service performance in terms of individuals and wider service level commitments.
Our people live and breathe e-recruitment and routinely do things right. As we've already shown, only suitably qualified members of staff will be employed to deliver this project to ensure a `right first time' approach. The same Tribal staff have been involved in the delivery of over 250 public sector recruitment web sites in the last 36 months.
Levels of inspection and change control procedure
To ensure quality and a `right first time' approach our change control process consists of a series of steps that conform to best practice. If a formal request is received for something to be changed, this will probably be made to either the project manager or co-ordinator during or after the project at a review meeting. The project manager will then record and categorise that request, and decide who should make an impact evaluation. This will more than likely be either our head programmer or systems analyst. They will then undertake their risk analysis and make a judgement on who should carry out the change. This will probably be one of the programming team. Their first job would be to plan the change in detail, and also construct a failure plan if it all goes wrong. If their plan is agreed then they will carry out the change and have it tested. When this is approved the modification can be implemented, and when the Implementation team agrees all is OK, the job can be closed.
This diagram shows the steps involved in the actual change control process:
Chain of command
The chain of command will primarily start with the project manager and/or project coordinator. Communication will be made with the technical/development team either verbally or electronically through email.
Implementation testing
As we've already stated, the final stage of development obviously involves rigorous testing which would be conducted by individuals from across the Tribal group.
Lead time analysis
The amount of lead-time required by Tribal to implement a change depends on the nature of the change required. Whereever possible we've developed our solution so items can be controlled by the client.
If the change is outside the technical specification provided the project manager/coordinator will record and categorise the change request and decide who should make an impact evaluation and lead-time evaluation. This will probably be either our head programmer or systems analyst. They will then make their lead-time analysis and feed back to the project manager/coordinator that will, in turn get back to the client.
Complaint/dispute resolution
If a dispute arises between DCSF and Tribal in connection with or arising out of the agreement, the parties shall each use reasonable endeavours to resolve such dispute by means of prompt, bona fide discussion at a managerial level appropriate to the dispute in question.
In the event that such a dispute is not resolved within seven days of being referred to a managerial level for discussion, both parties may refer it to their senior officer for resolution, and the same shall meet for discussion within 14 days thereafter or such longer period as the parties may agree.
In the event that such a dispute is not resolved, it shall be referred at the request of either party to the decision of a single expert appointed by agreement between the parties within 14 days of one party requesting expert determination. Failing which someone will be appointed on the application of either party by the then President of the Law Society of England and Wales.
The costs of any expert determination pursuant to this clause shall be paid as determined by the expert.
Neither party shall be prevented from, or delayed in, seeking orders for specific performance or interlocutory of final injunctive relief on an ex parte basis or otherwise as a result of the terms of this clause. Such provisions will not apply in respect of any circumstances where such remedies are sought.
Minimising complaints/mistakes
Listed below are the steps we take to minimise mistakes and conform to a `right first time' approach.
Ensuring that the technical specification is signed off before the project starts, which certifies that the product we're producing meets your requirements exactly
Making sure the project is resourced correctly
Ensuring all members of the project team understand the brief, have the right tools and are committed to quality from the top down
Monitoring progress by holding regular development and project review meetings
Guaranteeing a thorough testing period
Only releasing the product to you for approval once our quality improvement team (which consists of technical and non technical staff across Tribal) have approved it
Ensuring if problems occur that we have the corrective tools in place to put right any faulty work
Correcting faults/bugs
During development, Tribal provides two periods of amends within the project plan. If faulty work is identified during these periods then this work will be carried out as a priority as to ensure the project delivery timescale does not slip.
Reviewing complaints
Tribal is committed to providing good quality services. We do not look on complaints as unwanted. In fact, they may help us see where our services or procedures might be improved. Usually, the best staff member to talk to will be the person who dealt with the matter you are concerned about (which will be the project manager), as they will be in the best position to help you quickly and to put things right. If they are not available, or you would prefer to approach someone else, then you can ask for the contract manager.
We will try to resolve the problem on the spot if we can. If we can't do this - for example, because information we need is not to hand - then we will take a record of your concern and arrange the best way and time for getting back to you. This will be within the agreed timescales outlined within the SLA.
Attachment 1 - RFC Form
Request for Change
|
||||||
RFC Date: |
|
RFC No: |
|
|||
Customer Name: |
|
|||||
Contract Ref./Date: |
|
|||||
Site Address: |
http:// |
|||||
Requested By: |
|
Priority (H/M/L): |
|
|||
RFC Title: |
|
|||||
Details of change: |
|
|||||
Cost Summary
|
Brief Description |
Cost £ |
||||
|
Work has been estimated to XXX hours
|
|
||||
Reason for change:
|
|
|||||
Date requested Live Upload: |
|
|||||
This Request for Change (RFC) is accepted as a permanent modification to the contract agreement dated above. |
||||||
Approved on behalf of Client Name: _____________________________________ Position: ___________________________________ Dated: _____________________________________ Signed: ____________________________________
|
Approved on behalf of Tribal Name: ____________________________________ Position: __________________________________ Dated: ____________________________________ Signed: ___________________________________
|
|||||
Service Delivery Requirements
Q2 - How soon would you be able to commence operation of the service following award notification? We would expect to confirm the award by 17th April 2009 and would expect to begin the configuration/scale up process soon after i.e within 6-8 weeks.
On award of the contract we'd expect to start work on the following Monday (20th of April).
According to our project timetable the solution will be ready to go live for all implementation early adopters from September the 21st 2009.
The project timeline can be viewed below:
Contract Award: 17th of April
20th of April - 22nd of May: Scoping and agreeing solution configuration with Implementation team (application forms, workflow, letter templates, email triggers etc) and develop and agree front-end design.
25th of May - 14th of August: System Configuration and Internal QA.
17th of August - 18th of September: User Acceptance Testing
Ready to go live from the 21st of September
Service Delivery Requirements
Q3 - Please provide evidence that suggests that your solution is `user-friendly'?
Back Office Administration Users
The Tribal ATS administration system is user-friendly, simple and quick to use. Input screens are clear, , well structured and only show key relevant data on one screen dependent on who the user is for the particular workflow stage. This is particularly useful for new and less frequent users. Any time a new action is required during workflow, an email trigger is generated to the relevant user - see the next screen shot which illustrates an email trigger informing the recruiting manager that they are able to begin shortlisting.
Within the email a link will be provided which will take the user directly to the correct `screen' without working their way through extensive menus. It will also enable them to input data with the minimum of keystrokes.
For efficiency, when it is necessary to take the same action on a number of applicants) - for example when indicating all the applicants that have not been successful in getting an interview - the system will enable you to send bulk responses .
Ease of use for Candidates
The Tribal system provides a first class user candidate experience.
But it's not just about great design, usability is critical. To provide the best possible experience, front-end users are shown system-wide instructional text when they register. They are also given clear guidance on completing their application; mandatory fields and form validation within the online form are clearly highlighted and instructional text is provided, acknowledgements are provided on submission of application and they are able to monitor progress of their application within their own personalised application history zone (see next screen grab). All web-based copy can be re-sized to support visually impaired users.
The majority of our clients are now experiencing online response rates of over 90%. This is testament that the experience is an easy one.
Service Delivery Requirements
Q4 - Please provide details of the type and levels of support for the different customer groups
Support Desk
The following will apply to all customer types (local authorities, clusters and individual schools)
The majority of customer group activity will be channelled through our lean and agile service desk based in Sheffield.
The standardised processes we'd adopt for this project would allow us to keep risk to a minimum and ensure we provide all customer groups with the high levels of service, quality and customer focus. Processes will be tailored dependent on the customer group.
Tribal will offer the following type and level of support for Customer Groups.
User Type |
Type |
Level |
DCSF |
Telephone*, Email** & Online*** |
1st line support |
LA Super Users |
Telephone, Email & Online |
1st line support |
LA HR Users |
Email & Online |
2nd line support if LA Super User is unable to support/resolve |
School Super Users |
Telephone, Email & Online |
1st line support |
School HR Users |
Email & Online |
2nd line support if School Super User is unable to support/resolve |
School Standard Users |
Online |
3rd line support if School HR/Super User is unable to support/resolve |
Online interactive guides will be available. Tribal will produce interactive training and support videos that can be viewed anywhere and are ready for instant viewing by staff or customers, day or night. They're perfect for rolling out new software, orientating new staff, showing customers how to use the product, or establishing a "self-help" desk. User guides will also be available in PDF formats for users to download - see Attachment 1 at the end of this document for an example.
In addition, a dedicated online portal (see next screen for the log-in page) will be available for customer groups to log into:
See progress of all your support calls
Log new support calls
Add detail to current support calls
See a history of all previous support calls and outcomes
Tribal Service Standards
We fully comply with the following standard practices outlined by your tender:

and

Account Management Support
In addition to the support desk, the full contract delivery team will be available throughout working hours to the DCSF for telephone, email and face-to-face meetings as required over and above the contract related review and governance standards.
The LA's and schools themselves will also be provided with personal Account Managers pertaining to Lot 2 and Lot 3 service areas as specified within the client relationship management questions in the media market and recruitment services sections of our bid reply.
The system has the facility to send out automated email responses to those users that have forgotten their passwords.
The user simply needs to enter their registered email address and click the password reminder link.
We are prepared to offer personal email or telephone support to potential applicants if a school or LA Super User is unable to resolve or support on the issue. This would be channelled through the service desk, as with other queries/incidents.
Service Delivery Requirements
Q5 - Please provide details of the type and levels of support for potential candidates
The system has the facility to send out automated email responses to those users that have forgotten their passwords.
The user simply needs to enter their registered email address and click the password reminder link.
Once clicked, the user will receive an immediate email with the following information:
We are prepared to offer personal email or telephone support to potential applicants if a school or LA Super User is unable to resolve or support on the issue. This would be channelled through the service desk, as with other queries/incidents.
Service Delivery Requirements
Q6 - Please provide evidence that you have the available support infrastructure to manage an implementation of this scale?
Tribal's pedigree and scope of service areas and investment into local government is unlike any other UK resourcing agency. Tribal Group plc is a leading UK provider of professional support and consultancy services, with a number one position in several of its markets. We work with a wide range of clients - over 2,500 in the public sector alone - to improve the quality of their services to customers. We offer a wide portfolio of consultancy and managed services across the UK outsourcing market in the areas of consulting, education, technology, resourcing, training, property, communications and healthcare delivery.
Tribal is committed to providing an innovative and high-quality level of service which contributes to the performance and effectiveness of our client organisations. All our companies are well established leaders in their niche markets and have built fast-growing, successful businesses based on high levels of repeat business and customer satisfaction.
Tribal as an organisation has an extremely diverse range of business activities as summarised within the following diagram:
Outside the supply of electronic/offline recruitment services detailed within this response, Tribal Group's specialist services have been working with local government for over 20 years and are currently working with 75% of all councils in some way.
As Tribal Group operates regional hub offices where operations for all division areas work alongside each other, access to support, expertise and advice for almost any local government issue is readily available. This extra knowledge and support (alongside the extensive knowledge of the media and recruitment best practices we maintain) is then transferred to yourselves through the advice and guidance we provide on a daily basis.
To illustrate the scope of this expert support, we work across the full spectrum of local authorities and their related services in the UK and have recruitment advertising contracts with councils of all sizes. This market now represents around 55% of Tribal Resourcing's total UK advertising business, placing over 2,500 adverts per month. Tribal Resourcing is also one of the fastest growing executive and interim resourcing consultancies in local government, having now supported members in recruiting over 100 chief executives and over 1000 senior managers through search and selection practices, and providing over 100 authorities with interim managers.
In addition to this, is we already have a significant number of UK Local Government Organisations using our ATS technology who we support on a daily basis.
This combined knowledge, experience and our national support network will add value not just to the solution that is developed, but also to the project management support provided throughout the entire implementation process.
Contract Implementation
With regards to project management of the contract we will provide in addition to contract governance, a wider “project management board” will be established to take responsibility for the finalisation of the structure and tactics involved in the system design. This will ensure that the resulting system and supporting services all operate together seamlessly and in a manner suitable for all customer groups. At the project outset, milestone dates would be set around which the meeting schedules of this group would be formed.
Ongoing Contract Delivery
As the system is nearing go-live, other parts of service delivery that we have detailed throughout this tender will start to come into play - from marketing to sales to support and delivery. The following structure diagram is designed to illustrate the scope of people and support services that will be involved through the project. We have allocated 11 people to work on all the technical aspects of the system, eight to support it through the contract, and two focusing on hosting and security in addition to the core implementation management team detailed above. This will provide ample resources for the requirements and timescales to deliver within timescales and budgets. All people are employed by Tribal on a full- time basis and, depending upon their role / responsibility and the stage in the contract, they will work part or full-time on this project.
Service Delivery Requirements
Q7 - Please provide details on how you would support a national training programme for all potential customers during the initial implementation, on-going implementation and for any new starters/refreshment courses.
Tribal will provide an ongoing national training programme during the duration of this contract.
The content of this programme will be prepared to ensure all local authorities and schools have the information they need to make an informed decision as to whether to use the new ATS, familiarise themselves as a new starter or refresh their knowledge base should there be a gap in usage/new functionality added.
Tribal has significant experience of deploying ATS systems. As a consequence, we have built up a suite of appropriate training options that can be tailored to suit the needs of the users, the project timescales and staged roll-outs.
At Tribal we feel that in any successful implementation training plays a vital role in enabling individuals and achieving desired behaviours.
An effective training programme will take delegates on a journey that:
Introduces change
Demonstrates the benefits of change
Equips individuals with the knowledge, skills and experience to live with change
The aim of the training programme is to overcome some of the barriers to change by providing individuals with an opportunity to explore within a safe and comfortable environment, using terminology and practices with which they are familiar.
Training will be role-based and specific in places. The agenda will be tailored to include aspects for all and then an additional overview of the system module for System Super Users. But the core elements will cover:
Uploading and managing vacancies
Routing applications through workflow
Generating useful reports
Support procedure
Candidate FAQ's & useful contacts @ Tribal
Using the CMS
Editing site text
Training venues/skills and duration
Training will be provided by the Tribal project management team. We'd recommend that it is delivered face-to-face to groups of no larger than ten. We envisage individual training sessions taking approximately 2.5 hrs and for Super Users a number of sessions will need to be attended. Access to PC terminals with live internet connection is essential, and general PC skills/knowledge is the only pre-requisite.
Training Manuals
The full solution will be supported by a series of interactive tutorials as well as PDF/hard copy user guides, which will be issued during training and also available to download online from the site's admin area. Differing user guides will be issued to site users with differing permissions and levels of access. Training manuals will be updated through the duration of the contract following any upgrades that may occur.
Supporting the initial early adopters
Post “go-live” there are a number of procedures and mechanisms in place to ensure that the product is supported and quality is maintained throughout the duration of the contract.
One of the primary threats to quality during the business as usual phase of the project is inadequate usage of the tool. This will affect the management and recruitment of candidates and lead to inadequate data for reporting due to insufficient and inaccurate information being maintained within the system. In order to ensure that this threat is minimized, we work with our clients to ensure that their users are adequately supported directly onsite as well as by our telephone and online help desk.
Ongoing support to this team involves the following activities from the Tribal account team:
“Floorwalking”
We feel strongly that a project such as this should be supported so that users feel comfortable with the product, and particularly during the first month that help is closely at hand to ensure that their use is not impeded by the “newness” of the tool. To help make this happen we will offer a floor-walking service to ensure users are using the tool as fully and quickly as possible. This will ensure that the early adopters see a return on investment as soon as the product goes `live.'
The Implementation Phase - Regional Road shows
During the implementation phase Tribal will host bi-monthly regional road shows in all of its regional hub offices. These are located in:
London
Birmingham
Bristol
Nottingham
Manchester
Leeds
Newcastle
The first events will be held at the end of September, the second at the end of November, the third at the end of January and finally the fourth at the end of March.
New Starter Events
These will take place regionally within one of regional hub offices, which are located in::
London
Birmingham
Bristol
Nottingham
Manchester
Leeds
Newcastle
Places will be limited and the sessions will take place over a single day. In order to run an event, we need a minimum of four attendees. The maximum number of attendees for an event is eight. Any school/LA has the right to cancel an event a week in advance, although cancellation after this would incur penalties.
Refresher Events
As part of our proposal we are offering two regional sessions per half-term, which equates to 12 days x 24 half sessions. These will be limited to ten people per course. Each session will last a maximum of three hours. Depending on demand, they will be held at one of our regional hub offices, which are in:
London
Birmingham
Bristol
Nottingham
Manchester
Leeds
Newcastle
Testing Platform
Tribal will provide and maintain a development server and system URL throughout the duration of the contract. This `dev system' is available for testing and training through the initial launch phase. Once the system is live the development site continues to exist in parallel to the live system for the ongoing needs of training as well as future enhancements or changes that may need subsequent testing prior to going live. The development system does and will not degrade or interfere with the performance of the `live system'.
Terms and Conditions
Booking Conditions and Information
Tribal requires course registration to be confirmed in writing at least one month in advance.
All courses will be held in a location of Tribal's choice.
Essential information and course instructions will be sent to the delegate on receipt of registration.
Travel and accommodation is the responsibility of the delegate and is not included. If required, Tribal may supply information on local hotels and travel without prejudice.
Payment
No payment is required.
Tribal will provide all course materials and refreshments during the day at no cost.
Cancellation
Cancellation by the client will be subject to cancellation charges as follows:
* Up to seven days prior to commencement of the course: No penalty
* Less than seven days prior to commencement of Course: £100
Tribal reserves the right to cancel or reschedule an event, and in these situations every effort will be made to accommodate delegates on an alternative course.
Copyright
It is acknowledged that all intellectual property rights, including copyright, remain the sole property of Tribal and any tape recordings or copies made of course materials will be an infringement of copyright unless agreed in advance and in writing by Tribal Group Plc.
All information provided by Tribal is given in best faith and Tribal will not be held responsible for actions taken by the client, any other individual or organisation as a result of the information provided during the training course.
Service Delivery Requirements
Q8 - Please provide details of your product development roadmap and indicate which features are to be included as part of the standard offering or what will incur addition charges?
Tribal's unique methodology of providing highly configurable e-recruitment systems provides a level of flexibility and autonomy for all our clients. Our core product has a number of key modules that can be implemented at stage 1 or added over time to ensure that your recruitment process evolves as quickly as you want. This means that clients do not need to wait for global system changes to take place to the core system in order to add new technological developments or comply with a new piece of legislation.
Tribal maintains a regular and proactive communications channel with all its clients, typically holding quarterly reviews with them to discuss the latest practices around the UK, generic system improvements and potential bespoke needs for the future. We also actively encourage shared working and communications between our clients, and find that typically `pockets' of client groups exist around differing parts of the UK.
We actively seek to keep ahead of - and in pace with - the latest UK system improvements. At this time our developers are working on a series of complex modules and features that can be used by clients in the future. These include::
A module to facilitate online referencing to speed up the overall clearances stage of the recruitment process. Included.
Temporary and Contract Staff module - including online time sheeting. Not included.
On boarding - additional modules to manage the process from acceptance of offer through to day one in a new job. Not included.
A module to incorporate blogs into systems. Not included within this build.
A module to incorporate User Forums into systems. Not included within this build.
Further community networking site integrations. Not included within this build.
A module to enable the automated integration of CRB requests, checking and application approval processes into our existing workflow processes. This is being planned to work in full conjunction with the CRB's new eBulk system that is due late in 2009. This is not included within this build.
Further integrations of online assessment tooling - ongoing in conjunction with external test providers and client needs. The cost to integrate this has been included.
Rendering of the front end of the website for Digi TV Platform. Not included.
Rendering of the front-end web site for mobile phones and PDA's. Not included.
Q9 - Please outline the full range of service standards that your organisation is committing to in meeting our service delivery expectations.
Tribal intends to provide the following full range of service standards for the purposes of delivering this contract.
Contract Governance
With regards to overall contract governance we suggest a simple and straightforward approach to managing the entire contract.
This would provide the DCSF with a clear and accountable structure to manage all activities associated with the contract, with the ability to liaise directly on specific issues to do with individual lots with “Lot Owners” if required. We would suggest that this group meets on a regular basis to review overall success against KPI's throughout the duration of the contract, but through the implementation phase meetings would be frequent and focused around ensuring that the key objectives of the contract are met.
In the event that an issue needs to be raised, in the first instance the DCSF would highlight it either with the Contract Manager or the Lot Owner for resolution. If it needs to be taken to a higher level the escalation channel would be to the Contract Sponsor and then onto the Tribal Group Executive Board Director if required.
Contract Implementation
With regards to project management of the contract we also suggest that a wider “project management board” is established to be responsible for the finalisation of the structure and tactics involved in the system design. This will ensure that the resulting system and supporting services all operate together seamlessly and in manner suitable for all customer groups. At the project outset milestone dates would be set, around which the meeting schedules of this group would be formed.
Ongoing Contract Delivery
As the system is nearing go-live, other parts of service delivery that we have detailed throughout this tender will start to come into play - from marketing to sales to support and delivery. The following structure diagram is designed to illustrate the scope of people and support services that will be involved through the project. All people are employed by Tribal on a full-time basis and depending upon their role / responsibility and the stage in the contract, will work part or full-time on this project.
Regular Contact
Tribal will provide a guide to all clients detailing procedures, services available and contact names upon commencement, and updates to that guide will be provided at quarterly review meetings. Tribal will be provided with information relating to system requirements and possible process problems by the client at quarterly review meetings.
Information Service
Tribal can undertake specific information gathering requests on an ad-hoc basis as requested within two working days, unless a different timescale is agreed by both parties at the time of request. This service will be free of charge providing no commissioned research is required.
Information to Tribal
The client will provide Tribal with copies of any internal staff publications, relevant marketing/PR material and corporate policy documents which have a direct bearing or information relating to the recruitment website as and when available.
Communications Audit
Tribal will ensure that contact details are up-to-date at all times and that there are no information exchange difficulties. Any issues that arise should be discussed and actions and timescales agreed no later than the next quarterly review meeting, but preferably before then.
Quality Assurance and Monitoring
Review
The client will host website review meetings on a quarterly (3three-monthly) basis, which will cover systems requirements, quality of system and support from Tribal and future strategies. Once every 12 months a strategic review of the entire e-recruitment landscape will be held as part of the quarterly review meeting between all interested parties to the Agreement. The client will take and circulate minutes, including actions required, by whom and associated timescales.
General Communications
Ordering Routes
Tribal will accept instruction via email through the online registration form, post or fax from interested LA's/Schools. Where there is no other alternative, Tribal will not accept verbal instructions by telephone.
Tribal shall not be liable to the client for failing to comply with any verbal instructions if such confirmation is not provided. Instructions will be acknowledged within one working day unless stated otherwise in this SLA or within a timescale agreed by both parties, and a timescale for completion should be agreed with both parties within that timeframe.
Telephone Calls
Unless stated otherwise in this SLA, Tribal and the client must agree to return telephone calls within one working day and provide named message-takers for key individuals on both sides. This list will be updated as and when staff changes occur, and within two working days of the change taking place. Telephone calls will be answered within 20 seconds
Ad hoc Meetings and Key Staff
Tribal will ensure that the correct levels of staff are made available for briefing and other meetings, and will expect a similar management commitment to be made by the client. Tribal place no limit on the number of briefing meetings expected and will take a proactive role in generating better information where there is an appropriate need. A project representative will be available within at least 48 hours' notice for a meeting if needed.
Meeting Reports
All meetings will be fully reported in the form of a contact report within five working days of the meeting taking place, or within a timescale agreed by both parties. This will be undertaken by Tribal and submitted to the client for approval and agreement.
Response to Initiatives
Tribal and the client will, unless it is stated otherwise in this SLA, respond within five working days or within a timescale agreed by both parties to initiatives suggested by the opposite party with confirmation of receipt and initial thoughts on the value of the idea and how it should be progressed.
Communication Beliefs
The operation of an open and honest communications strategy where both parties are able to confront issues as they arise and deal with them quickly and efficiently will ensure an effective relationship is maintained, and allow us to communicate in the most effective manner at all times.
Hosting
Rackspace
Tribal will subcontract the connection to Rackspace. In the event that downtime is unacceptable to the client acting reasonably or the service levels are not met on a regular basis, the client shall be entitled to require Tribal to move the hosting of the website to another provider at no additional cost to the client.
Data protection
Tribal shall not monitor, exercise control over, or provide any substantive review, evaluation or assessment of any data. The client agrees that as between it and Tribal, the client shall have complete responsibility (save for any claims resulting from any fault or breach of this agreement by Tribal) for any claim by any person or entity that any data was unlawfully or improperly delivered, received, stored, processed, copied, adapted, reproduced, published, transmitted, or divulged, and any other similar claims arising out of the client's or another party's proper or improper use of the services or accessing of the website. Tribal, via its sub-contractor Rackspace Ltd (i) utilises various security devices and measures (“Security Devices”) that are commercially available as of the date of this Agreement, and (ii) utilises a commercially available virus scanning device to scan every file on the servers (“Virus Scanning Device”). Notwithstanding that Tribal utilises such security devices and utilises such Virus Scanning Devices, Tribal makes no representation that the data and/or the website could not be compromised through or by a third party.
Data protection act
For the purposes of this Agreement the parties agree that: (i) the client shall remain the data controller as defined by the Data Protection Act 1998 as amended from time to time (“the Act”) and Tribal shall be the data processor in accordance with the Act, in respect of Data and personal information processed by Tribal in the course of the Services; (ii) Tribal shall only process data and personal information for the purpose of providing the services (and the client consents to such processing) and otherwise meeting its obligations under this Agreement and otherwise under the Act; (iii) Tribal shall not export data or personal information obtained by it in relation to the provision of the Services outside the EEA without prior written consent from the client; (iv) the client shall provide such co-operation as Tribal reasonably considers necessary to satisfy itself of the client's compliance with the Act from time to time; and (v) each party shall observe the provisions of the Act.
Future development of the system
Generic/Global Changes to Back Office
If Tribal makes any global changes to the back office that replicate any bespoke requirements made by the client, the cost of modifications required will be met by Tribal.
If Tribal makes any global changes to the back office that impact on the bespoke functionality developed for the client, the cost of any amendments required to training manuals, the delivery of any additional training required and the modifications required will be met by Tribal.
Tribal shall not be entitled to make any of the changes referred to without the prior written consent of the client. Such consent must not to be unreasonably withheld.
Support Services
Hours of support
For back-office users: normal service:
Support to client users is obtained through the Tribal service desk which can be contacted during the following operational periods:
Monday - Friday |
08:00 - 18.00 |
Saturday/Sunday |
No standard service |
Bank holidays |
No standard service |
For public access to the website:
Tribal will provide on-site software and hardware maintenance with remote software management (“The Support”) 365 days of the year, 24 hours a day and shall use all reasonable endeavours to ensure that the equipment is operating within the manufacturer's guidelines.
In the case of a Priority 1 Incident, client staff can contact the Tribal service desk.
For special events:
Different hours for support may be arranged for special events or particular services by prior written agreement.
Method of contact
The Client can contact the Tribal service desk:
By telephone: |
Xxxxxxx |
By fax: |
Xxxxxxx |
All telephone instructions of a critical nature must be followed up with a confirmation email or fax.
Approved Contact List
The following is a list of approved contacts for Tribal and for the client. Any changes to the Tribal list have to be agreed by both parties. Replacements will be at the same level as the person they are replacing (e.g. a Director will be replaced by another Director).
Tribal |
The Client |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Types of support services:
Setting up a new LA, cluster or school
Supplying user manuals
Support with simple text changes
Correcting errors (functionality not working correctly)
Minor changes to the functionality
Uploading of new imagery
Help with using the system
A request for new or additional services is treated as a Request For Change (RFC).
The support to be provided by Tribal shall include maintenance of the services and the labour and travelling costs of Tribal's employees or agents. All other duties or requests made to Tribal will be undertaken on a best endeavours basis only without any warranty or liability whether express or implied.
The support to be provided by Tribal shall expressly exclude:
i) Any software that the client has not purchased from Tribal; or
ii) Any software that has not been written by Tribal; or
iii) Any software that has not been approved by Tribal.
Service Availability
Tribal aims to deliver the services described in this SLA as efficiently and effectively as possible. Tribal particularly recognises that interruptions to service are disruptive and can lead to lost productivity and cause substantial inconvenience to staff and the public. On this basis Tribal's goal is to achieve 100% availability of the network, business applications and major server and technical infrastructure. As a minimum we guarantee uptime of 99.7%.
In support of this goal Tribal will monitor and report on its performance in these areas at the regular meetings with the client. Where service interruptions may have occurred Tribal will produce a written report with an explanation of the cause(s) and identify any 'lessons learned'. Where appropriate, an action plan will be developed which will contribute to reducing or eliminating any similar service interruptions in future.
Front End Website Availability
Tribal will ensure that the front end website is available to candidates 24 hours a day, seven days per week. . Failure to meet the 99.7% per annum uptime guarantee because of unplanned downtime which results in candidates being unable to meet closing dates for vacancies and/or complaints from candidates should be compensated. Compensation should be made based on £15 for every hour of downtime thereafter up to a maximum of £125 per month on the amount of time the system is unavailable beyond the 99.7% guaranteed uptime.
Back Office Availability
Tribal will ensure that the back office system and client centre (advertising ordering system) is available to client users 24 hours a day, seven days per week
Compensation Limit
The maximum financial liability that Tribal will accept in the event of failure to meet the above availability targets are as set out above.
Planned downtime
Planned downtime should be announced to the public via a notice posted on the website in a way that clearly draws public attention.
Back ups
We will undertake daily back-ups for the purpose of recreating the services if any part of the service becomes corrupted or lost, and shall use all reasonable endeavours to ensure the integrity of such back-ups.
Incident reporting
For all incidents which fall under the Priority 1 (critical) or Priority 2 (high) classification an incident report will be produced within five working days. This will be a single page pro-forma (see Attachment 1 at the end of this document) which will identify the incident, its impact and duration and also identify causes, follow-up actions and lessons learned. Incident reports will be emailed to the client.
A monthly report will summarise these into a narrative diary which crystallises the key events of the past month into a concise summary which will provide a good qualitative impression on service availability and, most importantly, highlight the lessons learned. The monthly report will be emailed to the client and will be reviewed at the regular service review meetings.
Client Responsibilities
The Client undertakes to:
Agree to defined maintenance windows;
Grant requests for maintenance, given appropriate notice and evidence of the need;
Notify the service desk of any extraordinary events or incidents.
Ensure that client users of the services:
Adhere to any guides and policies regarding the use of the services;
Are appropriately trained in the use of the services;
Provide Tribal with the information needed to resolve incidents.
Requests for Change (RFC)
The client may at any time request, and Tribal may at any time recommend, a change to the services.
Until such time as a change is made, Tribal shall continue to supply the services as if the request or recommendation had not been made.
Discussion between the client and Tribal concerning a change shall result in any one of the following:
No further action being taken;
A request to implement a change by the client; or
A recommendation to implement a change by Tribal.
When a Request for Change is to go ahead Tribal shall prepare a Change Control Notice (CCN) containing the following minimum information:
the title of the Change;
the originator and date of the request or recommendation for the Change;
the reason for the Change;
full details of the Change;
a timetable for implementation of the Change
the price, if any, of the Change;
details of the likely impact, if any, of the Change on other aspects of the services;
the date of expiry of validity of the CCN; and
provision for signature by the Client and Tribal.
Following discussion between the Client and Tribal if agreement is reached on a change, two copies of the CCN, in hard copy format, shall be prepared for signature by both parties, each party retaining one signed copy. The CCN will normally be signed by both parties within one month of receipt of the document.
A CCN signed by both parties shall constitute an amendment to the services.
Customisations
Tribal shall implement such customisations as requested by the client from time to time subject to the client following the process described under Requests for Change.
Tribal will work on two lists of amend configurations free of charge, subject to the configurations being within the agreed specification. Thereafter further amends will become chargeable with fees associated to the level of work involved - any costs will be communicated and agreed to in advance.
System Testing
The following standards will be adopted by Tribal and the client when changes are made to the services:
Tribal will carry out all system testing on the development server. A series of testing procedures will take place to identify and then remove as many bugs as possible. Once the test plans have all been passed, the site will then be available for UAT testing by the client. Any bugs identified at this stage will need to be recorded, together with the actions that give rise to the bug occurring. All bugs identified will then be reviewed and fixed within two working days, or within a timescale agreed by both parties, followed by subsequent tests to confirm the bug has been removed.
Once sign-off of the changes has occurred, they will then be uploaded to the live server. Any bugs identified after go-live will be fixed free of charge and wherever possible within one working day of being identified, or within a timescale agreed by both parties. Any update or changes to the services required as a result of testing must be agreed and approved by a nominated representative of the client.
Offensive Material
The client agrees that nothing will be placed on the website that breaches any laws in the UK. Tribal reserves the right to suspend service without incurring service credits if it finds content to be offensive or believe that others may find it offensive.
Support response and fix time commitment
The Tribal Service desk will answer telephone calls from client staff at a maximum wait time for a call to be answered of 20 seconds. Where possible, a telephone query or problem report to the service desk will be resolved in a single call.
For non-critical contact with the service desk, email is preferred.
Where a query or problem cannot be resolved during the initial call, the call will be logged and a call number will be allocated. This call number can be used for subsequent follow-up purposes.
To ensure smooth and timely resolution of fixes an `incident report' form will be completed. These forms will be of a standard format as directed by Tribal.
In the case of Priority 1 & 2 incidents the email form will be completed and sent after the incident has been reported by telephone.
Target fix times
A fix is the action necessary to restore user productivity and is not necessarily the ultimate resolution of the problem. In cases where the fix is not the resolution, a problem is opened at a different priority. Prioritisation of error / incident reports will be agreed with the caller.
Escalation process
If fix times are not achieved escalation rules will apply:
Attachment 1 - Incident Reporting Pro-forma
Recruitment Website Incident Reporting Form
Login details of the candidate experiencing the issue:
Website address of page where issue is apparent (URL): |
|
Username: |
Password: |
Contact No: |
Email: |
Login details of admin user:
Admin URL: |
|
Username: |
Password: |
Contact No: |
Email: |
Full Description of the issue:
(Please provide information including the error message received. To copy error message click the print screen button on your keypad, and paste in the space below.)
Service Delivery Requirements
Q10 - Please outline how your organisation intends to report on it performance. In your response your should make it very clear what information you will provide, the level of detail, the reporting frequency and appropriate measures in the even of service failure.
Contract Management
With regards to project management of the contract as a whole, we have suggested that a “project management board” is established to be responsible for the finalisation of the structure and tactics involved in the system design and for the same group then to regularly meet throughout the contract duration to review operational success. This will ensure that the resulting system and supporting services all operate together seamlessly and in a manner suitable for all customer groups.
At the project outset milestone dates would be set, around which the meeting schedules of this group would be formed. However, we would suggest that monthly meetings occur for the first six months, followed by quarterly reviews thereafter.
At Tribal we don't make account management more complex than it needs to be. Our key goals are to understand all your needs, build and sustain effective relationships with you and always deliver when we say we will.
We would recommend quarterly account review meetings at which a proportion of the agenda will be consistently set aside to allow us to report upon our Key Performance Indicators. Before agreeing these, however, we'd need access to data to assess the present state of the business and to assist in prescribing a course of action. If this information isn't currently available Tribal could, as a separate project, support the department with Research services.
Key Performance Indicators that Tribal would supply at monthly/quarterly key review meetings could include:
Uptime activity - by month
Planned downtime activity
Number of new schools joining the system
Number of new LA's or school clusters joining the system
Client re-sign rate (from year 2 onwards)
Reduction in press reliance
% of take up from primaries
% of take up from secondaries
% of take up from academies / special needs schools
Regional penetration - top performing regions
Number of new case studies generated
Time taken to add a new client (average, min and max)
Customer query resolution
Candidate query resolution
How many enquiries were made both by post and through on-line system
Media response rates compared to direct traffic
Number of jobs by email subscribers
Number of talent pool subscribers categorised as agreed
% of registered users signed up for text alerts
Referrals from search engines
Organic search engine rankings
Time taken to complete short-listing
Overall time to hire
Cost per application
Cost per successful appointment
Posts filled from the talent pool
Collection of bad debts
Average age of user profile
Applications from those with a disability
Gender split of applicants
Samples of good / poor adverts
Case study compilations for upload onto the system (candidate and customer oriented)
Testimonial compilations for upload onto the system (candidate and customer oriented)
Recruitment search activity summary
Recruitment selection and assessment centre activity summary
Online psychometric tool usage rates
Competitor / market activity and developments synopsis
Website traffic statistics (see examples of output data and graphs overleaf) to include:
New visitors
Returning visitors
Bounce rates (entrants who leave the system without visiting a second page)
Locational source of applicants
Traffic / website / search engine originator reports
Webpage content usage
National Implementation Delivery Requirements
Q1 - Please provide an outline plan of how you would raise awareness and stimulate demand for this new service? The plan should address planned marketing expenditure over appropriate timescales and how the different customer groups are to be targeted.
1.1 Overview Summary
Tribal would employ a multi-level sales, marketing, PR and communications strategy that would engage all the differing customer groups (DCSF, LA's, School Clusters, Individual Schools) with appropriate messages at appropriate times to ensure that the system is a success - both in terms of adoption and take up as well the benefits it will bring. The DCSF is familiar with our communications company, Geronimo (recently rebranded as Kindred). Working with Kindred, we will develop an effective brand for the ATS system itself to position the product positively in its marketplace. The brand proposition, to be agreed with DCSF, would include:
A defined name, logo and identity
Brand proposition and straplines
Defined copy messages to describe the product
We would then develop a tailored marketing action plan to reach all customer groups - and below you can see a summary of our segmentation strategy. All would be fully monitorable so that at any given time analysis of success can take place for each customer group by media and marketing tool.
The marketing plan would complement a highly proactive outbound telesales approach, which will make contact with all individual schools and LA's via telephone, email and mailers to bring the ATS system to their attention, and then onto a demonstration site where they could trial the system and view a presentation and video outlining the benefits.
In addition, they would be able to book onto a workshop/roadshow in their area where they could view the site live, and meet with members of the Tribal team and ideally pilot organisations to hear about the benefits of the system. This direct selling technique would then be supported by a range of high profile, targeted marketing activities designed to raise awareness and drive interest to a dedicated telephone response number, email address and the demonstration site itself.
DCSF Schools ATS System |
|
Launch - 3 months |
Launch - 1 month |
Launch - 1 week |
Launch |
Month 1 |
Month 2 |
Month 3 |
Month 4 |
Month 5 |
Month 6 |
Month 12 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exhibition/ events |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
National events |
|
|
x |
|
|
x |
|
|
x |
|
|
x |
Regional events |
|
|
|
|
x |
|
|
|
x |
|
x |
x |
On line demonstration and presentation tool |
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Miscellaneous |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Press release PR pack |
|
x |
|
|
x |
|
|
x |
|
|
x |
x |
Exhibition / event stand & presentation materials |
|
|
|
|
x |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Schools / Authority packs |
|
|
x |
|
x |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Free of charge advertising |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Branded email marketing |
|
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Local government website linkages / feeds |
|
|
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Schools own website linkages |
|
|
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Ads into existing schools magazines, newsletters |
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Authority contracted advertising |
|
|
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Mailings of authority/schools information via NAHT, ASCL, NCSL, CIPFA, NBA |
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
National editorials and PR |
|
x |
|
|
x |
|
|
|
x |
|
|
|
Intranet system links |
|
|
|
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Exhibiting at appropriate conferences e.g. BETT, |
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
|
|
|
x |
|
|
x |
Tribal education focused marketing materials |
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
Footer message on all Tribal orders and interactions |
|
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
x |
1.3 Target User Groups and Audience Segmentation
The new service provision must be established to be attractive simultaneously for a number of differing target user groups who will interface with the service. Tribal feels that each of the user groups will require, in their own right, a bespoke approach towards awareness building and marketing from the successful bidder. Broadly speaking, these groups break down into the following main sectors:
Applicants for jobs
Individual Schools
Clusters of Schools
LA's
DCSF
1.3.1 Applicants for jobs
Whilst we at Tribal appreciate that we are tasked to deliver marketing and communications that are targeted primarily towards generating customer take up of the system, we would also point out that there is a potential for the ATS system to develop easily into a national job board. With this in mind, we would want to assure you that as your potential partner we have extensive expertise in providing marketing solutions for this user group and can be called upon to devise and provide a solution as required.
1.3.2 Individual Schools
The awareness-building communications, marketing and sales strategy that will need to be employed to engage schools themselves must contain a very different set of messages and information than the tools used with prospective applicants. The messages we would look to convey within this type of marketing and communications tool kit will contain areas such as:
A summary of the benefits to job seekers
Website traffic data, user data, page impression data, etc
An overview of system capability, functionality and their associated benefits (financially, time, ease, etc)
Pricing
Contacts and next steps
We plan to create interactive email templates for communications in bulk with schools representatives. These emails would link seamlessly with the website system itself and, in -turn, all of Tribal's support services. Tribal also already has extensive network reach with the national bodies that cover education, and email and newsletter insertions would also be sought to be included into their relevant bodies' communications across the sector. So, for example, insertions would be placed in newsletters that are sent out by the NAHT and ASCL (Head teacher Associations), NBA (National Bursars Association - website and newsletters), Diocesan Authorities (as each has a Director of Education responsible for all Church Schools), CIPFA (the body for LA finance people, responsible for promoting value for money in schools), and the Specialist schools and Academies Trust (the national advisory body for all academies).
Tribal would also communicate with key stakeholders within schools at their attendance of national events, where we would seek to have stand representation, with our project and contract management team in attendance to demonstrate the system, answer questions and encourage registration. The events in question would be likes of the National LMS conference, the BETT conference - Technology show (spring 2010), the NAHT Conference and the ASCL Conference.
1.3.3 School Clusters
Whilst similar in needs to individual schools, we also plan to incorporate into marketing literature unique guidance for schools that wish to register and join onto the system at the same time. As and when schools decide to do this, they will be able to benefit from lower individual licence fee costs as a result of our pricing system as Tribal would enable then to fall into the LA pricing categories as and when total staffing numbers results in them exceeding the first banding level.
In terms of implementation and set up they would be regarded as a local authority, needing to supply details for all schools at once and to nominate a single invoicing point while accepting the fact that they will be required to provide people to attend a single training event in the same way as a local authority.
The guidance and information surrounding this would be detailed within the front end of the website, and also included in marketing literature sent to schools. This information would also be fully briefed to field and telesales Tribal personnel tasked with increasing uptake onto the system. When a school cluster group registers with the system and subsequently their LA seeks to adopt it, allowances would be made for the LA and guidance to all would steer the school cluster away from continuing with their own registration but to fall into the LA contract to benefit from the further economies of scale this would provide.
1.3.3 LA's
In the case of local authorities, Tribal would package bespoke marketing materials that would be targeted to them. Within this, the financial benefits of authority-wide adoption for the LA itself would be detailed (such as reduced expenditure across the region on recruitment advertising, use of agencies, recruitment literature development, etc) along with how the service would provide additional support for the individual schools via the LA as part (or not) of any HR support service they already provide.
We also appreciate that the challenge for a local authority is to get sufficient buy-in from the individual schools to give the authority confidence that registration onto the system for all of them is the best way forward. To make this task of communications within the LA area easier, the marketing literature would be packaged to convey not just the benefits to a school in its own right, but the benefits of regional registration and the support that the LA would co-ordinate on their behalf.
In addition to the section of guidance for LA's within the website, the materials that Tribal would suggest we produce for authorities would include (but are not limited to):
A creative email template
A local authoritybased monthly online newsletter that would contain updates pertaining to the service/system
An interactive brochure via CDRom
Leaflets
Video introductions and guides to be based on the internet
`Schools packs' - to include materials listed above that are designed for the schools so that the LA can distribute accordingly
A guide to the LA registration process and fees involved
Website banners and links to the demonstration site
We would also make the offer to all local authorities that Tribal will support them in person at suitable meetings and events that would offer the opportunity to get authority-wide `buy-in' from the schools. At these events there would also be the potential to display backdrops/stands and distribute give-away materials.
1.3.3 DCSF
Tribal plans to support the DCSF fully to raise awareness and encourage adoption of this system by all the above customer groups widely across the country. Tribal would therefore be marketing to/with the DCSF in following ways:
Tribal has a well established and experienced PR department that has excellent relationships with media of all types, but particularly the media involved in communications across public services. This department would be briefed to provide support campaigns pre-launch, at launch and on an ongoing basis through the duration of contract to provide awareness towards the system.
Tribal will support the DCSF at strategic meetings with the key contract management team being available to attend meetings, provide and give presentations, deal with Q&A sessions and provide reports from the point of contract win through to completion.
Tribal will support the DCSF with attendance at national and regional events to raise awareness and educate attendees about the system. As well as the attendance in person of the contract and project management teams, there would also be the provision of system branded event materials such as backdrops and stands, giveaways and documentation pertaining to the system as well as the provision of PC's for live access and Plasma screens or projectors for rolling presentations.
Tribal will also provide detailed project and status update reports for internal distribution. These reports will be created at agreed timescale intervals and would typically contain project updates, PR & communications summaries, website traffic data, customer uptake and usage data, comments and testimonials, case studies, etc. Tribal will happily discuss and agree a refined format and content to suit the needs of regular internal DCSF communications that could also contain online / HTML email newsletters that can be despatched at any agreed frequency.
1.4 Monitoring and Evaluation
Excluding for a minute the monitoring and evaluation that the recruiters will be able to do themselves as per the technical specifications of the system, Tribal's solution will allow for comprehensive monitoring and analysis of all forms of communication, marketing, advertising and linkage strategies that result in either schools uptake or job seeker / browser activity. Full reports will be able to be compiled with graphical representations straight from the system at any given time. These will show immediate traffic source statistics so that marketing can be tweaked in real time.
An agreed format for delivery of results to the DCSF would be created to include frequency, content and distribution, and differing levels of success data can be reported to differing stakeholders.
1.5 Managing and Minimising Marketing Expenditure
Tribal appreciates the need to ensure that the most cost-effective methods of candidate and employer attraction must be engaged to ensure that no monies are spent without effective results. Tribal is ideally placed and experienced to guarantee that this is achieved.
Overall, the focus of activity as detailed above is to use digital techniques that require minimal cost investment versus more traditional advertising techniques. The deliverables we will look to provide include:
Studio services in the form of creative concepting, design and delivery for all materials
Studio services in the form of copywriting for all materials
Production services for all deliverables which will include:
Logo and strapline(s)
Brand guardianship and user guidelines document
The public front end of the system website itself
Creative HTML email templates
Powerpoint Slide Templates
HTML Newsletter & e-Flyer templates
System related letter templates
System-related business card templates
The `Schools Pack' to include folder, content pages, CDrom
A `Local Authority Pack' to include folder, content pages, CDrom
An event and exhibition pack to include stand backdrops, and suitable agreed giveaways
Posters for schools & LA distribution
National Implementation Delivery Requirements
Q2 - Please provide an outline plan in how you would manage the sales conversion process with the customer groups? The plan should address resources over appropriate timescales and how the different customer groups are to be targeted.
Tribal Unique Selling Point
As a highly experienced recruitment and resourcing solutions provider we already work with over 150 local authorities throughout the country and so have easy access to key decision makers and budget holders. Through our local authorities we work with hundreds of schools and a large number of independent schools and academies. Through the Tribal Group we work with nearly 95% of all local authorities and are the UK leader in consultancy, professional support and delivery services to the education and skills sector. Tribal is also the largest provider of inspection services for the Office for Standards in Education (Ofsted) and information, advice and guidance to the Offender Learning and Skills Service (OLASS).Tribal is one of the main providers of services to the Quality Improvement Agency (QIA).
We additionally supply consultancy and support to the Learning and Skills Council and work with the Training and Development Agency (TDA) and Lifelong Learning UK. We have built a strong relationship with the TDA through our work on teacher development and mathematics.
Regular clients include schools, colleges, universities, local authorities and work-based learning providers, as well as private, not-for-profit and third sector organisations.
We now manage more than £400 million of capital projects in education and have a proven track record of delivering projects and bespoke commercial solutions to schools - on time and budget.
We are highly experienced in the development of e-recruitment portals including www.careersforleaders.com , www.wmjobs.co.uk and www.northeastjobs.org. Careersforleaders is a national executive vacancy jobs board for senior management across the public sector in the UK. We are actively promoting the West Midlands jobs portal to over 25 local authorities across the Midlands. NEPO is a purchasing and contracting consortium consisting of 11 full member local authorities and 13 associate members covering an area from the Scottish border through to Tyneside, Wearside, County Durham and Teesside.
We are also highly experienced in the launch and migration of sales conversion strategies.
As evidenced above, we are either working with or have access to the vast majority of the key target audience. This will enable us to communicate to schools and LA's on the ATS system, cost efficiencies achieved and the key success stories to enable sales conversions. We have unprecedented access and will be able to maximize the experience, expertise and relationships we hold across the Tribal Group.
Pre-Launch
The pre-launch phase will span the time period from the day the contract is awarded through to `go live'. Within this period Tribal will be undertaking PR, awareness-raising, direct sales and marketing activities to each of the customer groups. We will also seek commitment not just from the early adopters associated with the project, but also from other authorities' school clusters and individual schools that show an interest. Marketing materials will be distributed to all customer groups as detailed within the national implementation plan of how demand would be stimulated. A dedicated telesales team would target all LA's initially and then schools individually following direct marketing to assess interest. Our field sales team would then follow up and visit those expressing interest; and regionally based road shows would offer schools the opportunity to see a demonstration of the ATS system as well as meet with Tribal representatives.
Launch
The first few months will see close liaison with the early adopters (EA) in ensuring that the system is configured -for example to allow for standardized role profiles (as requested within the specification). These role profiles will need to be populated within the system prior to roll-out. We will then need to agree with the EA the training roll-out and launch programme for each organisation. We would want to agree a national launch date and road show for each of the EA's to attend with key recruiting managers to enable them to understand the ATS fully and meet the senior team from Tribal.
We have a tried and tested launch methodology that encompasses the following:
Phase 1: Post launch
0 - 6 months
We would propose that this phase sees the roll out, via our e-recruitment team, of the ATS system to those early adopters, staged over a six-month period. This will enable us to support the early adopters through training, help desk support and to build confidence in the system. Key to the success of sales conversion is to prove the capability of the system through case studies, and we would work closely with each of the Early Adopters to ensure they utilise and realize its full potential..
Key benefits
We know that to introduce a `big bang' approach (with technology being introduced to all recruiting managers from day one) may in theory achieve huge savings, but in reality it could confuse managers and provoke cynicism. We will respond to this by ensuring that all recruiting managers gain confidence in using the system through a staged roll out of training, help points developed throughout the system, an FAQ (frequently asked questions) page and help desk support - as indicated in the structure chart below:

The ATS system will be incredibly intuitive, easy to use and has been developed with end users in mind.
We suggest appointing an ATS champion within each school who will act as a central point of access for any internal issues/concerns and to enable our account teams to access one central point to disseminate information etc.
With an implementation such as this buy in is key. We would, therefore, propose introducing the system that will, for the initial six months, provide minimal disruption, address all needs to include online ordering; introduce managers to a different model while delivering efficiencies in the process.
Our account teams are specialists in recruiting within the education marketplace. They can thus empathise fully with requirement needs and most importantly fulfil requests in an experienced manner.
Our account management teams will also be hands-on to provide a human touch while addressing local needs, empathising with requirements and evolving the service
We will also provide support in analyzing the management information generated from the system to enable managers to inform the senior team more accurately when devising strategies and looking at cost per response/cost per hire ratios.
Throughout the first six months we will be in regular contact with the champions to gauge internal reactions to the use of the system and to discuss success stories and the cost efficiencies achieved. These success stories will be key to driving sales conversions forward.
Phase 2: 6 - 12 months
Throughout the first six months we will be issuing press releases and editorial updates through the DCSF Shared Recruitment Services portal on the ATS system and throughout the media. Case studies will have been generated and a sales/conversion strategy developed to ensure that we have Early Adopters scheduled to be trained and to utilise the system throughout the next six months. Our sales/conversion strategy will include the following:
Targeting through mail shots our existing client list of 150 local authorities and 67 schools, independent schools and academies;
The production of various marketing materials and communications approaches as detailed in Q1 of the national marketing plan which includes email marketing and an e-newsletter promoting the ATS system. This would also include success stories featuring cost per response/cost per hire and attracting to difficult-to-fill posts. The e-newsletter would be produced on a quarterly basis and mailed out to our database of schools and LEA contacts
A series of road shows will be established throughout the country to promote the ATS and engage with potential customers. These will be held jointly with the DCSF but manned and resourced by Tribal.
Telesales will be used to follow up on marketing activities to all customer groups, thus encouraging registration or attendance at national and regional events where we will be promoting the system.
Feedback reviews from ATS users will be employed to promote user experience and update others on the benefits of using the system.
Resources
With Tribal's client base spanning the UK and Ireland, we understand the importance of providing a strong local and accessible service to clients whilst enjoying the strength, experience and resources that a national agency can bring. Our networks of specialist recruitment attraction offices in London, Bristol, Cardiff, Birmingham, Nottingham, Manchester, Leeds, Newcastle and Edinburgh cover the length and breadth of the UK and are enhanced by the wider network of 41 Tribal offices. As the largest specialist public sector recruitment advertising agency in the UK, we have a team of over 240 recruitment professionals who are able to provide an on-the-ground, local insight on media strategy and candidate availability. This unique depth of expertise means we can respond quickly and efficiently to increases in activity as well as on-boarding new contract wins.
To add support to the team we have access to a pool of over 100 associates as well as the strength of over 2,500 Tribal staff across the business.
National Implementation Delivery Requirements
Q3 - Please confirm the structure of your team that would be directly responsible for the implementation for the initial scale up and beyond. In your response please indicated whether they are expected to be allocated as FTE for the project delivery, interim or part time.
Tribal would provide a very senior and experienced team to work alongside the DCSF and Early Adopters to manage the implementation process of the contract strategically and tactically. All Tribal staff detailed are employed full-time and would bring with them significant experience of relevant other projects.. (We have provided profiles for all key individuals at the end of this section).
At this stage, we feel the team structures detailed within the diagrams below will represent working structures at the outset and beyond, but we are open to discuss differing structures should the DCSF have other factors they would like us to account for.
Contract Governance
With regards to overall contract governance we suggest a simple and straightforward approach to managing the entire contract.
This would provide the DCSF with a clear and accountable structure to manage all activities associated with the contract, and allows the ability to liaise directly on specific issues to do with individual lots with “Lot Owners” if required. We would suggest that this group would be meeting on a regular basis to review overall success against KPI's throughout the duration of the contract, but through the implementation phase meetings would be frequent and focused around ensuring that the key objectives of the contract are met.
In the event that an issue needs to be raised, in the first instance the DCSF would raise it either with the Contract Manager or the Lot Owner for resolution. If it requires attention at a higher level, the escalation channel would be to the Contract Sponsor then onto the Tribal Group Executive Board Director if required.
Contract Implementation
With regards to project management of the contract we also suggest that a wider “project management board” is established to be responsible for the finalisation of the structure and tactics involved in the system design. This will ensure that the resulting system and supporting services all operate together seamlessly and in a manner suitable for all customer groups. At the project outset milestone dates would be set, around which the meeting schedules of this group would be formed.
Ongoing Contract Delivery
As the system is nearing go-live, other parts of service delivery that we have detailed throughout this tender will start to come into play - from marketing and sales to support and delivery. The following structure diagram is designed to illustrate the scope of people and support services that will be involved through the project. All people are employed by Tribal on a full-time basis and, depending upon their role / responsibility and the stage in the contract, will work part or full-time on this project.
National Implementation Delivery Requirements
Q4 - How will your proposition support individual schools or clusters should they wish to deal directly with your organisation rather than their local authority?
System Configuration
We have built the system and our bid on the supposition that the take-up of the system will be at all levels. We can, therefore, confirm that our proposition is totally geared to supporting individual schools, clusters of schools or LA's direct.
Tribal's solutions are developed and customised to suit the needs of the differing user groups. We fully appreciate that in some circumstances an Education Authority as a whole may adopt the system, whereas in other circumstances schools will individually make their own decisions. Our system is therefore designed to make the processes of registration, implementation, payment, invoicing, user and technical support all as simple and flexible as possible to the various scenarios that will be faced.
The underpinning philosophy we will adopt is to make all processes initially facilitated online, with support available via the website itself as well as by email and telephone contact to an expert support centre based in Sheffield.
System Support
Support to client users regardless of customer type is obtained directly through the Tribal Service Desk, which can be contacted during the following operational periods:
Monday - Friday |
08:00 - 18.00 |
Saturday/Sunday |
No standard service |
Bank holidays |
No standard service |
The support and service standards are designed to work equally for all customer groups. The types of support services include:
Setting up a new LA, Cluster or School
Supplying user manuals
Support with simple text changes
Correcting errors (functionality not working correctly)
Minor changes to the functionality
Uploading of new imagery
Help with using the system
Setting up a New Customer & Support to them
The majority of customer activity will be channelled through our service desk based in Sheffield. The standardised processes we'd adopt for this project would allow us to keep risk to a minimum and would ensure we provide all customer groups with the highest levels of service, quality and customer focus. Processes will be tailored dependant on the customer type.
As long as we receive all of the correct information, our solution can be deployed with efficiency so customer groups can use our off-the-shelf solution in a matter of hours.
See below for an example user story process of an establishment joining the ATS.
All new registrations will be completed online.
Phone/Email Support will then be provided to assist users entering information if supplied instructions are not enough. However, the theory is that the registration process should be as automated as possible.
TSD (Tribal Service Desk) Administrators will approve new registrations based on criteria laid down by DCSF - e.g. CRB/Ofsted Database Checks.
See below for an example of some of the detail which will be captured during the above process:
|
||
A. Potential DCSF Process Definition |
|
|
Process Objectives: To capture basic contact information about a new educational establishment. |
||
Output(s): New client: recorded Basic contact information captured |
||
Measures of Success: Volume of records Response for each on-line working to be returned within agreed response time limits |
||
Key activities |
Responsibility |
|
Starts with: Generating interest |
Tribal |
|
Ends with: Registering a new educational establishment |
Tribal |
|
Includes: Obtaining data protection approval Obtaining data sharing agreement Where the business is Ofsted registered, checking Ofsted registration number against systems records provided by Ofsted Validating mandatory data on RP i.e. name of educational establishment or LA, address details, name and job title of person completing this record, nature of the business/organisation at this educational establishment; number of pupils, number of full time equivalents Part of a cluster? Yes/No Establishing Super user Entering establishment Logo Wants to register onto the next New Starter training programme |
Tribal Tribal Tribal
Tribal
Tribal Tribal Tribal Establishment |
|
Frequency: For each new establishment |
||
Policy / Rules: Registration will only be done through the web Tribal will not accept submission without acknowledgment of data protection. Tribal will not accept submission without a valid email address. |
||
Website Support for Customer Types
In the interests of an easy user experience and enabling immediate support without the need for any customer type to liaise with the support desk, our approach will be to make the website part of the system providing support itself. Within both the back office and front end website associated with the system will be `sections' dedicated to providing potential and new user advice and guidance. On the public website, support and information will be geared towards the job seeker browsing the website, from the back office towards the school or individual employer user.
The homepage of the website that the candidates / browsers accesswill contain a number of elements, as follows:
Advice and guidance on how to job search using the website
Advice and guidance on how to register with the website, and what benefits and features this will provide to the user
Advice and guidance surrounding the schools recruitment process
Advice and guidance on completing the application form
Advice and guidance on preparing for interviews
Useful links to other sources of support and guidance
Privacy and security standards
Contact details for direct email, telephone or online queries
From the back office homepage of the system that the school / employer users access, it will contain a number of elements as follows:
The process of system registration will be fully explained so that users can fully understand what an individual school or authority needs to do to establish itself within the system.
Registration to adopt the system itself will be undertaken through two online forms that will ascertain all the information required to enter either an individual school establishment or complete authority establishment onto the system.
Individual schools will simply need to provide school and contact details and invoicing details
Authorities must provide authority and contact details, invoicing details and a list of schools with address/contact data as above
Introductory video guides and explanations as to what the system does, the benefits it offers and the support that is available will be available within an `About Us' area.
Interactive system help guides will enable users at any given time to search for the area they need help with and then be provided with step-by-step instructions to guide them through the activity process in question. This will be augmented byaudio and video support on how to undertake main tasks such as uploading vacancies, management of applications, work through the recruitment and selection process, initiate press or online advertising, initiate assessment support, obtain management information, manage content on the website about the job or school and much more.
In addition to system operations the website will also contain a dedicated section to provide advice and guidance to schools surrounding best practices in recruitment. This will contain:
Guidance on use of media: features and benefits of all main media will be profiled so that informed decisions can be made for any given vacancy within any given organisation. This media guide will contain information on readership and traffic statistics, publication dates, deadlines, rate cards, potential discounts, varying advertising options and sample adverts. This section will also have contact links directly to the advertising service with full explanations of Tribal's advertising support service so as to provide an easy route for schools to place adverts in their chosen media.
Response handling techniques: options, advantages and drawbacks of differing approaches will be detailed with a focus towards efficient approaches that are candidate-friendly as well as being time/cost effective. Links to Tribal's recruitment process support team will be available here in the event that a school wishes to adopt external support.
Candidate assessment and selection: guidelines and best practices surrounding all manner of selection tools and techniques available to Headteachers and/ or Governing Bodies will be featured and explained. Direct access to Tribal's assessment support services will also be available here for those who wish to enquire about external support.
Useful links: any and all useful links will be made available to either the school or authority in one place
Contact details: whether for implementation support, technical support or sales enquiries, the system will provide telephone, email and online form communication options to liaise directly with the appropriate Tribal Teams.
Tribal Staff Support
In addition to its online and centralised service centers,, Tribal will also use its national office and staff base to support schools, authorities and regional bodies. With offices in London, Bristol, Birmingham, Nottingham, Manchester and Leeds, our network and 250-strong client support account teams will provide regionalised back-up to ensure that the system achieves its goals and objectives. Our staff activity and structure means that the DCSF will have a regionalised expert team to promote the system.
Our regionalised teams already provide a complete localised service that is dedicated to public sector employers and their recruitment needs at all levels through face-to-face and office based services. Their involvement in supporting this project will be as follows:
Client facing account management staff will be fully briefed and expected to:
Attend meetings, seminars and speak at group events to explain what benefits the system will provide for employers and candidates alike. The emphasis will be on ensuring that HR staff within authorities, Headteachers and school based staff and governors understand what the system has to offer them, understand how to implement it for their own recruitment purposes, realisethe costs involved, and perhaps most importantly regard the system as a fundamentally strategic and tactical tool in their recruitment armoury.
To regionally drive take-up of the system through the organisation of regionalised launch events that Tribal will manage. It is planned that events will happen around the country at time of launch and then again on a six-monthly basis thereafter.
To include the system website as a recommended medium for advertising all schools-based vacancies through its inclusion as the main media of any requested media schedules - whether the school originator is currently part of the system or not.
To be able to despatch further information surrounding the system via email.
Office based account handling and support staff will be fully briefed and expected to:
To regionally drive take-up of the system through their telephone and email dealings with authorities and schools, and supporting account managers' activities.
To be able to steer and support any enquirer towards an appropriate destination (individual, URL, system link, support desk or otherwise) to answer any query posed.
To be able to despatch further information via email surrounding the system.
The breadth of our work ensures that Tribal's education domain expertise is constantly refreshed
and that we maintain an understanding of the latest government strategies, enabling us to
support clients with strategic planning for the implementation of these strategies. Our mainstream
education portfolio is extremely complex and already covers the following areas of activity:
School improvement.
Support for national challenge schools on the Greater Manchester Challenge programme and for schools and Local Authorities across the Country
Leadership development opportunities for school governors and senior managers.
Interim management in schools, colleges and local authorities.
School inspection (we are the largest RISP with two regions contracted to OfSTED);
Academies (currently ten projects contracted with the Academies Delivery Unit and seven successfully completed
Schools, colleges and local authority-based professional development
Early Years and Children's Centres.
Corporate Support for the Contract
Finally, Tribal will also provide corporate and centralised services that will support and benefit schools, authorities and the DCSF as follows:
Our central PR function that has excellent relationships with all UK media (as you would expect from one of the UK's largest advertising agencies) will support launch and ongoing marketing of the system with press releases to localised, national, trade and online media. This will help raise awareness of the system, and position it accordingly in the marketplace and mindsets of individuals within schools who will be potential applicants as well as recruiters. Among the team resources that are available, Jon Simpson, Barry Brookes and others are regular commentators in the educational press.
Tribal already has a national field and telesales forces that are highly experienced and successful in driving engagement of recruitment services and uptake on the Careersfor job portals. They will be tasked with supporting regionalized the account manager activities detailed above as well as directly enabling take-up of schools and authorities.
Back office support is also crucial to the perception of success and ensuring that our solution is well regarded. Tribal's financial management centre ensures that the invoice management process is a seamless and simple affair. Any and all queries relating to financial communications (such as invoices statements, etc) will be easily resolved by a team already experienced in working with schools across the country.
Research, Customer Engagement and Ongoing Learning. Tribal places a lot of emphasis towards continual learning and development and we engage a number of strategies to achieve this. Our Research function is continually looking towards new technologies, practices and techniques that will be fed through to the contract management team on an ongoing basis. This team also manages our ongoing customer engagement programme which would be applied to all adopters of the system. Regular surveys of satisfaction, usability and benefit analysis will be part of our annual activities within this contract.
National Implementation Delivery Requirements
Q5 - How do you envisage the account relationship being administered post contract award? Within this you must make it clear the scope and type of relationship with any service providers that are used directly in support of any services provided in lots 1, 2, and 3.
Account management at Tribal is about developing clear relationships with key customers and internal and external stakeholders.
If appointed to all three Lots, our key account management structure would focus on building positive links with the DCSF, LA's and Schools direct. Each would have its own dedicated Relationship Manager to lead and support teams as displayed on the structure diagram overleaf.
If the Lots are awarded across a range of commercial partners, we would also expect to develop account/relationship management links with counterparts in their organisations.
Account management planning would include:
Formal account plans being drafted
Action plans and customer reporting following all interactions
Regular, formal reviews by a senior Relationship Manager
Key account planning and review meetings (internal and external)
Service level agreements being developed and agreed
Development workshops and conferences for stakeholders and key account contacts
Formal quarterly reporting on account progress/issues
Clear project planning and management
For a contract of this size we would recommend that a dedicated confidential `shared space' is created via the web to offer full visibility on account plans and progress; and to create a natural portal for the communication of documents. We would create this space and provide password security access to appropriate DCSF contacts during the configuration stage; and then potentially extend this approach for the early adopters and wider stakeholders as the configuration phase leads into implementation.
If Tribal is successful for all three Lots, the entire account management team will operate as a tight unit that will work closely with the DCSF as we would not have any of the issues associated with multiple providers. But if Lots were awarded to other providers, Tribal would work closely with them. Indeed, we would aim to meet with the provider as soon as possible after contract award and establish clear guidelines around the factors listed above so that the approach to account management is made clear for all.
Figure 1: Tribal's Contract and account Management Structure for the DCSF Schools ATS System (legend below)

Media Market Services
Q1. How would your organisation cope and support the level of services required?
Tribal Group Plc has 43 offices based throughout the UK and Northern Ireland. Here over 2000 staff manage multi-million pound contracts for over 2,500 public sector clients. Please find below a map indicating the office locations:
Through our local authorities we work with hundreds of schools and a large number of independent schools and academies. Through the Tribal Group we work with nearly 95% of all
local authorities and are the UK leader in consultancy, professional support and delivery services
to the education and skills sector. Tribal is also the largest provider of inspection services for the
Office for Standards in Education (Ofsted) and information, advice and guidance to the Offender
Learning and Skills Service (OLASS).
We also supply consultancy and support to the Learning and Skills Council and work with the Training and Development Agency (TDA) and Lifelong Learning UK. We have built a strong relationship with the TDA through our work on teacher development and mathematics
Regular clients include schools, colleges, universities, local authorities and work-based learning providers, as well as private, not-for-profit and third sector organisations.
We now manage more than £400 million of capital projects in education and have a proven track
record of delivering projects and bespoke commercial solutions to schools, on time and budget
Tribal have offices in London, Bristol, Cardiff, Nottingham, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester,
Newcastle, Edinburgh and thus enjoy a strong presence throughout the country. With Tribal's
client base spanning the UK we understand the importance of providing a strong local and accessible service to clients whilst enjoying the strength, experience and resources that a
national agency can bring.
Over the past five years Tribal has seen increased growth year on year, and we are equally proud
of our excellent staff retention rate during this period.. Our track record is testimony to the fact we
have been able to balance the securing of new business with the retention of our existing
clients.. This has in the main been due to the high calibre of personnel we employ, our ability to
attract staff and our commitment to training and development.
We are also able to operate with an element of 'slack' within our business to take into account
very active periods of times from our client base and also for new clients to be easily transferred
to our business. However, there is always the need to increase staffing dependent upon the
business won. We believe in being proactive within the recruitment market at all times in order to
ensure we can attract the movers and shakers and not just simply react when business is won.
We also have a significant number of associates and interims who are assigned to our business
to help us and our clients with periods of peak activity.
We have specific examples of where we have worked with numerous clients and had to upscale
the business due to national framework contracts. These examples include PASA (Purchasing
and Supplies Agency), LCSG (London Contracts Supplies Group - consists of over 60 local
authorities based in London, Fire & Rescue Services and other public sector bodies) and the
DfES UK FE, HE and Schools. All of these frameworks required us to pitch for numerous clients
based around the UK with the knowledge that as the uptake of these contracts grow, up-scaling
would become necessary.
As per the above question, the main criterion is to ensure we have our fingers on the pulse of the
industry and have identified people or groups of people who would suit our business culturally
whilst adding value to our clients. We have taken significant numbers of teams from across the
recruitment industry to join Tribal over the past two years, and we believe we have been able to
attract them due to our high standing and professionalism within the market place as a whole.
Our resourcing division has grown from 19 people and two locations six years ago, to over 240
people across ten locations currently. This expansion and growth has been due to our
understanding of the public sector market place as a whole and our continued commitment during
this time to the sector. This has enabled us to attract some of the best talent within the industry
and more importantly retain these people.
We have a dedicated national media buying team. Our media services are based on a holistic approach taking into account a number of factors covering coverage, cost, cost-efficiency, media environment and evidential testimonials and case studies. We pride ourselves on constantly being able to deliver creative solutions that encompass great designs plus innovative ways of using different media cost effectively - whether it's a teaser campaign, an interactive banner, vod/podcast, behavioural targeting, ROP advertisement or a multimedia campaign utilising ambient, outdoor, radio and local press.
The team's role is to monitor and evaluate the performance and potential of all UK media so that our clients are using the most appropriate medium for their vacancies on every occasion. Our account handling teams have full access to regional information supplied by JICREG; full readership details of all local, regional and national press; NORAS (the National Online
Recruitment Audience Survey); MEAL/MMS - a system giving both volumes of advertising carried by individual media as well as that placed by client or brand and TGI/TGI Premier - a survey measuring consumer purchasing and lifestyle habits, including information on job changing patterns. Our Media Planning and Research Department harnesses and collates the collective experience of the Tribal group, sharing information between locations.
All account co-ordination, administration and media planning teams have full online access to whatmedia.co.uk - the only dedicated recruitment information service containing comprehensive data on all UK recruitment media.
We have teams of account co-ordinators within each office who will be able to access the ATS system and process advertisements received quickly and efficiently. If the advert requires setting into a border house style our fast-track typesetting teams will be able to produce a proof as a PDF to be sent back to the client for approval.
Tribal has extensive knowledge of the on-line recruitment marketplace and media, and indeed is among the largest buyers of on-line recruitment advertising space in the UK. Across the hundreds of potential sites we regard it as our job to advise our clients of the route for advertising a single role, negotiating annual contracts for all jobs or generating traffic back to a website and job listings via banners and buttons, search engine optimisation via keyword `cost-per-click advertising' or attracting the passive internet user through linking other lifestyle and interest sites.
With our excellent online media relationships, we would seek to buy any recruitment web site advertising on behalf of our clients at a saving of between 20 to 50% off standard rate card. For general awareness or enhanced promotions via buttons, banners, MPU's and various larger packages, the savings could be even higher.
We ensure our staff keep abreast of all the latest developments across the media through daily and weekly bulletins and updates. Additionally, our account teams regularly communicate with the media and have one-to-one relationships with the decision makers who influence and take bookings. For example, very recently Totaljobs the generalist recruitment site surpassed Monster for the most unique users reading and looking for jobs on their website. It now has over 1.1 million unique users. From ascertaining feedback from our clients across the country, we also know that most of Tribal's clients have reported a higher number of interested candidates applying to advertisements within the last year from Totaljobs than its rivals Monster, Jobsite, Fish4 and Workthing. Tribal is able to use information and knowledge such as this for the benefit of our clients not only in terms of choosing the right media, but also when it comes to negotiating costs with the media on our clients behalf.
In terms of our media buying capability, Tribal will achieve best value by:
Offering neutral and impartial media advice
Providing one point of contact for all media and advertising requests, resulting in an
efficient and streamlined process
Cost effective advertisement setting
Media buying power of a top four UK recruitment advertising agency
This model can be best illustrated through the following diagram:

Additional accounts joining this contract would be assigned a contract management team who would deliver a full induction, training and learning programme. Dependent upon the lead-in times required, some clients will need to move quickly whilst others will be happy to have a significant lead-in time. We will advise clients, based on their requirements, on the length of time we believe is practicable to ensure a smooth transition. At the same time, we will need to ensure that all systems and any areas of the contract they are taking up with us (such as our client centre module) are in place, and that all the relevant training is delivered to key personnel in time for the contract start date.
We believe by dealing with clients in this way we can ensure a smooth transition to Tribal with clear and tested methodologies that give new clients the right expectation from the high level of service they will receive throughout the contract.
Tribal consistently invests in the most effective and up-to-date technology which enables us to
work in close partnership with all of our clients, regardless of geographic location.
Because of the national spread of Tribal's offices, we invest time and resources in sharing information, knowledge and experience across the company. Staff benefit from regular inter-office training days and inter-office job swaps, and a company-wide conference for sharing experience takes place twice a year. Key personnel within the company that deliver specialist services (such as our Director of Diversity and our Research Director) will be available to attend meetings anywhere in the country. Additionally, Tribal has held sector- specific client forums and has introduced an HR champion scheme to ensure that we are constantly in touch with the hot issues in the public sector marketplace.
While the technology employed by Tribal brings our services closer to our clients, we equally appreciate the importance of personal accessibility and developing close relationships on a geographic level. For this reason, clients will generally be serviced by the office that is geographically closest to them. Of paramount importance to the service that Tribal provides is the ability of the client team to meet, understand and develop a face-to-face relationship with each client. In this way the team - and in particular the Account Manager - is able to gain an understanding of the specific issues and objectives of the client that relate to recruitment and HR, in order to produce the solutions and proposals that meet the clients' needs. A key aspect of the service from Tribal is having an Account Manager available at short notice to take briefs (for example for a bespoke advertisement for a difficult-to-fill post) and to carry out training workshops.
One of our key strengths is our uniquely hybrid structure and ethos of providing our clients with what they want in terms of an account team, rather than imposing a predetermined and `off the shelf account structure that makes no allowance for individual needs.
Media Market Services
Q2. How do you intend, or plan, to incorporate your services within a chosen ATS
provider? In your response you must specifically address how you will provide
information on the effectiveness of your service for assessing the effectiveness of media
routes and partners
As a highly experienced provider of integrated recruitment and resourcing services, we are well
versed in the use of ATS systems that we havedesigned and developed for our clients or our
clients have either developed themselves or acquired via i-Grasp, MrTed or JGP (Jobsgopublic)
ATS systems (for example).
Once the contract has been awarded we would suggest a pre-contract launch meeting with each
of the Lot providers and key specialists covering the ATS, media market and recruitment
services. This meeting will be to discuss the ATS, an overview of the system and the processes
that users will need to take when ordering online. We would be able to give a wide list of the
media/routes to market which can then be uploaded onto the system, and which we would embed
into system online advertising tracking tools that will provide the ATS with full management
information surrounding the success of individual adverts. The system will be able to track the
applications received from online job postings and provide detailed analysis on how many have
been shortlisted to interview stage, etc. We will then be able to access this data from the ATS to
measure how effective our media suggestions and routes to market are.
As an experienced media buyer, we have finely-honed systems and processes for ensuring that
the research we undertake and the information we supply to our clients on the effectiveness of
media routes is exactly what they require.
In order to keep ourselves abreast of market knowledge we have developed strategies to cover
all angles using the latest technologies open to us. Detailed below are the key technologies we
currently use to do this:
Media Planning
Up-to-date, relevant and accurate media advice is a crucial part of the advertising process. We
use our expertise and knowledge to deliver the best possible advice to all of our clients, with this
knowledge being gained from a number of sources:
Our regular meetings and contacts with the media ensure that we are aware of new
opportunities they may be bringing to the market as well as special reports, features and
editorial which may be of benefit to our clients.
All account co-ordination, administration and media planning teams have full on-line
access to whatmedia.co.uk, the only dedicated recruitment information service containing
comprehensive data on all UK recruitment media.
Our dedicated Media Buying and Planning Department. Its role is to monitor and evaluate
the performance and potential of all UK media so that our clients are using the most appropriate medium for their vacancies on every occasion. This function allows our
account handling teams to access regional information supplied by JICREG; full
readership details of all local, regional and national press; NORAS (the National On-line
Recruitment Audience Survey); MEAL/MMS - a system giving both volumes of
advertising carried by individual media as well as that placed by client or brand and
TGI/TGI Premier - a survey measuring consumer purchasing and lifestyle habits including
information on job changing patterns. Our Media Planning and Research Department
harnesses and collates the collective experience of the Tribal Resourcing Group, sharing
information between locations.
Each advertising campaign or single advertisement is treated individually to ensure the right
vehicle is chosen first time. Rather than simply place the advertisements in the same media, we
see an important part of our role as challenging your media choice and constantly looking for
more cost effective and targeted routes to market. In recruitment terms we will recommend the
media which we believe will produce the most appropriate candidates.
Our advice is not limited to certain publications. As a full service advertising agency, we can
access every publication, on and off-line, outdoor, transport and radio.
At Tribal we pride ourselves on constantly being able to deliver creative solutions that
encompass great designs plus innovative ways of using different media cost effectively -
everything from billboard posters, to press `wrap arounds', buses, trains and taxis and a unique
mix of on and offline press.
Tribal has extensive knowledge of the online recruitment marketplace and media, and is among
the largest buyers of on-line recruitment advertising space in the UK. Across the hundreds of
potential sites we regard it as our role to advise you of the route for advertising a single role,
negotiating annual contracts for all jobs, generating traffic back to your website and job listings
via banners and buttons, search engine optimisation via keyword `cost-per-click advertising' or
attracting the passive internet user through linking other lifestyle and interest sites. The Internet is
a very cost-effective medium, and as a result is a pivotal part of any best value audit of current or
future practices.
Tribal ensures that its staff keep abreast of latest developments across the media through daily
and weekly bulletins and updates. Additionally, your account teams regularly communicate with
the media and have one-to-one relationships with the decision makers who influence and take
bookings.
For example, very recently Totaljobs, the generalist recruitment site, surpassed Monster for the
most unique users reading and looking for jobs on their web site. It now has over 1.1 million
unique users. From ascertaining feedback from our clients across the country, we also know that
most of Tribal's clients have reported a higher number of interested candidates applying to
advertisements within the last year from Totaljobs than its rivals Monster, Jobsite, Fish4 and
Workthing. Tribal is able to use information and knowledge such as this for the benefit our clients,
not only in terms of choosing the right media, but also when it comes to negotiating costs with the
media on our clients' behalf
Tribal also understands that within the education marketplace there are a number of vacancy
areas that may require a special focus to attract and retain sufficient quantity of the best applicants. Additionally, the diversity of the market means that some advertising and recruitment
campaigns often need to be targeted towards particular audiences. These can include, for
example:
Head Teachers
Individuals working for other similar organisations
People looking to make a career move or enter employment
Returners to work
International staff
Individuals from minority groups
Specific age groups.
Certain vacancies can prove difficult to recruit to or specific groups hard to reach. To ensure that
the campaign is as effective as possible and that the message and media choice are appropriate
to the needs of the target market, your Account Manager may seek the assistance of either our
dedicated Media Manager or Tribal's Research team. This research can involve running focus
groups with representatives from the audience groups (including, for example, both current and
prospective employees) exploring what they are looking for from an employer; what they consider
to be an employer of choice; how they think the organisation can and should communicate
effectively with other people from their group; current levels of awareness and perceptions of the
client organisation; perceptions of logos and straplines, and what these messages mean to
individuals.
What it is that makes the organisation attractive to candidates? In some cases it may be the
salary; in others the benefits, the flexible working, or even the reputation that comes either with
the status of the role or the employer in question. Different things attract different candidates.
What we can be sure of is that, by working closely with the HR and departmental teams and our
own creative resource, we can make your advert attractive and impactful in whichever media we
use - whether it's in the press, online or even on the back of a bus.
As mentioned earlier, using the correct media is essential in targeting hard to reach groups, and
given that channels of media have changed dramatically over the last ten years, often the only
way to understand clearly whether or not the current media is effective is to work with the
individual groups and understand in more detail how they go about finding a job and where they
would look. This can be a complex process, as reaching the right people can be difficult.
However, we typically use a range of approaches for reaching these audiences, such as:
Securing e-mail lists from particular specialist groups (where permissible)
Running focus groups with individuals from particular target groups (such as minority
ethnic groups)
Running survey attraction campaigns to direct individuals in key target groups to the
questionnaire.
By utilising these approaches, combined of course with the inherent in-depth expertise your
account teams have from many years of hands-on experience, you can be safe in the knowledge
that the advice and guidance we give you is very well founded.
Reporting
The most important aspect is that users of the system receive the management information they
require to provide the data that is most relevant. We can and do produce numerous reports for
our clients, from basic information to fully integrated information (for example from an advert
appearing in a specific paper, through to response, interview or EO stats and overall costs).
Below we have given some examples of the way in which you can access all of this reporting via
Tribal.
In addition to our standard MI media reports, the ATS system will also fully track the success
rates of all online media placed (identifying the potential candidate numbers each advert
generates as well as the number of resulting applications) by collating click-throughs from the
adverts that are automatically sent back into the ATS. Printed press and other media is also fully
tracked through the application process as candidates, when they are completing the application
form, are presented with exactly the media options that are being used for the specific role. The
ATS system or Tribal will also provide the following report detailing average spend per media, %
spend online and number of posts placed:

* Recruitment only - does not include public notices/tender adverts
Additional points:
Posts advertised which had an above average spend per post included:
ECAF Project Officer (£8,022.81 - TES, Children Now, Guardian)
Care Manager (£4,6711 - The Guardian)
Planning Officer - Enforcement (Planning £3,998.76)
Key conclusions:
Increased number of posts as expected compared to August, however expensive media
utilised (TES, CYPN, Planning, Guardian) has meant an increase in spend.
Excessive media for ECAF Project Officer
Media Market Services
Q3. How do you intend, or plan, to manage the relationship with the chosen ATS provider.
In your response you must also address the possibility that we may choose an ATS
provider who may not be your intended partner. Any commercial implications must be
highlighted.
At Tribal, we believe that our fully integrated service offering across all three Lots will provide a
seamless competitive advantage to schools and the DCSF. As an experienced and
knowledgeable resourcing and solutions organisation, we have an impressive track record of
working with a wide range of suppliers in providing a high quality, effective and innovative service. We are preferred suppliers under a range of contracts such as PASA, Catalist, DCSF HE, FE &
Schools and UAG where success depends upon the relationship between suppliers.
Based on our position on a wide variety of frameworks, we are well versed in managing
relationships and motivating success within providers to achieve key objectives and KPI's. We
would set up a series of review meetings which will be diarised throughout the year with an
annual review to assess the effectiveness of the relationship. The purpose of these meetings will
be to discuss key developments within the marketplace, use of the ATS system, MI generated
orders received online and the overall take-up of the system and services.
In terms of `motivating success' we would suggest developing a toolkit/charter that we would all
follow, in terms of developing an open and honest relationship and working in partnership to
ensure the success of the contract. Whether we are successful on all Lots or not, our pricing
policy as submitted with this tender will of course remain unchanged, as would the resourcing that
would be applied in the delivery of the Media Services Lot. We do not envisage any commercial
implications in using another supplier for ATS Services.
We would need to keep in regular contact with the chosen ATS provider, whether that is Tribal or
another supplier, to ensure we are kept abreast of the early adopters coming on board with the
system through Phase 1 and the continued sales conversion strategy to attract new users. This will be key as we would need to understand the size of the schools, LA, value of the contract,
number of advertisements placed and develop an idea of any existing media contracts in place.
These figures would then support our media negotiations. As indicated within the case study for
PASA, our recommendations will be to develop a microsite that holds all the media contract
negotiations, special rates and volume deals as well as all the media deadlines associated with
local, national and specialist press titles. These can then be easily accessed by all users,
recruiting managers etc.
We would want to be fully involved in the launch road shows and to ensure that information on
the marketplace and key case studies/success stories is compiled for the newsletters and mail
shots sent out by the ATS provider.
Once the contract has been awarded we would suggest a pre-contract launch meeting with each
of the Lot providers and key specialists covering the ATS and recruitment services lots. This
meeting will be to discuss the ATS, present an overview of the system and the processes that
users will need to take when ordering services online. We would provide a wide list of the media
titles which can then be uploaded onto the system.
Through our monthly, quarterly and annual reviews we will be constantly looking at new
developments within the media marketplace and presenting these at our regular review meetings.
The management information will allow us to analyse fully the response and the process job
seekers then go through, from ordering online through to the services provided. We will be
constantly looking at ways to perfect this process and will develop a strong working relationship
with all the suppliers and the DCSF in delivering this.
Media Market Services
Q4. How would your organisation help promote best practice within the Schools
recruitment market:
Tribal is a leading UK provider of consulting and professional support services, with a number
one position in several of our markets. We help a wide range of clients - over 2,500 in the public
sector alone - to improve the quality of their services to customers.
Through our local authorities we work with hundreds of schools and a large number of
independent schools and academies. Through the Tribal Group we work with nearly 95% of all
local authorities and are the UK leader in consultancy, professional support and delivery services
to the education and skills sector. Tribal is the largest provider of inspection services for the
Office for Standards in Education (Ofsted) and information, advice and guidance to the Offender
Learning and Skills Service (OLASS).
Tribal is one of the main providers of services to the Quality Improvement Agency (QIA). We also
supply consultancy and support to the Learning and Skills Council and work with the Training and
Development Agency (TDA) and Lifelong Learning UK. We have built a strong relationship with
the TDA through our work on teacher development and mathematics
Regular clients include schools, colleges, universities, local authorities and work-based learning
providers, as well as private, not-for-profit and third sector organisations.
We now manage more than £400 million of capital projects in education and have a proven track
record of delivering projects and bespoke commercial solutions to schools, on time and budget.
Throughout all our schools and local authority dealings surrounding recruitment and staffing, we
will as a matter of course be promoting the ATS system and associated services as best practice
that should be employed, therefore encouraging take-up at all governance levels supporting the
direct activities we will be undertaking as part of this contract.
The Tribal technology perspective
Tribal has been providing creative and proven information management and IT solutions for more
than 20 years to improve and transform organisations.
We provide full business solutions which maximise the use of information for improved service
delivery, back office administration and management planning.
We deliver systems and services to more than a third of colleges in England and Wales, 50% of
colleges in Scotland, over half of all local authorities and a third of work-based learning providers.
Our clients also include 60% of higher education institutions, local authorities, NHS Trusts, the
National Learning and Skills Council, government departments and agencies, and the private
sector.
With the increasingly important role that technology and information plays in conducting business,
the contract team and all associated specialists are able to support local authorities and schools in integrating their people and processes with the technology and associated recruitment services
support to deliver cost effective solutions for their recruitment needs.
The Tribal training perspective
Tribal is one of the largest providers of training and continuous professional development to the
public sector, where our clients include local authorities, government departments, the NHS,
schools, universities and colleges, and the private sector.
We can help organisations deal with the changes that are emerging in the market, including the
growth of in-house training - (more organisations want in-house activities that train all
staff/groups of staff together) equality and diversity, the increased use of blended learning
activities including distance learning ,and the growth in the use of technology to support
continuing professional development (CPD).
The training services detailed within this tender submission include task-related, one-day training
courses for customer staff, online training and workflow guidance, support manuals and helpdesk
staff trained to walk users through processes as required. These efforts will combine to educate
and enable all customer user groups of the ATS system and supporting services to adopt
processes that support best practice in recruitment, attract quality applicants and do so costeffectively.
Tribal's continual development
As our expertise and experience extends way beyond recruitment advertising, we can respond to
the latest developments and areas of best practice in all areas of recruitment and selection.
Part of the remit of having a research team at Tribal is to review changes and developments
continually across the education sector and evaluate the potential implications for the
employment marketplace. This information will be fed back regularly to users of the contract so
that they are able to offer the most up to date advice and guidance.
Work in this area includes:
Review of government white and green papers and the production of internal briefing
reports which explore implications for workforce planning, recruitment and retention
Review of other published reports which help to develop a knowledge base around key
themes and issues (for example public perceptions of the public sector)
Specific research of regions to support work with clients. This usually involves looking at
the geo-demographic profile of the local population as well as the education and skills
gaps within a region
In certain instances, this information can be used as base data against which the client's staff
base can be profiled; the intention being to determine gaps between the profile of the workforce
and the local population.
Thematic research is also a part of our portfolio. Recent research has included developing a
better understanding of:
The barriers to attracting people into the public sector from the private sector
Leadership styles among managers in the public sector
Views and opinions of people from minority ethnic groups as to 'best practice' in
embracing diversity in recruitment advertising messages.
To provide examples, we have carried out specific research into recruitment and retention in
Social Care, Environmental Health and Housing Officer recruitment. All these studies involved
running focus groups and carrying out telephone questionnaires with staff at numerous local
authorities up and down the country as well as with many graduates, Heads of Service and Chief
Executives. Seminars were run to share this information with clients and a written report was
produced. The Social Care research was also published in Community Care and the
environmental health research support by the Chartered Institute of Environmental Health.
Our research can be delivered in a variety of ways:
As written reports
As workshops to key staff within each organisation
Throughout the launch strategy roadshows we will present on best practice
At review meetings with the ATS and Recruitment services suppliers who can facilitate
information on best practice to users of each service
Published on a password protected area of our dedicated micro-site
Generic research (as outlined above) is provided to our clients free of charge. Bespoke
research is chargeable
Promoted through the quarterly newsletters sent out as a mailshot to our database of
clients (an example is detailed below)
User guide section within front end website
At the outset of the contract we will develop a section within the front endfor all users. This will
hold a range of information including:
Contact details and role overview for the Tribal team
Our services broken down by Lots
Media guide with deadlines
Advertising and non-advertising workflows
Quarterly newsletters
Training events and details of webinars
Online satisfaction surveys and feedback forms
The user guide will also have a dedicated area for signing up to receive our quarterly newsletter
by email. The newsletter will include information on market updates, innovative recruitment
methods and tools, the latest legislation, media intelligence and local demographic and
employment trends relating to the education sector.
Webinar training sessions
Training is an integral part of our service. We are committed to achieving Best Value and
ensuring that advertising is cost-effective and competitive. To keep clients up-to-date on the latest
developments in the industry/sector and ahead of the market, we believe that our ongoing advice
and webinars - where best practice is shared - are essential.
A webinar is a multi-media presentation that allows participants to hear our instructor through a
telephone conference call, video conference or web conference whilst following the presentation
element via a web page. The web element also offers the ability to ask questions via an online
messaging tool and allows instant polls on topics discussed.
We can run a variety of webinars. These are usually led by senior advertising or consulting staff,
and can cover many HR, recruitment and selection issues as well as advertising.
Workshops could include:
The use of e-recruitment and digital media
The recruitment advertising process
Copywriting and creativity
The use of research in recruitment
Being an Employer of Choice
The role of the internet in recruitment
Introducing the media
Employment law - an update
Diversity
The microsite will hold the list of training events that local clients will be able to access as well as
being able to book a place electronically. A text or email alert will then be sent confirming the
date/time, with a reminder being sent a few days in advance of the webinar.
Tribal is serious about the way that it manages and shares information, innovation and best
practice. As a starting point, all our staff have in-depth sector knowledge with many of the people
who work for us having joined us from the public sector. To ensure that our people maintain a
high level of subject matter knowledge, expertise and use of best practice we deploy a number of
processes. These include:
Special Interest Groups (SIGs), set up to ensure that project knowledge, service
knowledge and planning is shared with all staff who operate in a particular field or who
deliver a particular service.
Briefing guides. The output from SIGs is often briefing guides for particular clients or
services, and these are distributed throughout our offices.
Statements of capability. At the end of each assignment the lead is required to write a
short summary of the assignment which describes the business problem, what we did
and what the outcome was. These documents help our staff to keep up-to-date with work
that we are delivering.
Thought Leadership. In order to ensure that we leverage what we learn from our
assignments and to help improve the delivery of services, we encourage all project leads
to draft thought leadership pieces. All staff, as part of their annual objectives, are
committed to be involved in producing at least one Thought Leadership piece or `how to'
guide. Progress on these pieces is reviewed at mid-term and end of year reviews. In this
way we ensure that we capture the insight and experience of our consultants and make
certain it is shared internally within the organisation as well as with customers.
Meetings. Associates are kept informed through networking events that take place
throughout the year.
Think tanks. To maintain understanding of policy development and significantly
contribute to thought leadership, we actively engage with think tanks. Our involvement
includes membership of discussion groups and co-development of research, points of view and thought-pieces. We maintain a balanced approach on political perspectives
with equal involvement in left and right-leaning groups.
Knowledge share sessions where an expert in a particular professional specialism will
share their thoughts and knowledge with a small number of managers in an open
discussion.
As the marketplace for attracting candidates changes to meet the fast-evolving economic climate,
we will need to review how, where and in what numbers candidates are responding to adverts
and other forms of communication. A downturn in the economic market could adversely impact
the majority of UK employers but is likely to increase drastically the volume and quality of
candidates that apply to join the education sector as a `safe' employer. This may well have a
positive impact on the diversity of applicants that apply, but could have adverse impacts in other
ways.
Media Market Services
Q5. How would your organisation communicate its value over and above how the service
might be managed within a typical school or local authority?
Tribal currently holds over 100 formal contracts with Local Authorities around the UK and, should
we be appointed this contract, we would look to approach our current clients to communicate the
value of this new contract immediately. Tribal feels that this action alone will help to ensure a
high level of early adoption of the service beyond that attainable by other potential providers, but
we will not be relying on this alone.
We will communicate the value of contract adoption in a variety of different ways, namely:
Through the media negotiations and contracts that we will secure based on joint volumes
Via the MI produced from the ATS system on the efficacy of the online media we suggest
Migration from press to online - ratios provided quarterly
Our ability to process advertisements to a high level
Our quality control procedures based on our ISO accreditation
Quarterly education newsletters produced and distributed on the market-place, best
practice, success stories and case studies
Webinar training provided throughout the life of the contract on the use of media (both on
& off-line), best practice, creativity and copywriting
Reports generated on our online satisfaction surveys
Quarterly and annual review meetings
Ongoing roadshows
It is our belief that the most important element a client looks for in an agency is a high quality,
personal and responsive service. Delivered in such a way that you know, whatever is required,
the agency will do everything to get it done. By talking to organisations we know this is often
promised but too rarely delivered. To ensure that our service levels remain consistently high, we
support the operation of a service level agreement (SLA) with all of our clients. The SLA outlines
all advertising and related recruitment procedures, forming a `promise' between our organisation
and yourselves.
We will measure our performance against the SLA through key performance indicators - a
mixture of management reports, satisfaction surveys and regular review meetings. Review
meetings are essential to the successful running of the contract. These enable us not only to
review the processes, contract rates, volume deals, media solutions and progress of the
relationship, but also to provide an excellent forum to develop and monitor the overall recruitment
strategy. It will help us examine innovative ways to address key staff groups as well as overarching recruitment issues such as migration online and the recruitment and selection process.
Along with a review of the SLA and key performance indicators, we would prepare an overview
report of the activity/performance in the last quarter. This would include analysis of:
Activity: number of advertisements, expenditure, media usage
Outcomes: response analysis, specific project results, error ratios/resolutions
Updates: latest research from the sector/industry, new media etc
Process/relationship development - amendments to the SLA, new initiatives, change to
process, upgrading of service standards as new developments occur within the agency.
On-line service assessment surveys :sent out confidentially on an ad-hoc but regular basis by the
contract manager to ensure we are consistently monitoring our performance and the progress of
our relationship.
User guide section within front end web site
At the outset of the contract we will develop a dedicated section within the front end for all users.
This will hold a range of information including:
Contact details and role overview for the Tribal team
Our services
Media guide with deadlines
Advertising and non-advertising workflows
Quarterly newsletters
Training events and details of webinars
Online satisfaction surveys and feedback forms
The microsite will also have a dedicated area for signing up to receive our quarterly newsletter by
email. The newsletter will include information on market updates, innovative recruitment methods
and tools, latest legislation, media intelligence and local demographic and employment trends
relating to the education sector.
Webinar training sessions
Training is an integral part of our service. We are committed to achieving Best Value and
ensuring that advertising is cost effective and competitive. To keep clients up-to-date on the latest
developments in the industry/sector and ahead of the market, we believe that our ongoing advice
and webinars, where best practice is shared - are essential.
A webinar is a multimedia presentation that allows participants to hear our instructor through a
telephone conference call, video conference or web conference whilst following the presentation
element via a web page. The web element also offers the ability to ask questions via an online
messaging tool and allows instant polls on topics discussed.
We can run a variety of webinars. These are usually led either by senior advertising or consulting
staff, and can cover many HR, recruitment and selection issues as well as advertising.
Workshops could include:
Use of e-recruitment and digital media
The recruitment advertising process
Copywriting and creativity
The use of research in recruitment
Being an Employer of Choice
Competing with the commercial market-place
The role of the internet in recruitment
Introducing the media
Employment law - an update
Diversity
The section will hold the list of training events that local clients will be able to access as well as
being able to book a place electronically. A text or email alert will then be sent confirming the
date/time, with a reminder being sent a few days in advance of the webinar.
Online meetings
We envisage more and more meetings taking place via a web conference, and actively ask our
staff to organise ad hoc meetings and take briefs in this way. Meetings can be easily scheduled
and can take place within 24 hours, enabling us to respond quickly to your requests whilst
including a number of the Tribal team such as ourart directors, copywriters or web
designers/developers who might not necessarily have been able to get out of the office to attend
a face-to-face meeting.
Online recruitment feedback questionnaires
We regularly ask for feedback on our performance through the use of online satisfaction surveys
and feedback forms.
Emails are sent to recruiting managers and local clients asking them to click on the link included
to access our online form held within the microsite, and then to complete the feedback form to
assess our performance against a creative campaign or project.
The information collated is then presented at quarterly review meetings.
We also request feedback on an ad-hoc basis on our overall performance and satisfaction on the
services we provide. These are also accessed online through the user guide.
Media Market Services
Q6. Please provide an overview of the process for press production and placement (for
campaigns at all levels)?
Key to the success of the contract is looking at more use of online media and migrating
advertisements from print to online. As part of our standard account co-ordination service we will
always recommend the use of online media, and where roles such as HR, Finance and Admin &
Clerical are being placed recommend that these adverts are placed online only.
All of our account co-ordinators are trained regularly on the online marketplace and how to
research the most appropriate online tools. Enhance Media, who produce the twice-yearly
NORAS (National Online Recruitment Audience Survey) research which details how the online
audience searches for jobs, regularly runs training sessions that ensure our teams are kept
abreast of all of the latest developments. With over 1,000 job boards to choose from, our teams
need to be able to research the most appropriate jobsite that will generate a high level of
response.
We strongly recommend that those adverts appearing online are written specifically for the web
as the online audience reads copy in a totally different way to print. We have highlighted below
our approach to writing copy.
Below we have indicated our approach to advertisement placement and production for both print
and online media.
Our system for processing adverts has been built on years of successful delivery. It has been
developed to ensure we are proactive in providing advice on both copy and media, and that each
advert gives the best opportunity to attract quality candidates. Our account management teams
will have direct access to the ATS system as well as being alerted once a media booking has
been ordered online. The structure chart below indicates the resources:

Press advertisement production and placement
Our process for advertisement placement and media booking is outlined below:
The allocated account coordinator is 100% office based and will therefore be available on a direct
telephone line or on email at all times.
On receipt of the advertisement via a draft electronic version published via the ATS system,
details are logged into your account coordinator's advert tracking book. This book contains
individual advert tracking forms - each has its own number or ATN (advert tracking number) and
is in triplicate. This number identifies the advert to both the client and the Tribal team.
One copy of the form remains in the book at all times so that it can be used as an easy reference
manual if our clients want to repeat an advertisement at some time in the future. The other two
copies of the ATN form are removed from the book. One copy accompanies your advertisement
throughout the production process. The other remains on your Account Coordinator's desk, acting
as a constant reminder that your advertisement is being processed and allowing your account
coordinator to check on the progress.
The following information is then logged in the advert tracking book:
Client name
Date of receipt
Publication and insertion date
Media booking deadline
Artwork delivery deadline
The advert is then given a preliminary check to ensure that:
Publication, if specified, is relevant and optimal for the specific vacancy. As a matter of
course via the media monitoring data that is available from our ATS system, either the
customer user or our account management staff will be able to compare the track history
of media types and advert options within media types to help to ensure that the correct
selection of media is always adopted.
Style instructions are known
We hold any necessary logos
Any queries are then raised with the originator of the advert and/or the receipt of advert is
confirmed. Confirmation of receipt will be made within an hour of receiving the advertisement.
Within 48 hours of receipt, draft copy written from job description and person specification,
proforma or brief will be sent through for approval.
If necessary, we will pre-book space with media (i.e. for those publications that may run out of
media space before deadline or for those to whose printers the artwork is sent direct).
The ATN forms are checked regularly throughout the day by the supervisor to ensure all adverts
are being processed where necessary and that all deadlines are met.
When the advert is ready for processing the following details are checked:
The organisation's full/proper heading
Job title, salary and grade where appropriate
Location
Text examined for literals, grammar, syntax
Copy edited to ensure correct/relevant information is given to potential candidates
Application details, phone numbers, address and reference numbers
Closing dates (where appropriate), interview dates
Policy statements
All the above details are cross-checked to the details held on the clients' master reference data
records.
All copy is diversity-proofed to ensure it complies with all legislation and any areas of concern will
be raised with the client.
No alterations or amendments are made without checking with the client unless previously
arranged (i.e. policy statements etc).
A full spell check and copy check is then performed. All adverts are proof-read between two
Account Coordinators.
The advert is then passed to our team of Typesetters, who will ensure that, unless they have
been given alternative instructions, the client's set house style is adhered to.
The Production Manager manages the brand of the client ensuring that all elements of the advert
or design, if different to the house style, conform to branding guidelines. The production team is
also expert in setting and sizing advertisements cost-effectively whilst ensuring impact within the
selected media.
The fully costed first draft copy is sent to the authorised officer in PDF format within 24 hours of
receipt, along with a deadline for approving and/or amending the advertisement, and
additional/alternative online and offline media suggestions.
At this stage we will always endeavour to allow at least 24 hours for the authorised officer to
complete their checks. Any corrections/amendments to typeset copy are always re-proofed.
Once the advertisement has been approved by the client, the following procedures are applied:
All details are entered onto our computerised booking system (Adserve), which has been
designed specifically for the advertising industry. A media order is then raised (all details relating
to the space booking are held on the system for generation of sales invoices and management
reports).
After the Account Co-ordinator has checked the advert it is passed to our Quality Manager for
final approval. All client details are re-checked with specific attention to the four Ps:
Publication: issue and position
Precision: all copy checked against client's original
Policy: all specific client requests adhered to
Paperwork: space order must be checked to ensure all financial codes have beenentered and instructions to the media are correct.
The quality of all final artwork is also checked and if all details are correct, the Quality Manager
signs off against the space order number on the client's original order. Only on obtaining final
signed approval for the advert is it dispatched to the media.
The media is contacted to ensure receipt and that all details are clear. Upon booking, the Account
Co-ordinator will always seek to obtain a 'spot buy' (ad hoc discount) on the client's behalf. Where
this is successfully obtained, a revised cost will be sent to the client.
Following publication of the advertisement, the client is invoiced and a voucher supplied. The
Account Co-ordinator will check the accuracy of the published advert and should any error have
occurred in publication, Tribal will investigate the problem and negotiate appropriate
compensation from the media for the client.
Our process is highlighted in the workflow overleaf:

Copywriting services
Copy can be written by Tribal from a job description and person specification. Draft copy is then sent and approved before a proof is created, within 48 hours of receipt.
Every advert is written by the same copywriting team to ensure you receive consistency in style and that one person is fully briefed on the language you want to project to the market. The benefits of this copywriting approach is clear: better quality copy which is more succinct and therefore more cost-effective.
In the first instance, should the user look to adopt this type of copywriting, we will train all relevant staff to use the service effectively and show the benefits this will bring to effective copywriting.
Taking a brief
In some cases, we may need to take a short brief from the recruiting officer/head teacher/governor etc to ensure we maximise the key selling points of the post. This also allows us to produce targeted headlines to attract potential applicants. This may take place on the telephone or face-to-face, dependent upon preference.
Proforma copywriting template
Within a competitive recruitment market, it is becoming increasingly important for every advert to be as effective as possible whilst being cost-efficient.. A proforma copywriting template enables managers to highlight the five most important points from the job description and person specification when sending these documents over, as well as stating any additional information which sells the role.
These points are then used as the 'backbone' of the advertisement. Standard introductory paragraphs can be created and these are then included at the start of the advertisement.
The proforma copywriting template can also double as a useful HR document as PO/order numbers, reference numbers, invoicing address and manager details can be included. So we could combine this with any current `request to recruit' forms you might currently be using. This is in addition to information such as media selection, section within the media and publication date.
Online media posting process
Our process for advertisement placement and media booking online is outlined below:
The allocated account coordinator is 100% office based and therefore will be available on a direct telephone line or on email at all times.
On receipt of the advertisement via a draft electronic version published via the ATS system, details are logged into your Account Co-ordinator's advert tracking book. This book contains individual advert tracking forms - each has its own number or ATN (advert tracking number) and is in triplicate. This number identifies the advert for both the client and the Tribal team.
One copy of the form remains in the book at all times so that it can be used as an easy reference manual if at some time in the future our clients want to repeat an advertisement. The other two copies of the ATN form are removed from the book. One copy accompanies your advertisement throughout the production process. The other remains on your account coordinator's desk, acting as a constant reminder that your advertisement is being processed and allowing your account coordinator to check on the progress.
The following information is then logged in the advert tracking book:
Client name
Date of receipt
Media suggestions (job boards) or request for research
The advert is then given a preliminary check to ensure::
The online job board, if specified, is relevant
Whether or not the copy needs writing by a specialist web copywriter
Any queries are then raised with the originator of the advert and/or the receipt of advert is confirmed. Confirmation of receipt will be made within an hour of receiving the advertisement.
We would strongly recommend that copy is rewritten, as the web audience reads copy online in a totally different way to print advertisements.
Online adverts designed purely for the web are an excellent method of drastically reducing cost when compared to the equivalent cost in a newspaper or publication. However, writing copy that is appropriate for the web requires different methods and skills. Our copywriters are experts in writing copy specifically for the web. The web audience reads copy in a different way to print with two general principles that need to be applied:
Job seekers read text more slowly on screen than they do off the page
Small paragraphs are easier to read and digest on screen
Therefore when preparing online copy we will reduce the length and break the text into small paragraphs. We also need to understand the job board search engine, as job seekers will search for keywords, so these keywords need to be repeated in the copy, this then gives the advert more opportunity to appear when a search is made.
We consider the following principles when preparing copy for the web:
Writing content
Put the most important information first
Use short paragraphs (less than 75 words), with sentences of varying length
Use two or three levels of headings and maintain this consistency of hierarchy
Use plain English
Create emphasis by highlighting sparingly
Avoid italics
Use active rather than passive voice
Use inclusive language, for example, 'you' and 'we'
House style
Use clear, plain English - preferably jargon-free
Avoid over capitalisation, particularly in headings
The first time that a term is used, it should be written in full and followed by the abbreviation
Ampersands should only be used in the official title of an organisation
Use the percentage sign (%) except in stock market announcements (RIS)
For dates, use the format '15 June 2007'. `15/06/07' can be used in tables
Do not use semi-colons or full stops at the end of lines in bulleted lists; the only exception
is if the bullet contains a full sentence
Use double quote marks when quoting speech; use single quote marks for product
names or other items that require highlighting
Write numbers from zero to ten in full and use digits for numbers from 11 onwards
Our web copywriters then review the copy against the following criteria:
Is the job title going to be searched for?
Salary, hours, geographical location - all need to be inserted into the advert
Use the person specification to define the skills and experience
Include job specifics such as benefits, how can the applicant apply, closing date
Include a unique job reference number to track responses
Repeat keywords to ensure that the advert appears high up in the rankings
Links added to the School's website for candidates to view further information
Smaller paragraphs created
The job board will be contacted throughout the job listings life to ensure that it appears high up in the search listings gaining maximum exposure.
As part of our back to basics training programme we hold training sessions for all of our account co-ordinators `Recruiting via the Internet' run by Enhance Media (who produce the NORAS research) for our employees and clients. These include training on copywriting specifically for the
web.
Q7. Media Market Services
Please provide an overview of the process for online job posting (for campaigns at all
levels)?
Tribal's system will allow for online job posting to be made directly by each of the customer
group types as required. Within the system will be a media library that will detail information
surrounding all the online media options that the implementation group wish to see in the
system. The data will cover information such as website traffic statistics, advertisement type
options, demographic user data (where available), pricing and value for money (VFM) data,
and customer satisfaction ratings.
The process for online job posting commences during the `new vacancy' upload process. It
can be facilitated by either the customer administrator/user or by Tribal as the media services
partner (from winning Lot 2). The following process maps out how the customer user will work
through the process.
If the job board route is selected by the School directly, then the school administrator will be
presented with a list of job boards that are available as potential candidate attraction vehicles.
The school administrator will be able to filter the list by job board type (e.g. niche or
generalist) in order to find the most appropriate job board in the quickest amount of time.
The school administrator will be able to view VFM and customer satisfaction ratings for each
job board as well as to review the pricing schedule per postings before committing to proceed
to the next stage within workflow.
The administrator then needs to select the job boards that they want the vacancy to be sent
to. Once job board or job boards are selected, the next step will be to display the vacancy
information that has been entered previously during workflow (the media template). This
information is what will be sent to each job board selected. The information will be, for
example, go-live & closing dates, vacancy title, salary band, employer name, description, job
role and hiring date etc.. We expect this to be one of the aspects that will require further
conversations and configuration during the specification stage.
The administrator will just need to click a confirm button and an email will be sent to each
selected job board. Each job board will have a generic `send to' email address associated
with it which will have been provided by the job board. The email will be sent to the address
set for each job board. The “From” address of the email will be set with the user name of the
administrator performing the action. This will allow for the job board upon receiving the email
to reply directly to the administrator as required (this element of the process will not be
tracked in the system).
When the vacancy is live, confirmation from the media is invariably sent direct to the school,
but prompts within the system can alert the school administrator to double check as required.
As browsers view the advert and it appears within their search results, a `hit' confirmation will
be sent back to the system from the advert which is collated alongside the advert posting
record so that on a 24/7 basis the school administrator will be able to view and track the
success of the online advert(s).
If in the event of need at any point in the future, the school administrator will also have the
ability to call back up adverts previously posted through the system and re-submit them to the
same media (or send to different media)..
Media Market Services
Q8. Please provide an outline of how your organisation would expect to manage the customer relationship with the different customer groups?
As a highly experienced recruitment and resourcing solutions provider we already successfully work with over 150 local authorities throughout the country, and so have easy access to key decision makers and budget holders. Through the Tribal Group we work with nearly 95% of all local authorities and are the UK leader in consultancy, professional support and delivery services to the education and skills sector. Tribal is additionally the largest provider of inspection services for the Office for Standards in Education (Ofsted) and information, advice and guidance to the Offender Learning and Skills Service (OLASS).
Tribal is one of the main providers of services to the Quality Improvement Agency (QIA). We also supply consultancy and support to the Learning and Skills Council and works with the Training and Development Agency (TDA) and Lifelong Learning UK. We have built a strong relationship with the TDA through our work on teacher development and mathematics.
Regular clients include schools, colleges, universities, local authorities, work-based learning providers, as well as private, not-for-profit and third sector organisations.
We now manage more than £400 million of capital projects in education and have a proven track record of delivering projects and bespoke commercial solutions to schools, on time and budget.
Tribal understands that to establish effective partnership working depends on building relationships within a local authority.. This not only ensures that strategic corporate-wide recruitment initiatives can be effectively planned and managed, but also that we can ensure recruitment is tailored and adapted to the needs of different individual schools, clusters and user groups.
Set out below are details of how Tribal will establish partnership working arrangements at theoutset of the contract with both the corporate team and directorates, and how we will ensure the development of good working relationships over the term of the contract.
Building Relationships with the LA Corporate HR Team
Tribal believes that effective relationships are developed out of shared knowledge and trust.
Therefore it is considered imperative at the outset of the contract that Tribal develops a strong knowledge base of the issues and challenges being faced within each individual local authority. It also means agreeing a clear action plan with the LA to support the schools' take-up of the ATS system and contract with stated targets and outcomes to work towards. Then Tribal delivers, as it is only by achieving these targets and outcomes can trust be developed between Tribal and its clients.

Building Relationships with Schools
Tribal believes the key challenge of developing relationships with schools is to provide them with high levels of support and guidance to enable them to make their recruitment more efficient and effective. When recruiting to new or replacement posts, most schools are intent on either following previous approaches or making the process quick. There may, of course, be nothing wrong with this, but often due to increased competition for good staff and the changing behaviours of today's applicants, previous practices may now be outdated, costly or burdensome.
To enact change in this behaviour we believe it can best be done with direct support from the
team of professionals associated with this contract who can guide them through the process and provide information to help them make the right choices (in terms of advert design, style, media and job positioning).
This team can also help to illustrate successes elsewhere, present the statistics of proof surrounding the media, monitor success of activities as they are happening and provide structured feedback to support ongoing improvements for the future.
Developing On-going Relationships
Over time, Tribal believes that effective partnerships are developed through a joint commitment to improvement and working alongside the customer groups to find new ways of delivering cost savings and improved outcomes. This can only happen if both partners are open and honest, and agency staff are in place who are responsive to the needs and demands posed by customers.

Media Market Services
Q9 - Is your organisation part of the COI Recruitment Advertising framework agreement?
No. We can confirm that Tribal is not part of the COI Recruitment Advertising framework
agreement.
Media Market Services
Q10 - If so, will you provide the same terms as part of this agreement?
No. N/A we are not part of the COI Recruitment Advertising framework agreement.
Recruitment Services
Q1 Please provide evidence that your organisation has adequate capacity to be able to support each of the three service (candidate search, attraction and assessment) across England?
Tribal Group Plc has 43 offices based throughout the UK, with over 2000 staff managing multi-million pound contracts for over 2,500 public sector clients. Please find below a map indicating the office locations:
With Tribal's client base spanning the UK and Ireland we understand the importance of providing a strong local and accessible service to clients whilst enjoying the strength, experience and resources that a national agency can bring. Our networks of specialist recruitment attraction offices in London, Bristol, Cardiff, Birmingham, Nottingham, Manchester, Leeds, Newcastle and Edinburgh cover the length and breadth of the country and are enhanced by the wider network of 41 Tribal offices. As the largest specialist public sector recruitment advertising agency in the UK, we can call on the expertise of over 40 dedicated executive search and selection professionals plus a team of researchers who are able to provide full support for schools, insight around media strategy and candidate availability. In addition, our dedicated team of fully trained assessors will offer support on all aspects of online selection and assessment centre design and management. We can respond quickly and efficiently to increases in activity as well as on-boarding new school enquiries.
The following structure diagram illustrates the scope of people and support services that will be involved through the project. It also shows the positioning within the overall contract management team of the 47 recruitment services delivery professionals who will be actively promoting this specific contract. All these people are employed by Tribal on a full-time basis. Depending upon their role / responsibility, the stage in the contract and the demand levels of the schools, they will work part or full-time on this project.
Over the past five years Tribal has seen increased growth year on year, and we are equally proud of our 98% staff retention rate during this period.. Our track record is testimony to the fact we have been able to balance confidently the securing of new business whilst retaining 99% of our existing accounts. This has in the main been due to the high calibre of personnel we employ, our ability to attract staff and our commitment to training and development.
We are also able to operate with an element of 'slack' within our business to accommodate very active periods for our existing client base and also for new clients to be transferred seamlessly to our business. However, there is always the need to increase staffing dependent upon the business won. We believe in being proactive within the recruitment market at all times to ensure we can attract the movers and shakers and not just simply react when new accounts are gained. We also have a significant number of associates and interims who are assigned to our organisation to help us and our clients with periods of peak activity.
For any framework contract such as this that will require the provision of an integrated contract team, it is vital that the organisation appointed has sufficient the capacity in terms of both the quantity and expertise of its people and stability in terms of the consistency of its delivery. We believe that Tribal can offer those criteria.
In response to the changing needs of the market, we have established our own recruitment process outsourcing (RPO) division to provide new and existing clients with scaleable and robust volume recruitment solutions. This division is not represented within the core account delivery structure diagram above but exists to support as needed. As a result of the combined personal and corporate experiences, Tribal can draw upon skilled managers and operatives to develop integrated project management methodologies that take into account both specialist and local/national advertising at the front end; large, scaleable teams capable of handling peaks of response (up to 30,000 for one campaign); flexible assessor teams able to manage everything from psychometric testing and full-blown assessment centres to one-off panel interviews and, overarching everything, an experienced project team with proven experience of successfully delivering to tight deadlines.
We were successful in being awarded the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra) Recruitment Services contract in May 2007. Defra works to protect the essentials of life: air, land, water and food. This wide-ranging remit necessitates a nationwide workforce of over 8,000 personnel in over 650 locations.
In today's dynamic and challenging business climate, the department looked to create a more streamlined and cost-effective way of delivering its advertising services as well as meeting its sustainability requirements. Defra therefore offered the contract as a framework agreement open to all Central Government Departments (OGD), their Executive Agencies and their Non-Departmental Public Bodies.
Since the launch of the contract we have commenced work with Animal Health, the government's executive agency primarily responsible for ensuring that farmed animals in England, Scotland and Wales are healthy, disease-free and well looked after; and the Insolvency Service, which operates from 38 Official Receiver Offices throughout England and Wales and places over 800 adverts a month.
To further underline our success in this area, we are a preferred supplier under the NHS PASA (NHS Purchasing and Supplies Agency) Recruitment services framework. The contract offers services to all NHS bodies throughout the UK; and over the course of 2008 a large number of new clients joined Tribal, increasing the total value of the contract from £5 million to just over £12 million. We could successfully manage this large increase by being able to respond quickly to new clients and staff up at key times throughout the year.
Department for Children, Schools and Families
Case Study: 14-19 Education Advisers - DCSF
Our brief was to find nine 14-19 Education Advisers'; one for each of the English Government Office regions. The Advisers' immediate priority was to deliver the Diplomas in September 2008. In addition, their remit included helping consortia to identify and address areas of concern; signposting them to examples of good practice and other sources of support and taking a wider role working alongside the Government Offices to implement the 14 -19 reforms.
We employed a targeted national advertising campaign, utilising broadsheets as well as regional and online press and supported by a dedicated website holding further details on the jobs. Running alongside this was a regionally focused search process identifying individuals with an in-depth knowledge of the 14-19 Curriculum, Qualifications and Reform programme. Relevant networks were also tapped into for recommendations of good candidates and included the likes of the Learning and Skills Council and National College for School Leadership. After sifting 247 applications, preliminary interviews with Tribal consultants were held concurrently across the country in Bristol, London, Birmingham and Manchester using teams made up of technical experts (ex-headteachers, ex-Directors of LAs etc) working with experienced recruitment consultants. After a further sift, final interview candidates were seen by a DCSF Panel in three locations: London, LSC offices in Coventry, and Sheffield.
An experienced and diverse range of nine Regional Advisers were found through this national search. The Advisers all have strong track records in 14-19 education and the group includes former heads and deputies from schools and colleges; OfSTED inspectors; and senior staff from Local Authorities and the Learning and Skills Council. In addition to nine Regional Advisers, DCSF were also able to appoint from the field two further Advisers given national briefs.
Case Study: Implementation Review Unit (IRU) Members
The Implementation Review Unit (IRU) was launched in April 2003 as the first ever independent scrutiny unit to cut red tape and reduce bureaucracy in schools. At the time their advisory panel consisted of 12 members, all working in maintained schools in England, which included headteachers of either secondary, primary or special schools, assistant/deputy headteachers of secondary schools, and a secondary school bursar. The aim of the assignment was twofold: to raise the profile of the IRU across England, and to find up to three new panel members from within the ranks of classroom teachers and members of school support staff. These new panel members would help give the IRU greater representation from across the school workforce. To add greater complexity to the assignment, these roles were on an advisory basis, meaning they had no salary attached and were performed in addition to the members day jobs.
With the school workforce at classroom teacher and support staff level numbering almost one million people across England, a targeted search process was not feasible. Instead a highly publicised advertising campaign was launched, with a colourful full page advertisement appearing on the front page of the jobs section in the Times Education Supplement and further information going out through TeacherNet. In addition to this an extensive awareness-raising campaign was put into action, contacting national networks to publicise the roles further and help cascade information down to the right level. These networks included the various teachers' unions (e.g. ATL, NASUWT, NUT, Unison, NAHT); national headteacher forums and the School Bursar Network; and English bodies running school programmes such as the National College for School Leadership, the Training and Development Agency and the Specialist Schools and Academies Trust.
After an extensive advertising and awareness raising campaign, interviews were held at the DCSF offices at Sanctuary Buildings in London in early January. After three days of interviews and some difficult choices three good appointments were made. The new members came from primary and secondary schools, with two being classroom teachers and the third being a member of school support staff
Some 46% of Tribal Group's business is within the education sector and we employ more than 900 specialist staff. In the Education Division, our customer base is predominantly within schools, academies and local authorities with some central government contracts. We are contracted to deliver on behalf of the DCFS support to Keys to Success schools for the Greater Manchester Challenge programme.
Our mainstream education portfolio is extremely complex and covers the following areas of
activity:
School and college improvement
Support for national challenge schools on the Greater Manchester
Challenge programme and support schools and Local Authorities across the Country
Schools, colleges and LA based professional development;
Leadership development opportunities for school governors and senior managers
Interim management in schools, colleges and local authorities;
School inspection (we are the largest RISP with 2 regions contractedto
OfSTED)
Local Authority and LSC consultancy and strategy reviews
Benchmarking in the FE and HE sectors
Academies (currently 10 projects contracted with the Academies Delivery Unit and 7 successfully completed
BSF (support for Local Authorities and numerous construction companies)
Schools, colleges and LA based professional development
Early Years and Children's Centres.
The breadth of our work ensures that Tribal's education domain expertise is constantly refreshed and that we have an understanding of the latest government strategies. This enables us to support clients with strategic planning for the implementation of these strategies.
Our education consultancy team has been created by attracting individuals with an outstanding track record in school and college management / improvement, local authority service, Inspection, HMI, research and professional development. We are continuing to recruit to enhance our capacity to deliver.
Our Education Division maintains hub offices in London, Nottingham, Sheffield, Bristol and Cambridge to ensure national coverage for our services.
Recruitment Services
Q2. How do you intend, or plan, to incorporate your services within a chosen ATS provider? In your response you must specifically address how you will support the supply of data for assessing the effectiveness of media routes and partners?
As a highly experienced provider of integrated recruitment and resourcing services, we are well versed in the use of ATS systems that we have either designed and developed for our clients or our clients have acquired from others.
Once the contract has been awarded we would suggest a pre-contract launch meeting with each of the Lot providers and key specialists covering the ATS and recruitment services. This meeting will be to discuss the ATS integration, an overview of the system and the processes that users will undertake when ordering online. We would be able to give a wide list of the recruitment services that we offer detailing their use and provides advice, background information and case studies than can then be uploaded onto the system for the school's benefit. Within the meeting(s) linkages between the ATS system and the contract management team for the recruitment services Lot would be established to feed enquiries efficiently from the system directly to the delivery teams.
Tribal also understands that within the education marketplace there are a number of vacancy areas that may require a special focus in order to attract and retain a sufficient quantity of the best applicants. Additionally, the diversity of the market means that some advertising and recruitment campaigns often need to be targeted towards particular audiences. These can include, for example:
Head Teachers
Individuals working for other similar organisations
People looking to make a career move or enter employment
Returners to work
International staff
Individuals from minority groups
Specific age groups
Certain vacancies can prove difficult to recruit to or specific groups hard to reach. In these cases it is vital to ensure that the campaign is as effective as possible and that the message and media choice are appropriate to the needs and wants of the target market. To achieve this, your Account Manager may seek the assistance of either our dedicated Media Manager or Tribal's research team. This research can involve running focus groups with representatives from the audience groups (including, for example, current and prospective employees) exploring what they are looking for from an employer; what they consider to be an employer of choice; how they think the organisation can and should communicate effectively with other people from their group; current levels of awareness and perceptions of the client organisation; perceptions of logos and straplines and what these messages mean to individuals.
What it is that makes the organisation attractive to candidates? In some cases it may be the salary, in others the benefits, the flexible working, or even the reputation that comes either with the status of the role or the employer in question. Different things attract different candidates. What we can be sure of is that, by working closely with the HR and departmental teams and our own creative resource, we can make your advert attractive and impactful in whichever media we use - whether it's in the press, online or even on the back of a bus.
As mentioned earlier, using the correct media is essential when targeting hard to reach groups. Given that channels of media have changed dramatically over the last ten years, often the only way to understand fully whether or not the current media is effective is to work with the individual groups and understand in more detail how they go about finding a job and where they would look. This can be a complex process as reaching the right people can be difficult. However, we typically use a range of approaches for reaching these audiences, such as:
Securing e-mail lists from particular specialist groups (where permissible)
Running focus groups with individuals from particular target groups (such as minority ethnic groups)
Running survey attraction campaigns to direct individuals in key target groups to the questionnaire.
As part of the Tribal Group we have access to a large number of education specialists and consultants who will be able to offer services such as:
Recruitment Process Outsourcing
Candidate management
Competency-based shortlisting
Interview Administration
Clearance Administration
Executive Search & Selection
Psychometric Testing
Assessment Centre Design & Delivery
Salary Benchmarking
To see evidence of our experience in providing recruitment services, please find below a case study:
Department for Children, Schools and Families 14-19 Education Advisers -
Aims of assignment - To find nine 14-19 Education Advisers, one for each of the English Government Office regions. The Advisers' immediate priority was to deliver the Diplomas in September 2008. In addition, their remit included helping consortia to identify and address areas of concern; signposting them to examples of good practice and other sources of support, as well as having a wider role working alongside the Government Offices to implement the 14 -19 reforms.
We employed a targeted national advertising campaign, utilising broadsheets as well as regional and online press and supported by a dedicated website holding further details on the jobs. Running alongside this was a regionally-focused search process identifying individuals with an in-depth knowledge of the 14-19 Curriculum, Qualifications and Reform programme. Relevant networks were also tapped into for recommendations of good candidates and included the likes of the Learning and Skills Council and National College for School Leadership. After sifting 247 applications, preliminary interviews with Tribal consultants were held concurrently across the country in Bristol, London, Birmingham and Manchester using teams comprising technical experts (ex-headteachers, ex-Directors of LEAs etc) working with experienced recruitment consultants. After a further sift, final interview candidates were seen by a DCSF Panel in three locations: London, LSC offices in Coventry, and Sheffield.
Outcome - An experienced and diverse range of nine Regional Advisers was found through this national search. The Advisers all have strong track records in 14-19 education and the group includes former heads and deputies from schools and colleges; OfSTED inspectors; and senior staff from Local Authorities and the Learning and Skills Council. In addition to nine Regional Advisers, DCSF were also able to appoint from the field two further Advisers given national briefs.
Reporting
The most important aspect is that users of the contract receive the management information they require to provide the data that is most relevant. We can and do produce numerous reports for our clients from basic information to fully integrated information (for example from an advert appearing in x paper, through to response stats, interview stats, EO stats and overall costs).
In addition to our standard MI media reports we will also provide reports detailing average spend per media, the percentage spend online and the number of posts placed.
Recruitment Services
Q3. How do you intend, or plan, to manage the relationship with the chosen ATS provider. In your response you must also address the possibility that we may choose an ATS provider who may not be your intended partner. Any commercial implications must be highlighted.
As an experienced and knowledgeable resourcing and solutions organisation, Tribal has a proven track record of working with a wide range of suppliers to provide a high quality, effective and innovative service. We are preferred suppliers under a range of contracts such as PASA, Catalist, DCSF HE, FE & Schools and UAG where success depends upon the relationship between suppliers.
Based on our position on a wide variety of frameworks, we are well versed in managing relationships and motivating success within providers to achieve key objectives and KPI's. We would set up a series of review meetings which will be diarised throughout the year, with an annual review to assess the effectiveness of the relationship. These meetings will be opportunities to discuss key developments within the market-place, use of the ATS system, the MI generated, orders received online and the overall take-up of the system and services. .
In terms of `motivating success' we would suggest developing a toolkit/charter that we would all follow, in terms of developing an open and honest relationship and working in partnership to ensure the success of the contract. Whether we are successful on all Lots or not, our pricing policy as submitted with this tender will of course remain unchanged, as would the resourcing that would be applied in the delivery of the Recruitment Services Lot. We do not envisage any commercial implications in using another supplier for ATS Services.
We would need to keep in regular contact with the chosen ATS provider, whether that is Tribal or another supplier, to ensure that we are kept abreast of the early adopters coming on board with the system through Phase 1 and the continued sales conversion strategy to attract new users. This will be key as we would need to understand the size of the schools, LA, value of the contract, number of advertisements placed and an idea of any existing media contracts in place. These figures would then support our media negotiations. As indicated within the case study for PASA, our recommendations will be to develop a microsite that holds all of the media contract negotiations, special rates and volume deals, as well all the media deadlines associated with local, national and specialist press titles. These can then be easily accessed by all users, recruiting managers etc.
We would want to be fully involved in the launch roadshows and to supply information on the marketplace, key case studies/success stories for the newsletters and mail shots sent out by the ATS provider.
Once the contract has been awarded, we would suggest a pre-contract launch meeting with each of the Lot providers and key specialists covering the ATS and recruitment services lots. This meeting will be to discuss the ATS, present an overview of the system and the processes that users will need to take when ordering services online. We would provide a wide list of the media titles which can then be uploaded onto the system.
Through our monthly, quarterly and annual reviews we will be constantly looking at new developments within the media marketplace and presenting these at our regular review meetings. The management information will allow us to analyse the response fully as well as the process job seekers then go through - from ordering online through to the services provided. We will be constantly looking at ways to perfect this process and will develop a strong working relationship with all the suppliers and the DCSF in delivering this.
Recruitment Services
Q4. How do you intend to provide data to support the different customer groups in their aim of becoming a highly valued Equal Opportunities Employer?
As a specialist in recruiting for the Public Sector, we work almost exclusively with organisations who are proactive supporters of equal opportunity and diversity. Many, particularly in the area of Local Government and Education, have a legal duty to promote equality and diversity in addition to their general compliance responsibilities. It is therefore imperative that, as trusted advisors, our services comply with the highest standards demanded by our clients. In order that we can deliver on that imperative we will ensure that each Tribal office has an equality and diversity champion who is a subject expert and advises on compliance and development as part of each client service. This covers the full spectrum, from advice and support on policy design through the build and delivery of solutions to the checking of individual words/phrases in person specifications and advertising material
All Tribal staff receive appropriate equality and diversity training, including relevant updates on legislation and best practice to ensure that our appointment methodology is at the very least compliant with all the relevant legal requirements, including:
Sex Discrimination Act 1975 (SDA)
Race Relations Act 1976 (RRA)
Disability Discrimination Act 1995 (DDA)
Part-time Workers (Prevention of Less Favourable Treatment) Regulations 2000
Fixed Term Employees (Prevention of Less Favourable Treatment) Regulations 2002
Employment Equality (Sexual Orientation) Regulations 2003
Employment Equality (Religion or Belief) Regulations 2003
Employment Equality (Age) Regulations 2006
Tribal are recognised leaders in the field of equality and diversity, including legislation compliance. As a central theme of our service offering we build compliance integration programmes and work with organisations in the delivery of change programmes to effect the cultural change necessary to welcome and value a diverse workforce. We regularly undertake and provide research on latest employment, HR, equalities and diversity best practice. This research is regularly communicated to staff through training sessions held throughout the year, via our induction process for new starters and with information held on our intranet. Before new legislation comes into force we hold regular updates with all staff to ensure that our teams are fully aware of the impact of the new legislation and how we should be providing support/advice to our clients.
Our absolute commitment to equality and diversity can be seen by the fact that the Chairman of Tribal Resourcing, Stephen Ward CCIPD, was Vice President of Equal Opportunity for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development and remains a companion.
Once staff have been recruited, they attend regular training seminars on the different and complex aspects of recruitment. To augment the ongoing, on-the-job training, all staff attend a two day `Back to Basics' core skills programme which takes team members through every aspect of the account management process and related systems, ensuring that both new and established staff recognise and work to common standards and procedures.
We are confident that all of our staff are fully aware of the importance of equality/diversity implications for our clients and the candidates with whom we interact. There is an understanding that virtually everything we do, both on behalf of clients and ourselves, carries an equality/diversity dimension. We are equally confident that our staff are trained and supported to meet that challenge.
For assessment, we only use methods that have proven validity and reliability, and all the team have undertaken equal opportunities training specifically in relation to assessment work. Our approach is competency-based and designed so that no applicants can self-select out of the process for any reason other than not having the required competencies for the role. For instance, we are currently working with DEFRA to design an online sift process that is based on real-life work scenarios at HEO level. These are being developed through job analysis interviews and input from diversity specialists. This will become the first stage of the application process for any candidate before an application is completed. In this way, sifting will be based solely on the ability to do the job.
Recruitment Services
Q5. How would your organisation help promote best practice within the Schools recruitment market?
As our expertise and experience extends well beyond recruitment advertising, we can respond to the latest developments and areas of best practice in all areas of recruitment and selection.
Our Education division colleagues have expert knowledge of, and have delivered training on, Fair Selection and the practical application of the DCSF guidance on Safeguarding Children and Safer Recruitment in Education both in schools and to Local Authority colleagues. We would ensure that all our teams supporting schools with recruitment work to and promote best practice in these areas.
Part of the remit of the research team at Tribal is to review changes and developments across the education sector continually and evaluate the potential implications for the employment marketplace. This information will be fed back regularly to users of the contract so that they are able to offer the most up-to-date advice and guidance.
Work in this area includes:
The review of government white and green papers and the production of internal briefing reports which explore the implications for workforce planning, recruitment and retention
The review of other published reports which help to develop a knowledge base around key themes and issues (for example, public perceptions of the public sector)
Specific research of regions to support work with clients. This usually involves looking at the geo-demographic profile of the local population as well as the education and skills gaps within a region
In certain instances, this information can be used as base data against which to profile the staff base of the client; the intention being to determine gaps between the profile of the workforce and the local population.
Thematic research is also part of our portfolio. Recent research has included developing a better understanding of:
The barriers to attracting people into the public sector from the private sector
Leadership styles among managers in the public sector
Views and opinions of people from minority ethnic groups as to 'best practice' in embracing diversity in recruitment advertising messages.
To provide examples, we have carried out specific research into recruitment and retention in Social Care, Environmental Health and Housing Officer recruitment. All these studies involved running focus groups and carrying out telephone questionnaires with staff at numerous local authorities up and down the country as well as with many graduates, Heads of Service and Chief Executives. Seminars were run to share this information with clients and a written report was produced. The Social Care research was also published in Community Care and the environmental health research support by the Chartered Institute of Environmental Health.
Our research can be delivered in a variety of ways:
As written reports
As workshops to key staff within each organisation
Throughout the launch strategy roadshows we will present on best practice
At review meetings with the ATS and Recruitment services suppliers who can facilitate information on best practice to users of each service
Published on a password-protected area of our dedicated microsite
Generic research (as outlined above) is provided to our clients free of charge. Bespoke research is chargeable
Promoted through the quarterly newsletters sent out as a mailshot to our database of clients
Key to best practice is having an acute understanding of the push and pull factors affecting recruitment and retention. To demonstrate our understanding of the Teacher recruitment marketplace, please find our research below:
Teacher Recruitment
There are a number of key drivers of teacher supply and demand that are likely to affect the market over the next few years:
The demand for primary school teachers is likely to rise quite sharply, if the revised ONS figures for the primary school age group prove correct. Eventually, these extra pupils will be reflected in the size of the secondary school population. However, in the outlook period to 2015, secondary school numbers are expected to decline. This decline will mean fewer teachers will be hired, assuming funding remains at present levels and there is no change to relative teachers' salaries.
For both primary and secondary sectors, there is the need to replace those teachers nearing retirement age. Thee latest figures from the DCSF (Workforce, table D4, January 2008) identify 30% of the teaching force as over 50 at March 2006. This was some 107,000 teachers, most of whom will retire within the next ten years. Those who replace them will be younger and will be contracted to work for 40 years or until 65 before they can qualify for a pension. However, younger teachers are more likely to take time out for family reasons.
With two thirds of entrants to secondary teaching and over 80% of entrants to primary teaching being women, there is likely to be an increase in the need for teachers to replace those on maternity or paternity leave.
Within the secondary sector, the changes proposed for the `14-19' sector could have a substantial impact on the demand for teachers. If the new funding body for 16-19 proposed by the government decided to reduce funding for uneconomic post-16 provision where high-cost teachers were working with small groups that did not attract sufficient funding to cover their real costs, then some schools might lose their sixth forms. It is not clear what the effect of such a change might be on teacher supply.
At present, there are 11-16 schools in some parts of the country that have no difficulty in recruiting staff. With the advent of the new diplomas and the introduction of subjects such as psychology, sociology, law and `English as an additional language' into the secondary school timetables that are in many cases not covered directly by the TDA targets, the staffing mix of teachers required by schools may no longer reflect the training targets designed by the DCSF. This is without considering the effects on school staffing ratios of the increased use of `mentors', coaches and others who do not possess direct traditional teaching skills.
However, the greatest uncertainty for the future is around the supply of new entrants into the traditional teaching profession. The supply going forward depends upon the view of teaching as a career amongst potential entrants to the profession. Traditionally, recruitment to primary teaching has been buoyant, and any shortages have been due to policy failures in determining targets.
The secondary school training market has been much more volatile, as has already been demonstrated, with a shortfall in the 1980s during a period of falling pupil rolls where expenditure was unrelated to pupil numbers; a surplus during the recession of the early 1990s followed by a sharp decline in the late 1990s after the introduction of higher education tuition fees. In the early part of this decade, numbers in training rose, and supply from all sources may have been sufficient to meet demand, even though some higher education targets were not met.
Looking ahead, the present uncertainty in the financial markets might be expected to be a positive factor for teacher recruitment, but there has been no evidence of that outcome so far in the present recruitment round. The 2008 recruitment round for PGCE courses has seen fewer applicants than for some years, with around a 10% fall on last year. In 2000, the recruitment position for PGCE courses changed very rapidly after the introduction of the training grant.
The present downturn may be in part a reaction to the adjustments to the golden hello subjects made last year by the TDA, when the level of funding was cut for some subjects. This would explain part of the fall of over 400 in applications for PGCE English courses and nearly 200 for history courses during the early part of the 2008 recruitment round for such courses.
Based on the above, we would look to support schools in recruiting by continuing to research the marketplace thoroughly andupdate each of our clients on the key findings.
In addition, our Education HR specialists will ensure that we reflect the changing arrangements to school teachers' pay and will monitor developments nationally and locally on support staff pay and conditions. Alongside this, we will maintain our salary benchmarking of senior roles to ensure that advice to schools accessing the service is at the leading edge of developing practice.
User guide microsite
At the outset of the contract we will develop a dedicated microsite for all users. This microsite will hold a range of information, including:
Contact details and role overview for the Tribal team
Our recruitment services
Media guide with deadlines
Advertising and non-advertising workflows
Quarterly newsletters
Training events and details of webinars
Online satisfaction surveys and feedback forms
The microsite will also have a dedicated area for signing up to receive our quarterly newsletter by email. The newsletter will include information on market updates, innovative recruitment methods and tools, latest legislation, media intelligence and local demographic and employment trends relating to the education sector.
We will also use our portal to showcase examples of best practice and innovation in recruitment, and we will refresh the content regularly to draw the best from the latest recruitment processes. This will include examples of:
- The best advertisements
- Effective microsites.
- Innovative approaches to contracting.
- Reminders on appropriate use of temporary and fixed term contracts.
Webinar training sessions
Training is an integral part of our service. We are committed to achieving Best Value and ensuring that advertising is cost-effective and competitive. To keep clients up-to-date on the latest developments in the industry/sector and ahead of the market, we believe that our ongoing advice and webinars - where best practice is shared - are essential.
A webinar is a multi-media presentation that allows participants to hear our instructor through a telephone conference call, video conference or web conference whilst following the presentation element via a web page. The web element also offers the added ability to ask questions via an online messaging tool and allows instant polls on topics discussed.
We can run a variety of webinars. These are usually led either by senior advertising or consulting staff, and can cover many HR, recruitment and selection issues as well as advertising.
Workshops could include:
Recruiting to difficult to fill roles
Copywriting and creativity
The use of research in recruitment
Being an Employer of Choice
Competing with the commercial market-place
Introducing the media
Employment law - an update
Diversity
The microsite will hold the list of training events that local clients will be able to access as well as being able to book a place electronically. A text or email alert will then be sent confirming the date/time, with a reminder being sent a few days in advance of the webinar.
Tribal is serious about the way that it manages and shares information, innovation and best practice. As a starting point all of our staff have in-depth sector knowledge with many of the people who work for us having joined us from the public sector. In order to ensure that our people maintain a high level of subject matter knowledge, expertise and use of best practice we deploy a number of processes. These include:
Special Interest Groups (SIGs), set up to ensure that project knowledge, service knowledge and planning is shared with all staff who operate in a particular field or who deliver a particular service.
Briefing guides. The output from SIGs often takes the form of briefing guides for particular clients or services, and these are distributed throughout our offices.
Statements of capability. At the end of each assignment the lead is required to write a short summary of the assignment which describes the business problem, what we did and what the outcome was. These documents help our staff keep up-to-date with work that we are delivering.
Thought Leadership. In order to ensure that we leverage what we learn from our assignments and to help improve the delivery of services, we encourage all project leads to draft thought leadership pieces. All staff, as part of their annual objectives, are committed to be involved in producing at least one Thought Leadership piece or `how to' guide. Progress on these pieces is reviewed at mid-term and end of year reviews. In this way we ensure that we capture the insight and experience of our consultants and ensure that it is shared internally within the organisation and with customers.
Meetings. Associates are kept informed through networking events that take place throughout the year.
Think tanks. To maintain understanding of policy development and significantly contribute to thought leadership, we actively engage with think tanks. Our involvement includes membership of discussion groups and co-development of research, points of view and thought-pieces. We maintain a balanced approach on political perspectives with equal involvement in left and right-leaning groups.
Knowledge share sessions where an expert in a particular professional specialism will share their thoughts and knowledge with a small number of managers in an open discussion.
As the marketplace for attracting candidates changes to meet the fast-evolving economic climate, we will need to review how, where and in what numbers candidates are responding to adverts and other forms of communication. A downturn in the economic market could adversely impact the majority of UK employers, but is likely to increase drastically the volume and quality of candidates that apply to join the education sector as a `safe' employer. This may well have a positive impact on the diversity of applicants that apply, but could have adverse impacts in other ways.
Recruitment Services
Q6 - Please provide an overview of the process for candidate search, including timescales
Search
Our experience is that the requirement for Search is accessed by clients for headship/principal/executive head level roles only. We believe that this pattern will continue because of the cost of search and the reluctance of senior leaders to respond to Search activity.
For senior leadership roles, candidates are likely to be serving head teachers or deputies, and from schools that Ofsted reports prove are successful. Not only have we recruited to numerous Academy Principals and School Headships, but we are a regular port of call for head teachers seeking interim management work. Tribal is very well networked into the teaching profession, with the proven ability to produce quality shortlists for school headships often at very short notice. Our wider school improvement work and support for Children's Services Authorities brings us contacts with a wider range of education professionals, a percentage of which are looking for their next career move.
Our Approach and Methodology
The following paragraphs give an overview of the process and methodology which we would apply to search for candidates for a senior role. Search is often used in conjunction with an advertising campaign, and for completeness we have included a section on how this works.
Every recruitment assignment is different, requiring different packages of services to meet client needs. At Tribal, our approach is characterised by flexibility - drawing from a wide menu of services to put together a recruitment strategy which is right for the client and right for the marketplace, to get the best result. We think this approach helps us work with clients as partners - providing additional capability and capacity where needed, and working constructively with clients' in-house teams.
This section describes what a full search and selection package might look like if we were to work with you.
In general terms, we see the recruitment process in three phases:
The Preparation Phase: This is where we work with you to clarify your brief, scope the job and develop the proposition for how we will sell the role. Time spent at this stage is always time well spent - making sure everyone has a common understanding of the process and target outcomes.
The Marketing Phase: This is where we build a candidate field for this post through a combination of paper advertising, e-advertising and executive search. Search is likely to play a significant part in the process, with us identifying potential candidates within the marketplace and working with them to encourage them to apply.
The Assessment Phase: This covers all ofthe work that takes place once a pool of candidates has been generated, building up a picture of the strengths and weaknesses of the best candidates to put before the panel.
Phase 1: The Preparation Phase
Developing the brief
This is where we work with you to clarify the brief, scope the job and develop the proposition for how we will sell the role to potential candidates. Time spent at this stage is always time well spent; making sure everyone has a common understanding of the process and target outcomes.
At the commencement of the assignment, we would wish to work closely with you to define the challenges, outline the role in greater detail and help clarify what the new job title will deliver and the competencies therefore needed by candidates to ensure they are successful. It will be helpful if the hiring manageris available for the briefing meeting and if we were also able to meet with any other key stakeholders with whom the successful candidate would be working on a day-to-day basis.
This knowledge supports our understanding of the criteria of the post to assist in finding the most suitable candidates; ascertaining the selection criteria for selection and assessment (and, by implication, parameters for the search) and establishing the realistic marketing points of both the job on offer and the client itself as an organisation.
This initial scoping meeting also provides the forum for clear communication lines and contacts to be established, with appropriate Tribal personnel being introduced to the contacts within the organisation. This is an important aspect, as a clear flow of communication and information is vital to the successful running of any assignment.
Phase II: The Marketing Phase
Advertising and Microsite
We will customize our advertising strategy and make recommendations to the client based on the role to be filled, the nature of the market and the local context. However, on briefing we will seek to refine and finalise this strategy with you, ensuring that we meet your desired target audience and put over the right messages for you. . This is particularly important for schools in challenging circumstances.
As to marketing the role to potential candidates, we would recommend that you choose to use a microsite for this assignment. In terms of audience, our experience is that a microsite will reach a broader range of people and, paired with online advertising, will help to attract the attention of passive job seekers. We would use information from the microsite to provide you with performance metrics on the different media used to advertise the roles.
Search Strategy
Once the initial scoping meeting has taken place and the full brief of the assignment agreed, we would wish to commence the search process. Advertising by itself does not guarantee universal coverage, nor will it match suitable and qualified people who are not actively job seeking. We will provide an Executive Search service effectively to find the people who are difficult to reach.. We do not subcontract the search, but employ our own research team.
Good research is about method and purpose. It is driven by a number of tightly defined reasons for the questions explored, and the resulting answers are correspondingly robust. This is as true for the research conducted during an executive search as for any other.
Proper research in our industry depends on a very thorough briefing meeting with the client and any stakeholders they may wish us to engage with. We do, of course, bring our own insights and understandings to this conversation and are most definitely not expecting to be told where to look. However, such a briefing meeting enables us to swap ideas and get your opinion on the original ideas we will bring.
Consequently, any ideas we come up with before that meeting are inevitably tentative. However, we would be delighted to use the search geography proposed above as a basis for discussion.
Candidate Management
We would provide a full response handling service which would operate as follows:
Responses to the advertisement and/or the website and/or via search would be directed to us (via email address or telephone - which would include out of hours voicemail). Informal enquiries would also be encouraged. Consultant(s) would contact as appropriate those potential candidates who wish to have an informal discussion, and those found through the search process to encourage applications.
Completed applications would be directed to Tribal Resourcing; all applications are acknowledged in writing (or email if more appropriate). Acknowledgement letters will include, again, the outline timetable for the next step in the process and the contact details for Tribal Resourcing.
All completed applications are logged into the database, and a schedule of applicants drawn up from applications received. This is an overview of each application, giving outline details such as name, current post and current salary. Clients will receive regular updates while the advert is running.
We will follow up with all potential candidates who login to the microsite (unless they have specifically asked us not to contact them) ahead of the closing deadline. Where a potential applicant has been found through the search, our researchers will contact them again in the final days before the deadline to encourage an application or, if the person in question has decided not to apply, to ascertain reasons why they have not done so..
Upon reaching the closing date, a full schedule of applications will be submitted to the client within two working days, along with an outline of the search processes and results.
As can be seen, our response handling is thorough and efficient. Our response team is fully briefed on the posts on offer, and is proficient in running multiple assignments. We are registered under the Data Protection Act, and comply fully with the storage and distribution of data collected via assignments.
Note: Depending on the specification agreed with the client, the process might end here, post-closing date, with the schedule of applicants for the post along with a copy of the applications being sent to the client.
Indicative timescale for search
In the event that the client specifies support for Phase 1 and 2 only and does not require that assessment stage (we would anticipate that most schools/academies would take this view) the timescale should look as described below.
In a competitive market it is essential to make the process candidate-friendly while ensuring that the school moves quickly from a closing date (candidates attracted) to the offer to successful candidates. Prior to this the set-up phase needs to ensure that messages to candidates are accurate, appropriate and consistent, and that the search profile is clearly defined. To achieve a successful outcome we would ideally look at:
3 to 4 weeks - Set up phase
Day 1 - Search starts (plus advertisement to press if used)
Day 8 - Advertisement appears (all materials available to read online down load)
Day 26 - closing date and end of search at 12.00 noon (applications can be emailed)
Day 27 PM - Shortlisting. (candidates selected for interview are telephoned).
Day 34 - Selection process
Candidates contacted via search need sufficient time to consider whether they want to take the next career step and often need a little more time than candidates responding to advertisements. (The latter are actively looking and have already made a decision to move, whereas the former may need to think about it for a while). In practice it is necessary to leave the widest possible search window to ensure that candidates can commit to an application.
The timeline needs to reflect the need to stay within resignation dates for teachers and to avoid school holiday periods where possible.
Phase III: The Assessment Phase
If schools/academies require support beyond Phase 2 described above, we believe this is likely to be for Headteacher/Principal or Executive Headteacher/Principal roles only. The timeline described above would be longer and an assessment phase would be agreed with the client, drawn from the following outline specification:
Sifting and shortlisting
Post-closing date, the schedule of applicants for the post, along with a copy of the applications, will be submitted to the client.
We will sift applications against the agreed competencies of the post to produce a shortlist of candidates for discussion and agreement at the longlisting meeting with the client...
Those candidates not being longlisted will be informed of the outcome of their application and thanked for their interest. Feedback on the decision will be given by the Tribal consultant on request from rejected applicants.
Longlist Interviews
We will undertake interviews with longlisted candidates to assess their competencies further. These interviews will be fully administered by us, and will be held at our offices. These will be conducted by two senior Tribal consultants.
Should you wish to use a technical adviser for the interviews we would be happy to recommend someone, although we would of course not use anyone who you did not want to be involved. Equally, if there is someone who you would particularly like us to involve as a technical adviser at this stage, we would be very happy to work with them.
Reports on all those met will be submitted to the client to give a reasoned view on the suitability, or otherwise, of the candidates to proceed further. These reports will be discussed at the shortlisting meeting with the client.
Shortlisting
Prior to the shortlisting meeting, the reports on the longlisted candidates will be submitted to the client. We will attend a meeting with the client's panel to discuss the candidates in greater depth, and determine those candidates to be taken forward to assessment and final interview.
Candidates not being taken forward will be informed by us of the outcome of their application, and feedback given by Consultants if requested.
Candidates being taken forward will be informed and arrangements made regarding accommodation, travel and so on.
Assessment Centre
We would recommend that an assessment centre is held for shortlisted candidates. We will be happy to discuss individual requirements and design a centre suitable for each client's needs.
References
We would take up references on all shortlisted candidates and ensure these were available to the interview panel at the time of the final interviews. We would advise, however, that in the case of any candidate currently working in the private sector who comes forward, their references may not become available unless offered the position. We would nevertheless seek to secure at least one reference for such candidates, though this is unlikely to relate to their current employment.
Final Stages
We would be happy to provide a consultant to attend the final interviews to act as a facilitator for the days and give input and advice as appropriate. We can also organise the administration of these interviews in partnership with the client's personnel. In addition, we can give suggested options on presentation topics, and advise on interview questions and areas of the candidates' applications to be explored in greater depth during the final stages of the process.
Recruitment Service
Q7 Overview of the process for candidate attraction, including timescales.
The attraction of candidates will require different levels of support, depending on the role to be filled, the school's capacity to undertake some of the process and the local context including market factors. In the case of teaching staff the fixed resignation dates can squeeze the timescales.
What follows is a summary of the approaches we would discuss with local authority officers/schools as the client in order to determine the best approach for the particular vacancy in the local context.
Also included is a detailed specification which describes a full support process. This is used by Tribal as a menu of services from which a customized solution can be selected by the client.
Preparation phase
1. An initial briefing meeting/telephone conference with head/lead governor/LA contact (the client) to discuss timelines, options for the candidate attraction process and to establish an understanding of the vacancy and the school's requirements while determining a specification. (See example specification below).
2. Scrutiny of materials from the client (job description, person specification, salary and benefits, etc) to establish the key requirements. We would benchmark the salary to ensure that this is competitive for the role in the market for similar posts and advise the client of our view.
3 Agree the media for advertising the vacancy and who will be generating the advertisement, place the advertisement and agree the timeline for the process.
Marketing phase - Advertising and Microsite
4. Advertising - We will customize our advertising strategy and make recommendations to the client based on the role to be filled, the nature of the market and the local context. However, on briefing we will seek to refine and finalise this strategy, ensuring that we meet the desired target audience and put over the right messages. This is particularly important for schools in challenging circumstances, academy recruitment and new roles in schools.
Our creative and media teams will support the preparation of professional, innovative, attractive and effective advertisements to ensure the initial interest of candidates. The advertisement then allows online access to web-based material to ensure that candidates have rapid access to customized further information.
Advertisement examples are given at the end of this document.
5. Micro sites - For senior roles we have found that the use of a microsite has been successful in attracting strong fields of candidates. Tribal has worked effectively to support schools to develop microsites to make recruitment an online process which is high quality and candidate-friendly. It means no more printing of packs, fast turnaround and the opportunity to build a bank of examples rapidly. Candidates can access information online anytime, anywhere; as can governors who are starting the recruitment process.
The use of a microsite is not automatically better than any other media. However, it does work effectively if the school tailors material for the specific processes, sends messages to the candidates that will attract them and is in the market at the right time with the right salary/package.
Timescales
In a competitive market it is essential to make the process candidate-friendly whilst ensuring that the school moves quickly from a closing date (candidates attracted) to the offer to the successful candidates. Prior to this, the set-up phase needs to ensure that messages to candidates are accurate, appropriate and unambiguous. To achieve a successful outcome we would ideally look at:
3 weeks - Set up phase
Day 1 - Advertisement to press
Day 8 - Advertisement appears (all materials available to read online down load)
Day 26 - closing date at 12.00 noon (applications can be emailed)
Day 26 PM - Shortlisting. (candidates selected for interview are telephoned).
Day 33 - Selection process
Moving rapidly from closing date to appointment is essential in a market where schools are constrained by fixed resignation dates for teachers, which causes huge peaks and troughs of activity. This, combined with the fact that many similar/identical roles are advertised at the same time, makes it likely that candidates may be on the `short lists' of more than one school.
Example: Support for the recruitment of a Deputy Head.
- This example describes a school seeking a full range of support for the recruitment process.
1. Initial meeting with Head to agree the specification, requirements and timeline. (2hours)
(On Site)
2. Preliminary work to support the head in the recruitment process by:
- Producing a recruitment timeline and actions for the post.
- Providing a draft advertisement and identifying publications and advertising costs.
- Providing draft person and job specifications against current market conditions.
- Contributing to drafting material for candidates to go on the microsite (see 4 below).
- Providing an indicative salary for the post, benchmarked against current advertisements for similar roles.
(Off site)
3. Second (3 hours) to talk through the draft documents and provide advice. This will include:
- Finalising material for candidates and the draft advertisement.
- Setting dates for the entire process and determining who will be involved at the shortlisting and selection/interview stages.
- Determining when references will be requested and who will undertake this task.
- Agreeing costs for the advertisement, publications/online etc
(On site)
4. Identifying and purchasing a generic domain name (for use in all future recruitment) and host server for the micro site (or use the school's site).
(Off site)
5. Build a microsite to host the recruitment materials to hold:
- A letter from the Head about the role, context and some `key messages' (to attract those we want and deter those we don't)
- Person Specification.
- Job Specification
- A copy of the advertisement.
- How to apply
An application form
Further information:
- Hyperlinks to relevant pages of existing websites
- School vision and ethos.
- Information about the school
(Off site)
5. Refining the advertisement for final approval and dispatch of final advertisement copy to the selected publications. - Advised as the TES.
(Off site)
6 Responding to enquiries from interested candidates during the process. ( The mobile number and email details of the main Tribal contact supporting the process will be available on the microsite).
(Off site)
7. Receiving completed applications/CV's.
(Off site)
8. Copying and distributing applications to the Selection Panel and Advisers.
(Off site)
9. Providing a shortlisting grid for the Selection Panel and Advisers consistent with the agreed person specification.
(Off site)
10. Attending a meeting with the nominated Selection Panel and Advisers to shortlist applicants.
(On Site)
11 Taking up two references for each shortlisted candidate with references to be available for use on the second day of interviews.
(Off site)
12. Preparing a model for the two day process and drafting interview questions/exercises for short listed candidates.
(Off site)
13 Interviewing alongside the Head in an advisory capacity. (Two days - one Tribal employee).
(On Site)
14. Telephone feedback to unsuccessful short listed candidates.
(Off site)
Not within the scope of this proposal
1. Booking/organising of rooms, venues, catering etc for the selection process.
2. Booking/organizing of accommodation, parking or other arrangements for candidates /advisers.
3. Psychometric or other tests.
Advertisement examples
Recruitment Services
Q8. Please provide an overview of the process for psychometric testing/assessment centres?[Author ID1: at Tue Feb 24 09:45:00 2009 ]
Our Assessment Services
Tribal has considerable experience of delivering a range of assessment activities, both for selection and development. We operate at all levels: assessing administrative and secretarial staff, junior, middle and senior managers and “professional” experts (such as IT and finance staff).
We are used to running many different types of assessment events from 1:1 profiling of Senior Civil Servants at the Government Office of the South East to volume graduate assessments for the Food Standards Agency. Multiple assignments also feature in our portfolio and we are particularly strong at assessing individual team styles where whole new teams are being recruited, such as the leadership cadre at the NHS Institute for Innovation and Improvement (NHSI).
Tribal currently holds a register of consultants and associate consultants, of whom over 100 are registered to level B, and of that number vast majorities are trained to interpret the SHL Occupational Personality Questionnaire. We also have a number of consultants trained in the interpretation and feedback of other instruments including MBTI; FIRO B; NEO; CPI; WAVE and the SHL Work Styles Questionnaire.
We are used to providing interpretation of these instruments linked to key areas to probe at interview, and have delivered that service at all levels of the Civil Service from admin assessments, through technical interviews, right up to SCS appointments for the DCSF, DfT, Home Office, DTI and the Ministry of Defence.
A very relevant example would be the psychometric feedback and key questions we provided to interview panels, interviewing newly qualified and experienced solicitors for the Government Legal Services.
Our approach - variety of exercises
We firmly believe that the best way to predict a candidate's future success in any role is to observe their performance in exercises that are an accurate reflection of the job. This may involve the development of situation-specific role plays, group discussions that deal with real team issues or using information technology where appropriate. Psychometric instruments are an important tool in any assessment centre, but we believe they are not a substitute for this work simulation or experiential approach. In addition, it is important that the recruiting manager is involved in the assessment process. This may be as straightforward as an interview through to the creation of a Fact Find exercise where the manager acts as the Resource Person.
A robust and fair process
Developing a robust and equitable process is the cornerstone of our approach to projects. Following best practice procedures, underpinned by adherence to a clear assessment methodology, is just the starting point. Being clear about what is to be assessed; ensuring a clear link between assessment tools and job and person specifications, and ensuring that the process reflects the values and culture of the organisation are the foundations of a successful assessment event.
However, it is important, given the number and types of assessment activities, that we ensure a consistency of approach and quality of delivery. We do this in several ways:
Every bespoke exercise is developed with its own scoring matrices and assessor guide. For example, our work at the North West Development Agency (NWDA) involved the development of case studies to assess over 100 staff
The use of Behaviourally Anchored Ratings ensures that assessors are consistent. These are developed for each exercise and each assessment centre
We have an informal quality assurance process where feedback is sought from internal and external clients on both the standard of assessors and the quality of the assessment outputs
We have a formal quality assurance process where an assessor, who is independent of the process, observes the different assessors and moderates the scores
Psychometric tools are scrutinised for fairness
We bring in specialist organisations such as Blind in Business and Prospects (who work alongside those with Aspergers Syndrome) to work with GIS candidates so that together, we can ensure that suitable adjustments are made to the assessment centre process.
Working as partners
We have an absolute commitment to working with our clients as partners, not just as consultants or service suppliers. We adopt this approach with our own suppliers and this, in turn, has contributed to the publication of a new assessment tool, Hogrefe's Leadership Judgement Indicator.
Our approach to working with our clients is reflected in the training events we run to help train them as assessors and act as mentors for new assessors as well as HR teams. When faced with a problem, we like to brainstorm ideas alongside clients in order to find a creative yet practical solution, often encouraging them to consider new approaches. Honesty is also crucial and we encourage two-way feedback both formally (through client audits) and informally through meetings and ongoing reviews. Sharing thoughts and opinions leads to a better result for all parties: clients, candidates and Tribal.
We also believe in adopting a similarly facilitative approach with candidates. As well as sending practice leaflets and candidate briefing packs to aid assessment centre preparation, we have a helpline that candidates can use if they have any queries. In particularly sensitive situations such as redundancy, we also have run Q&A workshops so that prospective candidates can find out more about the process. Before running assessment centres for the NHSI, we held a workshop at the client's site which was attended by over 60 prospective candidates. During the session, we were able to identify fears and misconceptions and address these as well as conveying information about the process.
Flexibility
Whilst assessment is a rigorous process, its application can be adapted to meet many different situations and circumstances. Working with the HM Prison Service, we were required to develop a complete on-line assessment solution, within six weeks, for 135 staff. This included the building of a microsite, the creation and validation of two case studies and the development of a self-assessment tool as well as the provision of project management and tracking systems. We met our targets and the whole project was completed on schedule.
With the NWDA (North West Development Agency), the restructuring of Business Links meant that the design and implementation of the assessment process had to work in parallel with the organisational and HR demands of such a huge reorganisation. The need to keep abreast of changes, and respond to them, within tight deadlines led to the identification of the different stages of the process and the key success factors at each stage. Defining what had to be achieved, how this would be done, and how long these activities would take, facilitated planning of the restructure by the Change Management Team. Regular meetings and conference calls ensured that we were able review and adapt the process in order to respond quickly to the constantly changing organisational factors.
We also recognise that the traditional one-day assessment centre approach is not appropriate for all roles and situations. Whilst working with Nottingham City Council to recruit a new senior HR team, we were required to devise a process that allowed all candidates for all posts to be seen on the same day. This was to enable an assessment of how individuals might work together if part of a management team. This involved a timetable with three streams and staggered start times for candidates. In addition we had to incorporate a buffet with stakeholders, as well as interviews with the recruiting manager who also wanted to participate in a bespoke scenario-based exercise.
Feedback
All of the outputs from assessment centres are fed back to our clients both verbally and in writing. We produce a variety of different reports from summaries identifying strengths and weaknesses to detailed competency-based reports (see attached). The type of report required is dependent on timescales and client needs. We regularly produce development reports for successful candidates which are used to plan induction and training for newly appointed staff.
We are also fully committed to providing feedback to candidates, usually by telephone. We adopt a developmental approach to feedback seeking to support and encourage, not purely judge. Unsolicited feedback from NHSI candidates showed how much they valued this approach allowing them to consider their options whether they were successful or not. The success of this approach is further evidenced by a recent requirement to undertake an additional project to map competencies onto the Department of Health Knowledge and Skills Framework, with a view to identifying development needs amongst the 90 staff who went through the assessment process.
Additional Projects
Assessing a significant number of staff from one organisation at similar levels provides an unparalleled opportunity to look at the composite strengths and weaknesses of the assessed group. At Anglia Ruskin University, we assessed over 60 people for a range of senior positions such as the Dean and Head of Schools. Having completed the assessment process, both quantitative and qualitative outputs were analysed to produce a comprehensive report showing the development needs of the group as a whole. A gap analysis showed where the group of managers was in relation to the ideal Anglia Ruskin Manager as defined by the University. This information is currently being used by the Head of OD to feed into development for this cadre.
This process was also undertaken with 135 HR professionals at the Prison Service. The report has been used to define the development needs of the group and has formed the basis of a series of development interventions for the successful candidates
Our Team
Our assessment team is a mix of Occupational Psychologists and HR Professionals. This gives us a blend of academic rigour combined with a strong focus on practical application. In addition to the core team, we have access to a pool of over 100 associates. Before working with us, associates undergo an accreditation process involving an interview and observed management of an assessment centre.
Many of our assessors have experience in other professional disciplines such as Finance, as well as having worked at senior levels in both private and public sector organisations. They are therefore able to bring a breadth of experience to the assessment process.
All assessors are qualified to BPS Level B and trained to use a range of personality instruments including the Occupational Personality Questionnaire (OPQ), WAVE Professional Styles, 16PF, NEO, MBTI etc. However, our strength in using these tools stems from our ability to map the outputs to a client's competency framework as well as linking them to a candidate's observed behaviours in the work simulation exercises. This was particularly evidenced in our work with the NHSI where many of the competencies related to emotional intelligence. In order to show transparency and clarity in our assessment process, we mapped the outputs of the OPQ onto the relevant competencies and behaviours.
In addition, most of our assessors are trained in the use of competency-based interview techniques and have developed questions for use by clients in interviews. Whilst contracted to assess sales staff for Volvo Cars, we produced a range of competency-based questions, together with a rating system, which were used by assessors as part of the assessment centre.
National Reach
The assessment team covers all areas of the UK with staff based North, South, East and West. This gives us flexibility in resourcing whilst reducing travel times and consultant expenses - thus maximising efficiency for Tribal and our clients. This was particularly evident during the HM Prison Service project, where there was a need to deploy over 10 assessor/coaches over a four-week period to all Prison Establishments in England and Wales.
Recruitment Services
Q9. Please provide an outline of how your organisation would expect to manage the customer relationship with the different customer groups
As a highly experienced recruitment and resourcing solutions provider we already work with over 150 local authorities throughout the country, and so have easy access to key decision makers and budget holders. Across the Tribal Group we work with nearly 95% of all local authorities and are the UK leader in consultancy, professional support and delivery services to the education and skills sector. Tribal is also the largest provider of inspection services for the Office for Standards in Education (Ofsted) and information, advice and guidance to the Offender Learning and Skills Service (OLASS).
In addition, Tribal is one of the main providers of services to the Quality Improvement Agency (QIA).
We also supply consultancy and support to the Learning and Skills Council and work with the Training and Development Agency (TDA) and Lifelong Learning UK. We have built a strong relationship with the TDA through our work on teacher development and mathematics.
Regular clients include schools, colleges, universities, local authorities and work-based learning providers, as well as private, not-for-profit and third sector organisations.
We now manage more than £400 million of capital projects in education and have a proven track record of delivering projects and bespoke commercial solutions to schools, on time and budget.
The following structure diagram illustrates the scope of people and support services that will be involved through the project. It also shows the positioning within the overall contract management team of the 48 resourcing specialists who will be actively promoting this specific Lot within the contract. All people are employed by Tribal on a full-time basis, and depending upon their role / responsibility, the stage in the contract and the demand levels of the schools, will work either part or full-time on this project.
Set out below are details of how Tribal will establish partnership working arrangements at the outset of the contract with both the corporate team and directorates, as well as of and how we will ensure the development of good working relationships over the term of the contract.
Developing on-going Relationships
Over time, Tribal believes that effective partnerships are developed out of a joint commitment to improvement and to working alongside the customer groups to find new ways of delivering effective cost savings and improved outcomes. This can only happen if both partners are open and honest, and agency staff are responsive to the needs and demands posed by customers.

The customer groups are defined as:
1. Local Authorities
2. Schools/academies
3. Clusters/Collaborations/Federations of schools/academies.
Our approach to managing enquiries, responses, delivery and billing will be handled through our regionalised network of offices.
In addition to online and centralised service centre however, Tribal will also use its national office and staff base to support schools, authorities and regional bodies. With offices in London, Bristol, Birmingham, Nottingham, Manchester and Leeds, our network and 200-strong client support account teams will provide regionalised support to ensure that the system achieves its goals and objectives. Our staff activity and structure will mean that the DCSF will have a local expert team to promote the system of the following numbers:
London (for the South East) - 185 people
Bristol (for the South West and South Wales as needed) - 361 people
Birmingham (for the West Midlands) - 139 people
Nottingham (for the East Midlands) - 117 people
Manchester (for the North West) - 132 people
Leeds (for the North East) - 213 people
Newcastle (for the North and Scotland as needed) - 308 people
Our teams already provide a complete localised service that is dedicated to public sector employers and their recruitment needs at all levels through face-to-face and office-based services. Their involvement in supporting this project will be as follows:
All client-facing account management staff will be fully briefed and expected to:
Attend meetings and seminars and speak at group events to explain what benefits the system will provide for employers and candidates alike. The specific emphasis will be on ensuring that HR staff within authorities, Headteachers and school-based staff and governors understand what the system has to offer them how to implement it for their own recruitment purposes and the costs involved. But perhaps most importantly, it will be on ensuring they regard the system as a fundamentally strategic and tactical tool in their recruitment armoury.
Regionally drive take-up of the system through the organisation of regionalised launch events that Tribal will manage. It is planned that events will happen around the country at time of launch and then again at six-monthly intervals thereafter.
Include the system website as a recommended medium for advertising all schools-based vacancies through its inclusion as the main media of any requested media schedules - whether the school originator is currently part of the system or not.
Be able to despatch further information about the system via email..
All office-based account handling and support staff will be fully briefed and expected to:
Regionally drive take-up of the system through their telephone and email dealings with authorities and schools, and by supporting account managers' activities.
Be able to steer and support any enquirer towards an appropriate destination (individual, URL, system link, support desk or otherwise) to answer any query posed.
Be able to despatch further information about the system via email.
The type of service required (Candidate search, candidate attraction, psychometric testing, assessment centre work or mixtures or all of these) and the volume of work will determine the most effective model for managing the relationship effectively and efficiently.
Our approach to the provision of recruitment services is to tailor delivery to the customer's needs. This would start from the provision of examples of service specifications, which would then be refined to produce an agreed model for a candidate search and/or attraction and/or assessment centre. To operate this effectively, we envisage operating as follows:
For Education/Corporate HR Teams Local Authority customers
Each local authority would be allocated a named Account Director (and an alternative contact) and all enquiries would be channelled through them. We would seek to establish a small number (two or three) of LA contacts as the channel through which all enquiries, responses, delivery and billing are handled.
For each piece of work a specialist will be allocated who will work with named school(s) and undertake the detailed scoping of the work and delivery.
If the arrangement is for multiple projects over time, we would agree an evaluation and review the schedule with the local Authority.
Tribal believes that effective relationships are forged out of shared knowledge and trust. Therefore it is considered imperative at the outset of the contract that Tribal develops a strong knowledge base of the issues and challenges being faced within each individual local authority. It also means agreeing a clear action plan with the LA to support schools' take-up of the ATS system and contract, with stated targets and outcomes to work towards. Then Tribal delivers, as it is only by achieving these targets and outcomes that trust can be built between Tribal and its clients.

For individual School or Academy customers plus clusters, collaborations and federations.
Each school/academy/cluster would be allocated a named Account Director (and an alternative contact) within Tribal, and all enquiries would be channeled through them.
A specialist will also be allocated, who will work with named school(s) and undertake the detailed scoping of the work and delivery.
Tribal believes the key challenge of developing relationships with schools is to provide them with high levels of support and guidance to enable them to make their recruitment more efficient and effective. When recruiting to new or replacement posts, most schools are intent on either following previous approaches or making the process quick. There may of course be nothing wrong with this, but often due to increased competition for good staff and the changing behaviours of today's applicants, previous practices may now be outdated, costly or burdensome. We believe change in this behaviour can best be enacted through direct support from the team of professionals associated with this contract who can guide them through the process and provide information to help them make the right choices (in terms of candidate search, candidate attraction, psychometric testing, assessment centre work, or mixtures or all of these).
This team can also help to illustrate successes elsewhere, present statistics of proof surrounding the media, monitor the success of activities as they are happening and provide structured feedback to support ongoing improvements for the future.
Recruitment Services
Q10 - Is your organisation part of the OGCbs Framework Agreement for Recruitment Services?
No. We can confirm that Tribal is not part of the OGCbs Framework Agreement for Recruitment Services.
Recruitment Services
Q11 - If so, will you provide the same terms as part of this agreement?
No. N/A - Tribal are not part of the OGCbs Framework Agreement for Recruitment Services.
Section D - Response to Terms and Conditions of Contract
We fundamentally accept the Terms and Conditions (included in the ITT as Document 5) but would wish to discuss the following clauses further with the DCSF.
Contractual Reference |
Why the proposed amendment |
Proposed Amendment |
DCSF's Response (Accept or Reject) |
2. |
If we cannot deliver to the required completion date, because of something that the Department has done or failed to do, we would not want to be liable for the failure to achieve completion by the required date. |
Commencement and Continuation The Contractor shall commence the Services on 1st April 2009 and, subject to Clause 10.1 shall complete the Services on or before ***enter end date*** ***, provided that the Contractor shall not be liable for any failure or delay in delivery of the Services to the extent due to any act or omission of the Department. |
|
3.3 |
If there were a change that was specific to the Department or to this individual contract, that would not be a change with which we would otherwise be obliged to comply and therefore we would wish to recover our costs for complying with it. |
The Contractor shall comply with all statutory provisions including all prior and subsequent enactments, amendments and substitutions relating to that provision and to any regulations made under it, provided that the Contractor shall be entitled to recover its reasonable costs for such compliance where any subsequent change is specific to the Contract or to the Department |
|
5.2 |
A change on the part of the Department might also have an impact upon the time required to deliver the project and we would therefore wish to agree an extension of time (if we needed it) resulting from that change. |
The Contractor shall use its best endeavours to accommodate any changes to the needs and requirements of the Department provided that it shall be entitled to a reasonable extension of time (if reasonably required) to enable it to deliver the change and payment for any additional costs it incurs as a result of any such changes. The amount of such additional costs to be agreed between the parties in writing. |
|
8 |
In the event that we create new IPR in the course of providing the services that might have commercial benefits to us to use elsewhere, we would wish to discuss the terms of a licence to use that IPR on terms to be agreed. |
Copyright Copyright in all reports and other documents and materials arising out of the performance by the Contractor of their duties under this Contract are to be assigned to and shall vest in the Crown absolutely. This condition shall apply during the continuance of this Contract and after its termination howsoever arising. The Department shall not unreasonably withhold consent to any request by the Contractor to exploit such copyright commercially on terms to be agreed with the Department. |
|
9.2
|
In relation to deductions, these would need to be agreed by us rather than being unilaterally determined by the Customer. |
All deductions to be agreed by the parties |
|
9.2.1 |
We would always wish to have a right to remedy any failure before rights accrue against us. |
Require the Contractor promptly to re-perform or replace the relevant part of the Services without additional charge to the Department and (in the event that the Contractor fails to so re-perform or replace), |
|
9.3 |
We accept liability for direct losses resulting from our breach of contract or our negligent acts.
|
Drafting to be amended to replace that losses are direct losses resulting from our breach of contract or negligent acts. Customer to mitigate its losses. |
|
9.4
|
We would always expect liability to be linked to the annual value of the contract. As this is a framework agreement, we suggest that in the first year it is limited to actual spend and in subsequent years, the spend for the preceding 12 months. We would also expect all indirect and consequential losses to be excluded.
|
Replace with a new clause capping liability and a further clause excluding consequential and indirect losses. |
|
9.5 |
Clause 9.5 and 9.6 reflect internal requirements imposed upon us to limit liability and exclude consequential loss liability |
Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, save for fraudulent misrepresentation or death or personal injury caused by its negligence, the aggregate liability of the Contractor whether in contract, tort or otherwise shall not exceed the total sum due to the Contractor under the Contract. |
|
9.6 |
Clause 9.5 and 9.6 reflect internal requirements imposed upon us to limit liability and exclude consequential loss liability |
Neither party shall be liable to the other for any indirect or consequential loss whatsoever including without limitation loss of profit loss of revenue or loss of contract. |
|
10.2
|
As drafted this would allow the Customer to terminate for minor breaches which we think is unreasonable.
|
Amend to material breach |
|
15.1 |
As there would be a cost to us in providing such assistance, we would like to recover those costs in the event that we terminated for Department default. |
The Contractor shall, at no cost to the Department (save where the Contractor has terminated the Contract due to the default of Department, in which event it shall be entitled to recover its reasonable costs incurred in the provision of such assistance), promptly provide such assistance and comply with such timetable as the Department may reasonably require for the purpose of ensuring an orderly transfer of responsibility upon the expiry or other termination of this Contract. The Department shall be entitled to require the provision of such assistance both prior to and, for a reasonable period of time after the expiry or other termination of this Contract. |
|
General comments:-
In the tender there are a number of requirements in the tender response that are likely to impact the contract and should have operative clauses in the contract eg Transition Plan, Security Plan, Business Continuity Plan and Disaster Recovery Plan, and Exit Plan. We would expect the contract to include provisions that the Customer shall perform its obligations under these various plans.
Keith Pilling
Board Director and Contract Sponsor
Section E - Declaration
DOCUMENT 7: DECLARATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE TENDERER
Declarations
1 TRIBAL GROUP PLC (Name of Tenderer) declares that
EITHER:
that we accept the Department's terms and conditions (included in this ITT as Document 5) as the basis of the contract;
OR
that we have attached proposed amendments to the Department's terms and conditions (included in this ITT as Document 5) and in the format highlighted in annex 1 as Section D of our tender response and
2 declare that we have not communicated to any other party the amount or approximate amount of the tender price other than in confidence and for the express purpose of obtaining insurances or a bond in connection with this tender. The tender price has not been fixed nor adjusted in collusion with any third party, and
3 declare that the tender will remain valid until 15th June 2009 and that we are not entitled to claim from the Department any costs or expenses incurred in preparing the tender or subsequent negotiations whether or not the tender is successful.
Signed on behalf of the Tenderer
Keith Pilling
Board Director and Contract Sponsor

www.tribalgroup.co.uk Page 1 of 284
Section A - Table of Contents 15 February 2010
Tribal
Hosting Platform
Tribal
Scaled-up Hosting Platform